PROJECT MANUAL - Army and Air Force Exchange Service Dual Food... · 2018-05-09 · PROJECT MANUAL VOLUME 2 of 2 CONSTRUCT DUAL FOOD JBSA-SAM HOUSTON, TEXAS ... Class PB 07 24 00-9

PROJECT MANUAL VOLUME 2 of 2 CONSTRUCT DUAL FOOD JBSA-SAM HOUSTON, TEXAS AAFES PN: 3720-14-000002

CONTRACTS: COMBINED WORK – ALL TRADES

BY:

DATE: 04 MAY 2018 SOLICITATION SPECIFICATIONS

Illinois Design Firm License Number 184-002661 Post Office Box 820 600 West Main Street ▪ Suite 2 Carbondale, Illinois 62901 618 ▪ 457 ▪ 5709 Fax 618 ▪ 457 ▪ 5638

A R C H I T E C T S

CONSTRUCT DUAL FOOD JBSA-SAM HOUSTON, TEXAS

AAFES PN: 3720-14-000002

ARCHITECT

h. michael bohnsack ARCHITECTS 600 West Main Street Suite 2

Carbondale, Illinois 62901 618 457 5709 Fax 457 5638

E-mail [email protected]

PROFESSIONAL CONSULTANTS

LAND SURVEYING/CIVIL ENGINEERING/LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE

Mach IV Engineering & Surveying LLC 2260 Salscheider Court

Green Bay, Wisconsin 54313 920 569 5765 Fax 569 5767 E-mail [email protected]

STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING

Hodge Structural Engineers, P.C. 22 Chestnut Street

Evansville, Indiana 47713 812 422 2558 Fax 422 3337

E-mail [email protected] TX Firm No. F-9028, Exp. 11/30/2018

MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL/FIRE PROTECTION ENGINEERING

McCoy & Howard Consulting Engineers, Inc. 413 West Main Street Post Office Box 581

Mt. Vernon, Illinois 62864 618 242 0473 Fax 242 2330

E-mail [email protected]

hmb PROJECT NO. 1506.0

04 MAY 2018

© 2018 h. michael bohnsack ARCHITECTS


AAFES PN: 3720-14-000002

ARCHITECT: h. michael bohnsack ARCHITECTS

Project Manual: Section 00 86 00

All Sections of Division 1 (Except Section 01 35 56)

All Sections of Division 2 (Except Section 02 41 16)

Section 03 35 56

Section 04 20 00

Section 05 40 00

Section 05 50 00

Section 05 52 00

All Sections of Division 6





SIGNATURE All Sections of Division 11

Section 12 48 13

CURRENT DATE 04 May 2018 Section 31 31 16

Section 32 31 00

LICENSE EXPIRATION DATE 30 Nov 2018 Section 32 33 13

Drawing Sheets: All T-Sheets, All CA-Sheets, All A-Sheets, All FS-Sheets

PROFESSIONAL LAND SURVEY/CIVIL ENGINEER: Mach IV Engineering & Surveying, LLC


Section 02 41 16

Section 31 10 00

Section 31 20 00

Section 31 21 00

Section 31 23 23

Section 31 23 33

Section 32 01 00

Section 32 12 16

Section 32 13 13

Section 32 13 73

SIGNATURE Section 32 17 23


CURRENT DATE 04 May 2018

LICENSE EXPIRATION DATE 30 Jun 2018

Drawing Sheets: All C-Sheets

LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT: Yellow Springs Design, LLC


Section 32 93 00

SIGNATURE


LICENSE EXPIRATION DATE 31 Dec 2018

Drawing Sheets: All L-Sheets STRUCTURAL ENGINEER: Hodge Structural Engineers


Section 05 12 00

Section 05 21 00

Section 05 31 00

SIGNATURE


LICENSE EXPIRATION DATE 30 Sept 2018

Drawing Sheets: All S-Sheets

MECHANICAL ENGINEER: McCoy & Howard Consulting Engineers, Inc.

Project Manual: All Sections of Division 22


SIGNATURE


LICENSE EXPIRATION DATE 30 Nov 2019

Drawing Sheets: All M-Sheets, All P-Sheets

FIRE PROTECTION ENGINEER: McCoy & Howard Consulting Engineers, Inc.


SIGNATURE


LICENSE EXPIRATION DATE 30 Sep 2019 Drawing Sheets: Sheet FA-1.00, Sheet LS-1.00

ELECTRICAL ENGINEER: McCoy & Howard Consulting Engineers, Inc.

Project Manual: All Sections of Division 26

SIGNATURE


LICENSE EXPIRATION DATE 30 Nov 2019

Drawing Sheets: All E-Sheets

PROJECT MANUAL TOC – Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC-1


AAFES PN: 3720-14-000002

BIDDING REQUIREMENTS PAGES

CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS

DIVISION 0 – BIDDING CONTRACTING

List of Drawings 00 86 00-2

SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Requirements of JBSA-Sam Houston 01 00 00-8 Summary of Work 01 10 00-12 Unit Prices 01 10 10-2 AAFES Furnished & Installed Equipment 01 10 17-4 AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed Equipment 01 10 18-3 AAFES Safety Policies & Procedures 01 10 60-4 AAFES Safety Regulations & Codes 01 13 00-8 Substitution Procedures 01 25 00-3 Schedule of Values 01 29 73-2 Progress Payments 01 29 76-3 Project Management & Coordination 01 31 13-3 Phasing 01 31 15-2 AAFES Progress Meetings 01 31 19-2 Construction Progress Schedule 01 32 00-3 Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals 01 33 00-17 AAFES Environmental Protection 01 35 43-10 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Measures (SWPPP) 01 35 56-77 AAFES Weather Table 01 42 10-2 Quality Control 01 45 16-3

Testing Laboratory Services 01 45 29-4 Temporary Utilities 01 51 00-6 Field Offices & Sheds 01 52 00-3 Temporary Facilities, Barriers & Controls 01 55 00-9

Project Identification & Signs 01 58 00-2 Material & Equipment 01 65 00-3 Storage & Protection 01 66 00-3 Grades, Lines & Levels 01 73 13-1 Cutting & Patching 01 73 29-2 Cleaning 01 74 00-2 Construction Waste Management & Disposal (with Attachments) 01 74 19-13 Systems Start-up 01 75 00-3 Project Closeout (with DoD Form 1354 Attachments) 01 77 00-29 Project Record Documents 01 78 00-2

DIVISION 2 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

Subsurface Investigation & Geotechnical Report 02 31 00-64 Structure Demolition 02 41 16-12 Hazmat Investigation & Report 02 81 10-26 Removal of Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCB's) 02 81 33-6 Removal of Mercury Containing Lamps & Devices 02 81 34-7 Ozone Depleting Substance Recovery 02 91 10-3


DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE

Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 30 00-11 Polished Concrete Floor Finish 03 35 36-9

DIVISION 4 – MASONRY

Unit Masonry 04 20 00-20

DIVISION 5 – METALS

Structural Steel 05 12 00-6 Steel Joists 05 21 00-4 Steel Deck 05 31 00-4 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 05 40 00-8 Metal Fabrications 05 50 00-15 Metal Railings 05 52 00-10

DIVISION 6 - WOOD & PLASTICS

Rough Carpentry 06 10 00-6 Finish Carpentry 06 20 00-6 Fire Retardant Wood Treatment 06 30 00-4 Architectural Woodwork 06 40 00-10

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION

Building Insulation 07 21 00-8 Exterior Insulation & Finish System - Class PB 07 24 00-9 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing (TPO) 07 54 00-12 Preformed Metal Soffit Panels 07 61 03-5 Flashing & Sheet Metal 07 62 00-11 Firestopping 07 84 00-5 Building Joint Sealers 07 90 00-5

DIVISION 8 – DOORS & WINDOWS

Metal Doors & Frames 08 11 00-7 Flush Wood Doors 08 14 16-5 Access Doors 08 31 00-5 Aluminum Curtain Walls & Entrance Doors 08 41 10-11 Finish Hardware 08 71 00-13 Glass & Glazing 08 81 00-8

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES

Gypsum Drywall Systems 09 21 16-10 Tile 09 30 00-8 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 51 00-4 Resilient Tile Flooring 09 65 00-4 Fiberglass Reinforced Wall Panels 09 77 00-4 Painting 09 90 00-7

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES

Specialty Signs 10 14 00-7 Toilet Compartments 10 21 13-4 Wall Surface Protection Systems 10 26 00-4 Toilet Accessories 10 28 13-4 Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets & Accessories 10 44 00-4 Metal Lockers 10 51 13-3 Fixed Sunshades & Canopies 10 71 10-6


DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT

Food Service Equipment 11 40 00-7 Used Cooking Oil Equipment 11 80 00-6

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS

Floor Mats & Frames 12 48 13-4

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING

General Provisions - Plumbing 22 05 10-5 Common Work Results for Plumbing 22 05 12-9 Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment 22 05 13-1 Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping 22 05 19-3 General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping 22 05 23-4 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 05 29-7 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 05 53-4 Plumbing Insulation 22 07 19-9 Domestic Water Piping 22 11 16-7 Domestic Water Piping Specialties 22 11 19-4 Domestic Water Pumps 22 11 23-4 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping 22 13 16-5 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties 22 13 19-4 Storm Drainage Piping 22 14 13-4 Storm Drainage Piping Specialties 22 14 23-3 Facility Natural-Gas Piping 22 16 13-9 Fuel-Fired Domestic Water Heaters 22 34 00-4 Commercial Plumbing Fixtures 22 42 13-5

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATION & AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)

Mechanical-General Provisions 23 01 00-3 Basic Materials and Methods-Mechanical 23 05 00-2 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment 23 05 13-2 Hangers and Supports for Mechanical 23 05 29-4 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 53-3 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of HVAC Systems 23 05 95-2 Mechanical Insulation 23 07 00-3 Instrumentation and Control for HVAC 23 09 00-9 Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls 23 09 93-3 Metal Ductwork 23 31 13-4 Ductwork Accessories 23 33 00-3 Fans 23 34 23-3 Air Curtains 23 34 33-2 Air Terminal Units 23 36 00-3 Air Outlet and Inlet 23 37 13-2 Food Service Ventilation Systems 23 38 15-2 Packaged, Outdoor, Central-Station Air-Handling Units 23 74 13-6

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

Building Wire and Cable 26 05 19-3 Manufactured Wiring Systems 26 05 20-2 Grounding and Bonding 26 05 26-3 Supporting Devices 26 05 29-2 Conduit 26 05 33-5 Boxes 26 05 34-3


Cabinets and Enclosures 26 05 35-2 Duct Bank 26 05 43-4 Electrical Identification 26 05 53-3 Electric Controls 26 09 23-2 Enclosed Contactors 26 09 24-3 Occupancy Sensors 26 09 25-2 Distribution Switchboards 26 24 13-4 Panelboards 26 24 16-3 Wiring Devices 26 27 26-4 Enclosed Switches 26 28 17-2 Enclosed Motor Controllers 26 29 13-3 Surge Protection Devices (SPDs) 26 43 13-4 Interior Luminaires 26 51 00-3 Site Lighting 26 56 00-3 Testing 26 60 00-3

DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY & SECURITY

Fire Alarm/Mass Notification Systems 28 31 76-17

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK

Site Clearing 31 10 00-5 Earthwork 31 20 00-14 Landscape Grading 31 21 00-2 Utility Backfill Materials 31 23 23-9 Excavation Backfill and Compaction for Utilities 31 23 33-13 Termite Control 31 31 16-3

DIVISION 32 – SITEWORK

Pavement Repair and Restoration 32 01 00-3 Hot Mix Asphalt Concrete Pavement 32 12 16-3 Concrete Paving 32 13 13-10 Concrete Paving Joint Sealants 32 13 73-5 Pavement Markings 32 17 23-2 Fences & Gates 32 31 00-4 Site Bicycle Racks 32 33 13-3 Turf & Grasses 32 92 00-5 Plants 32 93 00-8

DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES

Pressure and Leakage Tests 33 01 10-3 Disinfecting Pipelines 33 01 15-10 Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers 33 01 30-14 Tracer Wire 33 05 27-3 Piping-General Provisions 33 11 00-8 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe 33 11 11-6 Polyethylene Wrap 33 11 17-4 Gate Valves 33 12 16-2 Tapping Sleeves and Valves 33 12 17-5 Fire Hydrants 33 12 19-4 Gravity Sanitary Sewers 33 31 11-4 Precast Concrete Manholes 33 31 12-8 Storm Sewerage System 33 41 00-6

GENERAL PROVISION - PLUMBING 22 05 10-1

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 22 05 10 - GENERAL PROVISIONS - PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. General administrative and procedural requirements for the plumbing installations.

B. Related Sections:

1. General Provisions of the contract, including the Division 00 and Division 01, shall apply to Division 22 specification sections.

1.2 QUALITY CONTROL

A. The following publications form a part of this specification to the extent they are applicable.

1. All work must be performed in accordance with the requirements of local, county, state and national codes and regulations including the requirements of the following: (a) International Building Code, 2015.

(b) National Electrical Code, 2014. (c) International Plumbing Code, 2015. (d) International Mechanical Code, 2015. (e) Occupational Safety and Health Act. of 1970. (f) For work not specifically listed above, use standards and codes of the National Fire

Protection Association.

1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. All equipment, apparatus and systems shall be rated, tested, fabricated and/or installed in accordance with the applicable industry standard mentioned. The following list will serve to clarify abbreviations that appear in other sections of this specification: (1) AGA American Gas Association. (2) ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (3) ANSI American National Standards Institute (4) ASE Association of Safety Engineers (5) ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineer (6) ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers (7) AWWA American Water Works Association (8) EPA Environmental Protection Agency (9) FS Federal Specifications (10) IBR Institute of Boiler and Radiator Manufacturers (11) IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (12) MCAA Mechanical Contractors' Association of American (13) NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (14) NFPA National Fire Protection Association (15) NSC National Safety Council (16) NSF National Sanitation Foundation (17) SBI Steel Boiler Institute Industry (18) UL Underwriters Laboratories (19) ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. FURNISH: The term furnish means supply and deliver to the Project Site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation and similar operations.


B. INSTALL: The term install describes operations at the Project Site including the actual unloading,

unpacking, assembly, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning and similar operations.

C. PROVIDE: The term provides means to furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use.

1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALS

A. See Division 01 for requirements for shop drawings and product data. B. Asbestos-Free Material/Product: Prior to approval of the material/product to be used, the

manufacturer/supplier shall furnish the Architect/Engineer with written certification that the material/product contains no asbestos. This certificate is mandatory before approval will be issued. Submittals furnished without the asbestos-free certification will be returned to the Contractor with no action taken until such certification is provided.

C. See applicable sections to this Division for items requiring shop drawings.

1.6 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

A. Materials, the style, make or quality of which is specifically designated, shall be as specified. B. Contractor shall furnish necessary materials in ample quantities and as frequently as required to avoid

delay in the progress of the Work, and shall so store them as to prevent interference with other work.

1.7 DEFECTIVE WORK AND MATERIAL

A. All materials or work found to be defective or not in strict conformity with the drawings or different from requirements of the drawings and specifications or defaced or injured through negligence of Contractor or his employees, or through action of fire or weather will be rejected and shall be immediately removed from premises by Contractor and satisfactory materials and work substituted without delay.

B. All defective work or imperfect work shall be corrected immediately on notice from Architect/Engineer.

No previous inspection or certificate on account shall be held to relieve Contractor from his obligation to furnish sound materials and to perform good and satisfactory work.

1.8 COOPERATION AND COORDINATION

A. Contractor shall confer with other contractors at the site before installing his work to avoid interferences so that maximum head room and clearances may be maintained. In event that interferences develop between work of various contractors, Architect/Engineer's decision will be final and no additional compensation will be allowed for changes required.

B. Particular attention shall be paid to situations where recessed equipment, pipes and lights occur, or

where the work of several trades occurs together above suspended ceilings, in pipe shafts or in areas where space is limited.

C. All fixtures, equipment, devices, switches, outlets, pumps, etc., shall be positioned to avoid all

interferences with and to assure proper coordination with work of all other trades, cases, partitions, wall, floor and ceiling patterns, architectural features, etc. All recessed devices, fixtures, etc., shall be coordinated with all wall, floor and ceiling patterns. Architect/Engineer will reconcile conflicts and adjustments where such adjustments are warranted.

1.9 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

A. Contractor shall keep all his respective pipe openings closed by means of plugs or caps to prevent entrance of foreign matter during construction and cover all fixtures, equipment, and apparatus as required to protect them against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical damage both


before and after installation. Any such fixtures, equipment or apparatus damaged prior to final acceptance of the Work shall be restored to its original condition or replaced by Contractor at no cost to Owner.

1.10 CONTRACT DRAWINGS

A. The layout shown on the Contract Drawings is necessarily diagrammatic but shall be followed as closely as actual construction and as other work will allow. The dimensions of work as shown on the Contract Drawings are not as-built dimensions. No measurements shall be scaled from the drawings and used as definite dimensions for laying out or fitting work in place.

B. The layout of manufactured equipment as shown on the drawings shall be checked and the exact

location shall be determined from the dimensions of equipment shop drawings approved by the Architect/Engineer.

1.11 MAINTENANCE MANUAL AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

A. Upon completion of the Work, Contractors shall provide the Architect/Engineer with three copies of maintenance manual for all equipment furnished and installed under his Work. Manuals shall be in substantial 3-ring binders with project name and number inscribed on face and hinged back. Manual shall include roster of all Owner training session attendees. The manual shall, however, first be approved by the Architect/Engineer.

B. The manual shall include manufacturer's lubricating and operating instructions and parts list and serial numbers for all operating machinery, including drive information, and motor horsepower, amperage, and voltage readings on all phases, valve chart, sequence of operation, index following the order listed in the specifications, warranties in the name of the Installation, and a list of manufacturers, service firms and subcontractors names and telephone numbers.

C. Training attendance rosters for each training session shall be included in manuals. Roster will identify training subject, date, attendees name, job title, office symbol, grade/rank, and telephone number.

D. All switches, controls, and safety devices shall be clearly and permanently marked with embossed or printed plates as to purpose and as to operation and shall be tested in the presence of the Architect/Engineer designated representative to ensure that he understands their function and purpose.

E. Upon completion of the Work, Contractors shall put the systems into service. Contractors shall be entirely responsible for the equipment during all testing operations including the lubricating and turning on and off of such apparatus.

1.12 PROJECT RECORD AND CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS

A. Refer to Division 01 Closeout procedures for requirements. The following paragraphs supplement the

requirements of Division 01. B. Mark Drawings to indicate revisions to piping and ductwork, size and location both exterior and

interior; including locations of coils, dampers and other control devices, filters, boxes, and similar units requiring periodic maintenance or repair; actual equipment locations, dimensioned for column lines; actual inverts and locations of underground piping; concealed equipment, dimensioned to column lines; mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located and numbered, concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance located (i.e., traps, strainers, expansion compensators, tanks, etc.); Change Orders; concealed control system devices.

C. Mark Specifications to indicate addenda, approved substitutions, change orders, actual equipment

and materials used.

1.13 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING


A. Deliver products to project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and similar information needed for distinct identifications; adequately packaged and protected to prevent damage during shipment, storage and handling.

B. Store equipment and materials at the site, unless off-site storage is authorized in writing. Protect

stored equipment and materials from damage. C. Coordinate deliveries of plumbing materials and equipment to minimize construction site congestion.

Limit each shipment of materials and equipment to the items and quantities needed for the smooth and efficient flow of installations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ACCESSIBILITY

A. Install equipment and materials to provide required access for servicing and maintenance. Coordinate the final location of concealed equipment and devices requiring access with final location of required access panels and doors. Allow ample space for removal of all parts that require replacement or servicing.

B. Extend all grease fittings to an accessible location. C. Refer to the Division 08: Access Doors and Frames.

3.2 ROUGH-IN

A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected.

B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 02 through 33 for rough-in requirements.

3.3 PLUMBING INSTALLATIONS

A. General: sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of plumbing systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements: (1) Coordinate plumbing equipment and materials installation with other building components. (2) Verify all dimensions by field measurements. (3) Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to allow for plumbing

installation. (4) Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured in

place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. (5) Sequence, coordinate and integrate installations of plumbing materials and equipment for

efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing-in the building.

(6) Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate the installation of plumbing equipment and materials.

(7) Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install plumbing services and overhead equipment to provide maximum headroom possible.

(8) Install plumbing equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations.

(9) Coordinate the installation of plumbing materials and equipment above ceiling with suspension system, light fixtures, and other installations.


(10) Install access panel or doors where units are concealed behind finished surface. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8 Section “Access Doors and Frames.”

(11) Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to be installed at a specified slope.

(12) Coordinate connection of plumbing systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service.

(13) Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal data, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to the Architect/Engineer.

(14) Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, where installed expose in finished spaces.

3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. This Article specifies the cutting and patching of mechanical equipment, components, and materials to include removal and legal disposal of selected materials, components, and equipment.

B. Refer to Section 01 73 29 for general requirements for cutting and patching. C. Refer to Division 26 for requirements for cutting and patching electrical equipment, components, and

materials. D. Do not endanger or damage installed Work through procedures and processes of cutting and

patching. E. Arrange for repairs required to restore other work, because of damage caused as a result of plumbing

installations. F. No additional compensation will be authorized for cutting and patching Work that is necessitated by ill-

timed, defective, or non-conforming installations. G. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of plumbing equipment and materials required to:

(1) Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed work. (2) Remove and replace defective work. (3) Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents. (4) Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing. (5) Upon written instruction from the Architect/Engineer, uncover and restore Work to provide for

Architect/Engineer’s representative observation of concealed work.

H. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Refer to the Division 01 for general requirements for final cleaning.

3.6 COMMISSIONING

A. Accomplish commissioning of plumbing system and equipment in accordance Section 01 91 00. END 22 05 10

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 12-1

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 22 05 12 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Transition fittings. 3. Dielectric fittings. 4. Mechanical sleeve seals. 5. Sleeves. 6. Escutcheons. 7. Grout. 8. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 9. Painting and finishing. 10. Concrete bases. 11. Supports and anchorages.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.

E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:

1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic. 2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic. 3. PE: Polyethylene plastic. 4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:

1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Transition fittings.


2. Dielectric fittings. 3. Mechanical sleeve seals. 4. Escutcheons.

B. Welding certificates.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes

involved and that certification is current.

C. Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified, at no cost to exchange service. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for plumbing installations.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate locations and size requirements for access panels and doors for plumbing items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:

1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.

2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods.


B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

H. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping: 1. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. 2. Comply with LEED requirements.

2.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Drainage Piping: ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve, ends same size as piping to be joined, and corrosion-resistant metal band on each end.

1. Manufacturers: a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. b. Fernco, Inc. c. Mission Rubber Company. d. Plastic Oddities, Inc.

2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F.

1. Manufacturers: a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.


b. Central Plastics Company. c. Eclipse, Inc. d. Epco Sales, Inc. e. Hart Industries, International, Inc. f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. g. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.

D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

1. Manufacturers: a. Capitol Manufacturing Co. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Epco Sales, Inc. d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

E. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full-face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.

1. Manufacturers: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Central Plastics Company. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.

F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

1. Manufacturers: a. Calpico, Inc. b. Lochinvar Corp.

G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F .

1. Manufacturers: a. Perfection Corp. b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Victaulic Co. of America.

2.6 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve.

1. Manufacturers: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Metraflex Co. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

3. Pressure Plates: Plastic or Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element.


4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.7 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.

2.8 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish.

C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated and rough brass.

D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated and rough brass.

2.9 GROUT

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved.

C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.


D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

G. Install piping at indicated slopes.

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

K. Install piping to avoid running above electrical panels.

L. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

M. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:

1. New Piping: a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type. b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated

finish. c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-

brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. d. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece or split-casting,

cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. e. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with rough-

brass finish. f. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type.

N. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor.

P. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or

other wet areas 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.

2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed. 3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between

sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials: a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6 . b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board

partitions.

4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.


Q. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter. 2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter. 3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements

required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

R. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

S. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

T. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.

3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.


I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.

2. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.

3. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.

J. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.

3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Painting of plumbing systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."

B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.

3.6 CONCRETE BASES

A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.

1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit.

2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base.

3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.


4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in

Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

3.7 GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for plumbing equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.

B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.

G. Place grout around anchors.

H. Cure placed grout.

END 22 05 12

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 05 13 - 1

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 22 05 13 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following:

1. Motor controllers. 2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in plumbing equipment schedules or Sections.

B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

C. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C.

B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.

2.3 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application:

1. Permanent-split capacitor. 2. Split phase. 3. Capacitor start, inductor run. 4. Capacitor start, capacitor run. 5. ECM.

B. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

C. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole or ECM type.

D. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

END 22 05 13

METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 19 - 1

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 22 05 19 - METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


B. General Provisions of the contract, including Division 00 and Division, shall apply to Division 22 specifications sections.

1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. Liquid-in-glass thermometers.

B. Dial-type pressure gages.

C. Gage attachments.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS

A. Metal-Case, Industrial-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Weksler. b. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group. c. Trerice, H. O. Co. d. Weiss Instruments, Inc. e. Winters Instruments - U.S.

2. Standard: ASME B40.200. 3. Case: Cast aluminum, 9-inch nominal size unless otherwise indicated. 4. Case Form: Adjustable angle unless otherwise indicated. 5. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and red organic liquid. 6. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in

deg F. 7. Window: Glass. 8. Stem: Aluminum and of length to suit installation.

a. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.

9. Connector: 1-1/4 inches, with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of 1.5

percent of scale range.

2.2 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:


1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge. b. Ashcroft Inc. c. Marsh. d. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group. e. Trerice. f. Weksler g. Weiss Instruments, Inc. h. Winters Instruments - U.S.

2. Standard: ASME B40.100. 3. Case: Liquid-filled type; cast aluminum or drawn steel; 4-1/2-inch nominal diameter. 4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated. 5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and bottom-

outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated. 6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer. 7. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi. 8. Pointer: Dark-colored metal. 9. Window: Glass. 10. Ring: Stainless steel. 11. Accuracy: Grade B, plus or minus 2 percent of middle half of scale range.

2.3 GAGE ATTACHMENTS

A. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and piston-type surge-dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated piping.

B. Valves: Brass or stainless-steel needle, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the most readable position.

B. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids.

C. Install thermometers in the following locations:

1. Outlet of each water heater. 2. Inlets and outlets of each domestic water heat exchanger. 3. Inlet and outlet of each domestic hot-water storage tank. 4. Outlet of each mixing valve.

D. Install pressure gages in the following locations:

1. Building water service entrance into building. 2. Inlet and outlet of each pressure-reducing valve.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.


3.4 THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Domestic Cold-Water Piping: 0 to 100 deg F.

B. Scale Range for Domestic Hot-Water Piping: 0 to 250 deg F.

3.5 PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Water Service Piping: 0 to 100 psi.

B. Scale Range for Domestic Water Piping: 0 to 100 psi.

END 22 05 19

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23 - 1

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 22 05 23 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. Bronze ball valves.

B. Bronze swing check valves.

C. Related Sections:

1. Division 22 plumbing piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only. 2. Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and

schedules. 3. Division 22 Section “Facility Water Distribution Piping” for general-duty and specialty valves for

site construction piping.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP: Cold working pressure.

B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.

C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.

D. NRS: Nonrising stem.

E. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.

F. RS: Rising stem.

G. SWP: Steam working pressure.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.


A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 2. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves. 3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.


C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.


A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. 3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling. 4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. 6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If outdoor

storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Refer to valve schedule articles for applications of valves.

B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

D. Valve Actuator Types: 1. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller except plug valves. 2. Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for every 5 plug

valves, for each size square plug-valve head.

E. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions and the following features: 1. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and protective

sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation. 2. Butterfly Valves: With extended neck.

F. Valve-End Connections:

1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves. 2. Grooved: With grooves according to AWWA C606. 3. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18. 4. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

2.2 BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze or Brass Ball Valves with Bronze or Brass Trim:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:


a. American Valve, Inc. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. d. Hammond Valve. e. Milwaukee Valve Company. f. NIBCO INC. g. Red-White Valve Corporation. h. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig. c. CWP Rating: 600 psig. d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Bronze or Brass. f. Ends: Threaded or sweat. g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. h. Stem: Bronze or Brass. i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. j. Port: Full.

2.3 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Valve, Inc. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. e. Hammond Valve. f. Kitz Corporation. g. Milwaukee Valve Company. h. NIBCO INC. i. Powell Valves. j. Red-White Valve Corporation. k. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. l. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.

2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Disc: Bronze.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.


B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

E. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:

1. Shutoff Service: Ball valves. 2. Throttling Service: Ball valves.

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: solder ends. 2. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: threaded ends.

3.5 DOMESTIC, HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: 1. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port. 2. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, nonmetallic disc.

B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 1. Full port two piece ball valves.

END 22 05 23

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29 - 1

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 22 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. General Provisions of the contract, including Division 00 and Division 01, shall apply to Division 22 specifications sections.

1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. Metal pipe hangers and supports.

B. Trapeze pipe hangers.

C. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.

D. Fastener systems.

E. Pipe positioning systems.

F. Equipment supports.

G. Related Sections:

1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1.5 SUBMITTALS




A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. 2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. 4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to support

bearing surface of piping. 5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.

B. Copper Pipe Hangers:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated components.

2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel.

2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.3 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 2. Clement Support Services. 3. ERICO International Corporation. 4. National Pipe Hanger Corporation. 5. PHS Industries, Inc. 6. Pipe Shields, Inc.; a subsidiary of Piping Technology & Products, Inc. 7. Piping Technology & Products, Inc. 8. Rilco Manufacturing Co., Inc. 9. Value Engineered Products, Inc.

B. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.

C. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig minimum compressive strength.

D. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

E. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

F. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.

2.4 PIPE STANDS

A. General Requirements for Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated assemblies made of manufactured corrosion-resistant components to support roof-mounted piping.

B. Compact Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic unit with integral-rod roller, pipe clamps, or V-shaped cradle to support pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration.


C. Low-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: One-piece stainless-steel base unit with plastic roller, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

D. High-Type, Single-Pipe Stand:

1. Description: Assembly of base, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe support, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

2. Base: Plastic. 3. Vertical Members: Two or more stainless-steel, continuous-thread rods. 4. Horizontal Member: Stainless-steel rod with plastic or stainless-steel, roller-type pipe support.

E. High-Type, Multiple-Pipe Stand:

1. Description: Assembly of bases, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe supports, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

2. Bases: One or more; plastic. 3. Vertical Members: Two or more protective-coated-steel channels. 4. Horizontal Member: Protective-coated-steel channel. 5. Pipe Supports: Galvanized-steel, clevis-type pipe hangers.

F. Roof Mounted Piping Supports: Pre-manufactured supports by “Miro” Industries or equivalent.

2.5 PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS

A. Description: IAPMO PS 42, positioning system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for positioning piping in pipe spaces; for plumbing fixtures in commercial applications.

2.6 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-steel shapes.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure.

B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.


C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

D. Pipe Positioning-System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste piping connections to each plumbing fixture. See Division 22 plumbing fixture Sections for requirements for pipe positioning systems for plumbing fixtures.

E. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

F. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

G. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

H. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

I. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

J. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

K. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

L. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with

clamp sized to match OD of insert. c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate

for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate

for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of length at least as long as protective shield.

6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.


A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor.


B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so contours of

welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 9 painting Sections.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports and metal trapeze pipe hangers and attachments for general service applications.


F. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper attachments for copper piping and tubing in contact with the hanger.

G. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated, stationary pipes.

2. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

3. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 8 (DN 20 to DN 200).

H. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24. 2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to

NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

I. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. 3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings. 4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of building

attachments. 5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) piping

installations.

J. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction,

to attach to top flange of structural shape. 2. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,

channels, or angles. 3. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 4. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are

considerable and rod sizes are large. 5. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 6. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to flange

edge. 7. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams. 8. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams for

heavy loads. 9. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams for

heavy loads, with link extensions. 10. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to structural steel. 11. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above by using

clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

12. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 13. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.


14. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear horizontal movement where headroom is limited.

K. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

L. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

M. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

N. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction.

O. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and waste piping for plumbing fixtures.

END 22 05 29

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 53 - 1

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 22 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. Equipment labels.

B. Warning signs and labels.

C. Pipe labels.

D. Valve tags.

E. Warning tags.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label.

C. Valve numbering scheme.

D. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

2. Letter Color: Black. 3. Background Color: White. 4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.


5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel self-tapping screws. 8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.

2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS

A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

B. Letter Color: Black.

C. Background Color: White.

D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F .

E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel self-tapping screws.

H. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification instructions.

2.3 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.


2.4 VALVE TAGS

A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch numbers.

1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch, minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Fasteners: Brass S-hook.

B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.

1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.5 WARNING TAGS

A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.

1. Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches minimum. 2. Fasteners: Reinforced grommet and wire. 3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO NOT

OPERATE." 4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.

3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 9 Section "Interior Painting."

B. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed

piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.


6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in areas of congested piping and equipment.

7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

C. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Domestic Water Piping: a. Background Color: White. b. Letter Color: Blue.

2. Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage Piping: a. Background Color: White. b. Letter Color: Yellow.

3.4 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape: a. Cold Water: 1-1/2 inches, round. b. Hot Water: 1-1/2 inches, round.

2. Valve-Tag Color: a. Cold Water: Natural. b. Hot Water: Natural.

3. Letter Color: a. Cold Water: Black. b. Hot Water: Black.

3.5 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required.

END 22 05 53

PLUMBING INSULATION 22 07 19 - 1

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 22 07 19 - PLUMBING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. Insulation of plumbing piping, including the following:

1. Insulation Materials: a. Flexible elastomeric. b. Mineral fiber.

2. Insulating cements. 3. Adhesives. 4. Mastics. 5. Lagging adhesives. 6. Sealants. 7. Factory-applied jackets. 8. Field-applied PVC fitting covers.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application and equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.

1.7 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.

1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide insulation by one of the following: a. Aeroflex USA Inc. b. Armacell LLC. c. RBX Corporation. d. Halstead.

D. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type I. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide insulation by one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corp. b. Johns Manville. c. Knauf Insulation. d. Manson Insulation Inc. e. Owens Corning.

E. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:

1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide insulation by one of the following: a. Johns Manville. b. Knauf Insulation. c. Manson Insulation Inc. d. Owens Corning.

2. Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.


2.2 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.

1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Aeroflex USA Inc. b. Armacell LCC. c. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company. d. RBX Corporation. e. Halstead.

2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works. d. Marathon Industries, Inc. e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.

2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

D. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.

1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Dow Chemical Company. b. Johns-Manville. c. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc. d. Speedline Corporation.

E. Adhesives shall comply with LEED requirements.

2.3 MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.

B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.

1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works. d. Marathon Industries, Inc. e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm (0.03 metric perm) at 35-mil (0.9-mm) dry film thickness.

3. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F (Minus 18 to plus 82 deg C). 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 44 percent by volume and 62 percent by weight.


5. Color: White.

C. Mastics shall comply with LEED requirements.

2.4 SEALANTS

A. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 121 deg C). 4. Color: White.

B. Sealants shall comply with LEED requirements.

2.5 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2.6 FIELD-APPLIED FITTING COVERS

A. PVC Fitting Covers: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Covers shall not exceed ASTM E-84 25 flame spread and 50 smoke developed rating.

1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Johns Manville. b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc. c. Proto PVC Corporation. d. Speedline Corporation.

2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer. 3. Color: White. 4. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.

2.7 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.

1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division. b. Compac Corp. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company. d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ. e. 3M.

2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 11.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent.


6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows: 1. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 300 deg F

with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range.

C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.


2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure

strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams

at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c. a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Manholes. 5. Handholes. 6. Cleanouts.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

B. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.

1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.


3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

3.6 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent

straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.


4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to

eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to

valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended

adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

3.7 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with

vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. 2. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward

clinched staples at 6 inches (150 mm) o.c. 3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal

tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent

straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch,

and seal joints with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.


3.8 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following: 1. Underground piping. 2. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.

3.9 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Domestic Cold Water:

1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.

2. Piping in wall spaces and chases only:

a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.

B. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water:

1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.

2. Piping in wall spaces and chases only:

a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.

C. Exposed Sanitary Drains, Domestic Water, Domestic Hot Water, and Stops for Plumbing Fixtures for People with Disabilities:

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following: a. Flexible Elastomeric: Pre-manufactured kit.

D. Horizontal Storm Water Piping Inside the Building:

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.

E. Roof and Overflow Drain Bodies:

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick. b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.

END 22 07 19

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 16 - 1

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 22 11 16 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. Underground and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, fittings, and specialties from 5 foot beyond the building to inside the building and within the building.

B. Specialty valves.

C. Flexible connectors.


A. Seismic Performance: Domestic water piping and support and installation shall withstand effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following products: 1. Piping. 2. Fittings.

B. Water Test Reports: Specified in "Cleaning" Article.


A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF 61 for potable domestic water piping and components.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Contracting Officer no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of water service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of water service without Contracting Officer’s written permission.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, drawn temper.

1. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings. 2. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings. 3. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends. 4. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-

socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.

B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K water tube, annealed temper.

1. Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.

C. Water Service Piping from 5 foot outside the building to inside the building: Match section 22 11 33.

2.3 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free, unless otherwise indicated; full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Comply with requirements in Division 31 for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

C. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve, inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages and Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for drain valves and strainers.


D. Install domestic water piping with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain, and plumb.

E. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's requirements.

F. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

G. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

H. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space.

I. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance.

J. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

K. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

L. Install piping free of sags and bends.

M. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

N. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty.

O. Install piping to avoid running above electric panels.

3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.

C. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" Chapter.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

E. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems.


A. General-Duty Valves: Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for valve installations.

B. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures that do not have supply stops. Use ball valves.

C. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping. Drain valves are specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."


1. Hose-End Drain Valves: At low points in water mains, risers, and branches. 2. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: Instead of hose-end drain valves where indicated.


A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for pipe hanger and support products and installation.

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

B. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

C. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.

D. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 5. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod. 6. NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8-inch rod.

E. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use dielectric flanges to join dissimilar piping materials.

D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the following:

1. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections.

2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Comply with requirements in Division 22 plumbing fixture Sections for connection sizes.

3. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for identification materials and installation.


3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Piping Inspections:

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction: a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or

closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures. b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to

observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Piping Tests:

1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water.

2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.

D. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.9 ADJUSTING

A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. 3. Open throttling valves to proper setting. 4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.

a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide flow of hot water in each branch.

b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.

5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during installation.

6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.


7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for application where used and are clean and ready for use.

8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.

3.10 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below: a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at

outlets. b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time.

d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.

C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

3.11 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Fitting Option: Extruded-tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground copper tubing.

D. Under-building-slab, domestic water, building service piping, NPS 2 and smaller shall be the following:

1. Soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K; wrought-copper solder-joint fittings; and brazed joints.

E. Under-building-slab, domestic water, building-service piping, NPS 3 to NPS 4 shall be the following:

1. Soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K; wrought-copper solder-joint fittings; and brazed joints.

F. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 4 and smaller shall be the following:

1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B); cast- or wrought- copper solder-joint fittings joints.


3.12 VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply:

1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use ball valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

2. Throttling Duty: Use ball valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use ball valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.

B. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment.

END 22 11 16

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 11 19 - 1

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 22 11 19 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. Vacuum breakers.

B. Hose bibs.

C. Wall hydrants.

D. Water hammer arresters.

E. Trap primers.


A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig, unless otherwise indicated.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. NSF Compliance:

1. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic domestic water piping components.

2. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HOSE BIBBS

A. Hose Bibbs:


1. Standard: ASME A112.18.1 for sediment faucets. 2. Body Material: Bronze. 3. Seat: Bronze, replaceable. 4. Supply Connections: NPS 3/4 threaded or solder-joint inlet. 5. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7. 6. Pressure Rating: 125 psig. 7. Vacuum Breaker: Integral, nonremovable, drainable, hose-connection vacuum breaker

complying with ASSE 1011. 8. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze, or chrome or nickel plated. 9. Finish for Service Areas: Chrome or nickel plated. 10. Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated. 11. Operation for Equipment Rooms: Operating key. 12. Operation for Service Areas: Operating key. 13. Operation for Finished Rooms: Operating key. 14. Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb. 15. Include wall flange with each chrome- or nickel-plated hose bibb.

2.2 WALL HYDRANTS

A. Nonfreeze Wall Hydrants: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Josam Company. b. MIFAB, Inc. c. Prier Products, Inc. d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. e. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. f. Watts Drainage Products Inc. g. Woodford Manufacturing Company. h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

2. Standard: ASME A112.21.3M for concealed-outlet, self-draining wall hydrants. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig. 4. Operation: Loose key. 5. Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include wall

clamp. 6. Inlet: NPS 3/4. 7. Outlet: Concealed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread complying with

ASME B1.20.7. 8. Box: Deep, flush mounting with cover. 9. Box and Cover Finish: Polished nickel bronze.

2.3 DRAIN VALVES

A. Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves. 2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig (2760-kPa) minimum CWP. 3. Size: NPS 3/4 (DN 20). 4. Body: Copper alloy. 5. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable. 7. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel. 8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint. 9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7

and cap with brass chain.


B. Gate-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP-80 for gate valves. 2. Pressure Rating: Class 125. 3. Size: NPS 3/4. 4. Body: ASTM B 62 bronze. 5. Inlet: NPS 3/4 threaded or solder joint. 6. Outlet: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 and cap with brass chain.

C. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for ball valves or MSS SP-80 for gate valves. 2. Pressure Rating: 200-psig minimum CWP or Class 125. 3. Size: NPS 3/4. 4. Body: Copper alloy or ASTM B 62 bronze. 5. Drain: NPS 1/8 side outlet with cap.

2.4 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS

A. Water Hammer Arresters:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. AMTROL, Inc. b. Josam Company. c. MIFAB, Inc. d. PPP Inc. e. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. f. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. g. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. h. Watts Drainage Products Inc. i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201. 3. Type: Metal bellows or Copper tube with piston. 4. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to other Division 22 Sections for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.

B. Install backflow preventers where indicated. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap

fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are not acceptable for this application.

2. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties.

B. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding."


C. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Conductors and Cables."


A. Perform the following tests and prepare test reports:

1. Test each pressure vacuum breaker reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer according to authorities having jurisdiction and the device's reference standard.

B. Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest as specified above.

END 22 11 19

DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS 22 11 23 - 1

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 22 11 23 - DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. Horizontally mounted, in-line, separately coupled centrifugal pumps.

B. Thermostats and time clocks for domestic hot water recirculation pumps.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include materials of construction, rated capacities, certified performance curves with operating points plotted on curves, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water pumps to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Complete operating and maintenance manuals including wiring diagrams, technical data sheets and information for ordering replaceable parts: 1. Include complete list indicating all components of the systems. 2. Include complete diagrams of the internal wiring for each item of equipment. 3. Diagrams shall have their terminals identified to facilitate installation, operation and

maintenance.

D. Completed System Readiness Checklist provided by the Commissioning Agent and completed by the contractor, signed by a qualified technician and dated on the date of completion, in accordance with the requirements of Section 22 0800 Commission of Plumbing Systems.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.


A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.

B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.

C. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions for handling.

1.6 COORDINATION



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HORIZONTALLY MOUNTED, IN-LINE, SEPARATELY COUPLED CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS


1. Bell & Gossett. 2. TACO. 3. Grundfos.

B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, in-line, single-stage, separately coupled, overhung-impeller centrifugal pumps designed for installation with pump and motor shafts mounted horizontal.

C. Pump Construction:

1. Casing: Bronze radially split with threaded companion-flange connections for pumps with NPS 2 pipe connections and flanged connections for pumps with NPS 2-1/2 pipe connections.

2. Impeller: Bronze statically and dynamically balanced, closed, and keyed to shaft. 3. Shaft and Shaft Sleeve: Steel shaft, with copper-alloy shaft sleeve. 4. Coupling: Flexible. 5. Seal: Mechanical, with carbon-steel rotating ring, stainless-steel spring, ceramic seat,

and rubber bellows and gasket. 6. Bearings: Oil-lubricated; bronze-journal or ball type. 7. Shaft Coupling: Flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft

misalignment.

D. Motor: Single speed, with grease-lubricated ball bearings; and resiliently mounted to pump casing.

E. Capacities and characteristics shall be as scheduled on drawings.

2.2 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 22 Section "Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment."

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections specified in Division 26 Sections.

2.3 CONTROLS

A. Thermostats: Electric; adjustable for control of hot-water circulation pump.

1. Type: Strap-on temperature sensor, for installation on piping. 2. Range: 65 to 200 deg F. 3. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X. 4. Operation of Pump: On or off. 5. Transformer: Provide if required. 6. Power Requirement: 120 V, ac. 7. Settings: Start pump at 105 deg F and stop pump at 120 deg F.

B. Time Clocks: Seven day programmable with one occupied period per day.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of domestic-water-piping system to verify actual locations of connections before pump installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Support pumps from piping, per manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Install horizontally mounted, in-line, separately coupled centrifugal pumps with shaft(s) horizontal.

C. Install thermostats in hot-water return piping.

D. Install time clocks adjacent to pumps.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to pumps to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge piping equal to or greater than size of pump nozzles.

1. Install shutoff valve and strainer on suction side of each pump, and check, shutoff, and throttling valves on discharge side of each pump. Install valves same size as connected piping. Comply with requirements for valves specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" and comply with requirements for strainers specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

D. Comply with Division 26 Sections for electrical connections, and wiring methods.

E. Connect thermostats and timeclocks to pumps that they control.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 22 0553.

3.5 STARTUP AND TESTING

A. Make tests as recommended by product manufacturer and listed standards and under actual or simulated operating conditions and provide full compliance with design and specified requirements. Tests of the various items of equipment shall be performed simultaneously with the system of which each item is an integral part.

B. System Test: After installation is completed provided an operational test of the completed system including flow rates, pressure compliance, alarms and all control functions.

C. When any defeats are detected, correct defects and repeat test.

D. The commissioning agent will observe startup and contractor testing of selected equipment. Coordinate the startup and contractor testing schedules with the resident engineer and commissioning agent. Provide a minimum of 7 days prior to notice.


3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust domestic water pumps to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Adjust initial temperature set points.

C. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

D. Set time clock for schedule selected by Contracting Officer.

END 22 11 23

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 22 13 16 - 1

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 22 13 16 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. Soil, waste, and vent piping from 5 foot beyond the building to inside the building including the following:

1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 2. Special pipe fittings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.

B. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

C. LLDPE: Linear, low-density polyethylene plastic.

D. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

E. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

F. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

G. TPE: Thermoplastic elastomer.


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.

B. Seismic Performance: Soil, waste, and vent piping and support and installation shall be capable of withstanding the effects of seismic events determined according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures."

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.

B. Field quality-control inspection and test reports.




B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-DWV" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping; "NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping; "NSF-tubular" for plastic continuous waste piping; and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials.

2.2 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Solid-wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.

1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, socket type, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns.

B. Solvent Cement and Adhesive Primer:

1. Use PVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION

A. Refer to Division 31 for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Aboveground, soil, waste and vent piping shall be the following:

1. Solid wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent cemented joints.

B. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping shall be the following: 1. Solid wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.


A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

B. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers.

C. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

D. Install wall-penetration fitting at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make installation watertight.


E. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

F. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

G. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping 2-1/2” and smaller: 2 percent downward in direction

of flow. 2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping 3” to 6”: 1 percent downward in direction of flow. 3. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping 8” and larger: 1/2 percent downward in direction of

flow. 4. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

H. Install underground PVC soil and waste drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321.

I. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing”.

B. PVC Nonpressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2665.


A. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Install the following:

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 2. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs according to the following:

a. MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. 3. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

B. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports."

C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

D. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.

E. Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 3: 48 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and 5: 48 inches with 5/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 6: 48 inches with 3/4-inch rod.


5. NPS 8 to NPS 12: 48 inches with 7/8-inch rod.

F. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches.

G. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.6 CONNECTIONS


B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.

2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.

4. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if indicated, and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 and larger.


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of


water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

3.9 PROTECTION

A. Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of water-based latex paint.

END 22 13 16

SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 13 19 - 1

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 22 13 19 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. Cleanouts.

B. Floor drains.

C. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. FOG: Fats, oils, and greases.

C. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.

D. HDPE: High-density polyethylene plastic.

E. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

F. PP: Polypropylene plastic.

G. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and accessories for the following:

1. Cleanouts. 2. Floor drains. 3. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For drainage piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic sanitary piping specialty components.


1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.

B. Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CLEANOUTS

A. Cleanouts:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Josam. b. Sioux Chief. c. Smith, Jay R. d. Wade. e. Zurn.

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee. 3. See schedule on drawings.

2.2 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains::


2. Standard: ASME A112.6.3. 3. See schedule on drawings.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Deep-Seal Traps:

1. Description: Cast-iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching connected piping and cleanout trap-seal primer valve connection.

2. Size: Same as connected waste piping. a. NPS 2: 4-inch-minimum water seal. b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 5-inch- minimum water seal.

B. Floor-Drain, Trap-Seal Primer Fittings:

1. Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal primer valve connection.

2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 side inlet.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.

B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.

2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for larger

piping. 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

C. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor.

D. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.

E. Set grates of floor drains flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. Install floor sinks square with walls.

1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.

F. Assemble open hub drain fittings and install with top of hub 1 inch above floor.

G. Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, where indicated.

H. Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal primer connection.

1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection. 2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet.

I. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping discharge into sanitary drainage system.

J. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is indicated.

K. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.


A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.


2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.

END 22 13 19

STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 22 14 13 - 1

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 22 14 13 - STORM DRAINAGE PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. Storm drainage piping from 5 foot beyond the building to inside the building including the following:

1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 2. Special pipe fittings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. LLDPE: Linear, low-density polyethylene plastic.

C. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

D. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

E. TPE: Thermoplastic elastomer.


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working-pressure, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Storm Drainage Piping: 10-foot head of water.

B. Seismic Performance: Soil, waste, and vent piping and support and installation shall be capable of withstanding the effects of seismic events determined according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures."

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.

B. Field quality-control inspection and test reports.



B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials.

2.2 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Solid-wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.

1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, socket type, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns.

B. Solvent Cement and Adhesive Primer:

1. Use PVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION

A. Refer to Division 31 for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Aboveground storm drainage piping shall be the following:

1. Solid wall PVC pipe PVC socket fittings and solvent cemented joints.

C. Underground storm drainage piping shall be the following: 1. Solid wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent cemented joints.


A. Storm sewer and drainage piping outside the building are specified in Division 33.

B. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

C. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building storm drains connect to building storm sewers. Cleanouts are specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping Specialties."

D. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

E. Install wall-penetration fitting system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make installation watertight.

F. Make changes in direction for storm drainage piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard


increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

G. Lay buried building storm drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

H. Install storm drainage piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Building Storm Drain: 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping unless otherwise indicated.

2. Horizontal Storm-Drainage Piping: 1 percent downward in direction of flow unless otherwise indicated.

I. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if slab is without membrane waterproofing.

J. Install underground PVC storm drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321.

K. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Section 22 0511.

B. PVC Nonpressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2665.


A. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports." Install the following:

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet, if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

B. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports."

C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

D. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.

E. Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 3: 48 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 48 inches with 5/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 6: 48 inches with 3/4-inch rod.

F. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches.


G. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.6 CONNECTIONS


B. Connect interior storm drainage piping to exterior storm drainage piping.

C. Connect storm drainage piping to roof drains and storm drainage specialties.


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced storm drainage piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. Test Procedure: Test storm drainage piping, except outside leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.

5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

END 22 14 13

STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 14 23 - 1

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 22 14 23 - STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. Roof drains.

1.3 SUBMITTALS



A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL ROOF DRAINS

A. Cast-Iron, Large-Sump, General-Purpose Roof Drains:


2. Standard: ASME A112.6.4, for general-purpose roof drains. 3. Body Material: Cast iron. 4. Dimension of Body: As scheduled. 5. Combination Flashing Ring and Gravel Stop: Required. 6. Flow-Control Weirs: Not required. 7. Outlet: Bottom. 8. Extension Collars: As required by roofing supplier. 9. Underdeck Clamp: Required. 10. Expansion Joint: Not required. 11. Sump Receiver Plate: Required. 12. Dome Material: PE. 13. Perforated Gravel Guard: Not required. 14. Vandal-Proof Dome: Not required. 15. Water Dam: Not required.

B. Cast-Iron, Large-Sump, Emergency Overflow Roof Drains:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Josam Company.


b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. c. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.6.4, for general-purpose roof drains. 3. Body Material: Cast iron. 4. Dimension of Body: As scheduled. 5. Combination Flashing Ring and Gravel Stop: Required. 6. Flow-Control Weirs: Not required. 7. Outlet: Bottom. 8. Extension Collars: As required by roofing supplier. 9. Underdeck Clamp: Required. 10. Expansion Joint: Not required. 11. Sump Receiver Plate: Required. 12. Dome Material: PE. 13. Perforated Gravel Guard: Not required. 14. Vandal-Proof Dome: Not required. 15. Water Dam: Required, 2 inches high minimum.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install roof drains according to roof membrane manufacturer's written installation instructions. Roofing materials are specified in Division 7 Sections.

1. Install flashing collar or flange of roof drain to prevent leakage between drain and adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.

2. Install expansion joints, if indicated, in roof drain outlets. 3. Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance.

B. Install conductor nozzles at exposed bottom of conductors where they spill onto grade.

C. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following instructions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Use cleanouts the same size as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.

2. Locate cleanouts at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate cleanouts at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for

larger piping. 4. Locate cleanouts at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

D. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor.

E. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.

F. Install wall cleanouts in vertical conductors. Install access door or cover in wall.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.


3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.

END 22 14 23

FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 22 16 13 - 1

DIVISION 22 - PLMBING SECTION 22 16 13 - FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. Natural gas piping including the following:

1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings. 2. Piping specialties. 3. Piping and tubing joining materials. 4. Valves. 5. Pressure regulators. 6. Gas meter.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Meter/Service Regulator Assembly: Piping, valves, service regulator, meter and specialties by JBSA Sam Houston DPW and CPS utilities.

E. Point of Delivery: Piping outlet of service-regulator/meter assembly.

F. Natural Gas Piping: Piping that conveys natural gas from point of delivery to natural gas utilization equipment in or on building including line and equipment regulators, gas valves, and specialities.


A. Minimum Operating-Pressure Ratings:

1. Piping and Valves: 100 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.

B. Natural-Gas System Pressures within Buildings: 11”-7” W.C..

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following:

1. Piping specialties.


2. Valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data of selected models.


C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For motorized gas valves, pressure regulators and service meter to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and dispose of liquids from existing natural-gas piping according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

C. Store and handle pipes and tubes having factory-applied protective coatings to avoid damaging coating and protect from direct sunlight.

D. Protect stored PE pipes and valves from direct sunlight.


A. Perform site survey, research base utility records, and verify existing utility locations. Contact utility-locating service for area where Project is located.

B. Coordinate gas service piping and regulator/meter assembly with CPS.

1.9 COORDINATION


B. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for valves installed concealed behind finished surfaces. Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.

1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern. 2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket welding.


3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, and threaded ends.

4. Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, minimum Class 150, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings: a. Material Group: 1.1. b. End Connections: Threaded or butt welding to match pipe. c. Lapped Face: Not permitted underground. d. Gasket Materials: ASME B16.20, metallic, flat, asbestos free, aluminum o-rings, and

spiral-wound metal gaskets. e. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel aboveground and stainless steel

underground.

B. Polyethylene (PE) Pipe: ASTM D2513 SDR 11 pipe with ASTM D2683 socket type fittings.

2.2 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Appliance Flexible Connectors:

1. Indoor, Movable-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.69. 2. Operating-Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig. 3. End Fittings: Zinc-coated steel. 4. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 5. Maximum Length: 72 inches (1830 mm).

B. Quick-Disconnect Devices: Comply with ANSI Z21.41.

1. Copper-alloy convenience outlet and matching plug connector. 2. Nitrile seals. 3. Hand operated with automatic shutoff when disconnected. 4. For indoor or outdoor applications. 5. Adjustable, retractable restraining cable.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.

B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

2.4 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES

A. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Comply with ASME B16.33.

1. CWP Rating: 125 psig. 2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 3. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff

Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 4. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for valves 1

inch and smaller. 5. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inches to NPS 2 shall have initials "WOG" permanently marked on

valve body.

B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Comply with ASME B16.38.

1. CWP Rating: 125 psig. 2. Flanged Ends: Comply with ASME B16.5 for steel flanges. 3. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff

Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 4. Service Mark: Initials "WOG" shall be permanently marked on valve body.


C. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. c. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. e. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company.

2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze. 4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. 5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof. 6. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing. 7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve

Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 8. CWP Rating: 600 psig. 9. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

D. Cast-Iron, Lubricated Plug Valves: MSS SP-78.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Flowserve. b. Homestead Valve; a division of Olson Technologies, Inc. c. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. d. Milliken Valve Company. e. Mueller Co.; Gas Products Div. f. R&M Energy Systems, A Unit of Robbins & Myers, Inc.

2. Body: Cast iron, complying with ASTM A 126, Class B. 3. Plug: Bronze or nickel-plated cast iron. 4. Seat: Coated with thermoplastic. 5. Stem Seal: Compatible with natural gas. 6. Ends: Threaded or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule"

and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 7. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated. 8. Pressure Class: 125 psig. 9. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

2.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS

A. General Requirements:

1. Single stage and suitable for natural gas. 2. Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components. 3. Elevation compensator. 4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for regulators NPS 2-1/2

and larger.

B. Line Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Actaris. b. American Meter Company. c. Eclipse Combustion, Inc. d. Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson Process Management.


e. Invensys. f. Maxitrol Company. g. Richards Industries; Jordan Valve Div.

2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum. 3. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable. 4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel. 5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the valve port. 6. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable. 7. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon. 8. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum pressure

inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator. 9. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not exceed 150

percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff. 10. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator. 11. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if not connected to

vent piping. 12. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 5 psig.

2.6 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Dielectric Unions:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Hart Industries International, Inc. d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. e. Watts Regulator Co.; Division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. f. Wilkins; Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

2. Minimum Operating-Pressure Rating: 150 psig. 3. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials. 4. Insulating materials suitable for natural gas. 5. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, brazed-joint, plain, or

welded end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Dielectric Flanges:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Watts Regulator Co.; Division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. d. Wilkins; Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

2. Minimum Operating-Pressure Rating: 150 psig. 3. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials. 4. Insulating materials suitable for natural gas. 5. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, brazed-joint, plain, or


C. Dielectric-Flange Kits:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico Inc.


c. Central Plastics Company. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Minimum Operating-Pressure Rating: 150 psig. 3. Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. 4. Include flanges, full-face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or PE bolt sleeves,

phenolic washers, and steel backing washers. 5. Insulating materials suitable for natural gas. 6. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, brazed-joint, plain, or


2.7 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, PE film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored yellow.

B. Trace Wire: Provide continuous #12 THW copper trace wire for buried natural gas piping.

2.8 GAS METER

A. Provide rotary type gas meter complying with AGA B109.3. Meter assembly shall include a strainer immediately upstream of the meter. Meter shall have over-pressure protection per ASME B31.8. Meter shall have a pulse switch initiator which shall provide not less than one pulse per 1000 cubic feet of gas.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for natural-gas piping system to verify actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off natural gas to premises or piping section.

B. Inspect natural-gas piping according to NFPA 54 to determine that natural-gas utilization devices are turned off in piping section affected.

C. Comply with NFPA 54 requirements for prevention of accidental ignition.

3.3 OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 54 for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.

3.4 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 54 for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.


C. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.

D. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

G. Locate valves for easy access.

H. Install natural-gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps.

I. Install piping free of sags and bends.

J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

K. Verify final equipment connection locations for roughing-in.

L. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment for roughing-in requirements.

M. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including service-meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate is subject to freezing.

1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long and same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or cap.

N. Concealed Location Installations:

1. Above Accessible Ceilings: Natural-gas piping, fittings, valves, and regulators may be installed in accessible spaces without containment conduit.

O. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down.

P. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.

Q. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of equipment. Unions are not required at flanged connections.


A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless-steel tubing, aluminum, or copper connector.

B. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate for servicing and testing.

3.6 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints:


1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1. 2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. 3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe. 4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal threading is

specified. 5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged.

Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

D. Welded Joints:

1. Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding operators.

2. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. 3. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds and

where damage to coating occurs during construction.

E. Flanged Joints: Install gasket material, size, type, and thickness appropriate for natural-gas service. Install gasket concentrically positioned.


A. Comply with requirements for pipe hangers and supports specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports."

B. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 5. NPS 4 and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch.

3.8 CONNECTIONS

A. Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70.

B. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances.

C. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within 72 inches of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve and appliances or equipment.

D. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as practical to inlet of each appliance.

3.9 PAINTING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 9 painting Sections for painting interior and exterior natural-gas piping.

B. Paint exposed, exterior metal piping, valves, service regulators, service meters and meter bars, earthquake valves, and piping specialties, except components, with factory-applied paint or protective coating.

1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.1D. a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel flat. d. Color: Gray.


C. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-applied finishes with materials and by procedures to match original factory finish.

3.10 METER INSTALLATION

A. Meter shall be installed in accordance with ASME B31.8 and CPS requirements.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to NFPA 54 and authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.12 INDOOR AND OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES LESS THAN 5 PSIG

A. Aboveground piping shall be the following:

1. Steel pipe NPS 2” and smaller: Malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints. 2. Steel pipe NPS 2-1/2” and larger: Wrought-steel fittings and welded joints.

3.13 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller shall be bronze or brass ball valve.

B. Piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2-1/2 and larger shall be cast-iron, lubricated plug valve.

C. Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be one of the following: 1. Two-piece, regular-port, bronze or brass ball valves with bronze trim.

END 22 16 13

FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 22 34 00 - 1

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 22 34 00 - FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. Commercial, high-efficiency, gas water heaters.

B. Water heater accessories.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type and size of water heater indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For water heaters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

C. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of water heaters through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of water heaters and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

D. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

E. ASME Compliance:

1. Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label commercial water heater storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

2. Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label commercial, finned-tube water heaters to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IV.

F. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9" for all components that will be in contact with potable water.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with Architectural and Structural Drawings.


1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of fuel-fired water heaters that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Faulty operation of controls. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.

2. Warranty Period(s): From date of Substantial Completion: a. Commercial, Gas Water Heaters:

1) Controls and Other Components: Three years. b. Compression Tanks: One year.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

B. Commercial, High-Efficiency, Gas Water Heaters:

1. Manufacturers: a. Bradford White Corporation. b. Rinnai. c. Smith, A. O. Water Products Company. d. State Industries, Inc.

2. Description: Manufacturer's proprietary design to provide at least 95 percent combustion efficiency at optimum operating conditions. Following features and attributes may be modified or omitted if water heater otherwise complies with requirements for performance.

3. Burner or Heat Exchanger: Comply with UL 795 or approved testing agency requirements for high-efficiency water heaters and for natural-gas fuel.

4. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat. 5. Safety Controls: Automatic, high-temperature-limit and low-water cutoff devices or systems. 6. Capacity and Characteristics: See schedule on drawings

2.2 WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES

A. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than water heater working-pressure rating. Select each relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank.

1. Gas Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4.

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Test and inspect water heater storage tanks, specified to be ASME-code construction, according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

B. Hydrostatically test commercial water heater storage tanks before shipment to minimum of one and one-half times pressure rating.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION

A. Install water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are accessible.

B. Install gas water heaters according to NFPA 54.

C. Install gas shutoff valves on gas supplies to gas water heaters without shutoff valves.

D. Install gas pressure regulators on gas supplies to gas water heaters without gas pressure regulators if gas pressure regulators are required to reduce gas pressure at burner.

E. Install automatic gas valves on gas supplies to gas water heaters, if required for operation of safety control.

F. Install combination temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend commercial-water-heater, relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic water piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.

G. Install water heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for water heaters that do not have tank drains. Refer to Division 22 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for hose-end drain valves.

H. Install thermometer on outlet piping of water heaters. Refer to Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages" for thermometers.

I. Install schedule 40 PVC exhaust and intake piping and fittings for inlet and outlet of condensing water heat and terminate through the roof in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendation.

J. Install condensate drain tubing from water heater to nearest floor drain.

K. Fill water heaters with water.

3.2 CONNECTIONS


B. Install piping adjacent to water heaters to allow service and maintenance. Arrange piping for easy removal of water heaters.

C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Conductors and Cables."


A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, confirm proper operation. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.


B. Remove and replace water heaters that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specified above.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain commercial water heaters. Refer to Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."

END 22 34 00

COMMERICAL PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 42 13 - 1

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 22 42 13 - COMMERICAL PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. Faucets for lavatories, showers and sinks.

B. Flushometers.

C. Toilet seats.

D. Protective shielding guards.

E. Fixture supports.

F. Water closets.

G. Urinals.

H. Lavatories.

I. Kitchen sinks.

J. Service basins.

K. Owner-furnished fixtures.

L. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 10 Section "Toilet and Bath Accessories."

1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by people with disabilities.

C. Cast Polymer: Cast-filled-polymer-plastic material. This material includes cultured-marble and solid-surface materials.

D. Cultured Marble: Cast-filled-polymer-plastic material with surface coating.

E. Fitting: Device that controls the flow of water into or out of the plumbing fixture. Fittings specified in this Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, shower heads and tub spouts, drains and tailpieces, and traps and waste pipes. Piping and general-duty valves are included where indicated.

F. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.

G. PMMA: Polymethyl methacrylate (acrylic) plastic.


H. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

I. Solid Surface: Nonporous, homogeneous, cast-polymer-plastic material with heat-, impact-, scratch-, and stain-resistance qualities.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of plumbing fixture indicated. Include selected fixture and trim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. Indicate materials and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow-control rates.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

C. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category through one source from a single manufacturer.

1. Exception: If fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for that category.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; for plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.

D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.

E. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.

F. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are compatible.

G. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing fixtures:

1. Enameled, Cast-Iron Fixtures: ASME A112.19.1M. 2. Porcelain-Enameled, Formed-Steel Fixtures: ASME A112.19.4M. 3. Slip-Resistant Bathing Surfaces: ASTM F 462. 4. Solid-Surface-Material Lavatories and Sinks: ANSI/ICPA SS-1. 5. Stainless-Steel Commercial, Handwash Sinks: NSF 2 construction. 6. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M. 7. Water-Closet, Flush Valve, Tank Trim: ASME A112.19.5. 8. Water-Closet, Flushometer Tank Trim: ASSE 1037.

H. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for lavatory and sink faucets:

1. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Side Spray: ASME A112.18.3M. 2. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Hose-Thread Outlet: ASME A112.18.3M. 3. Diverter Valves for Faucets with Hose Spray: ASSE 1025. 4. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1. 5. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011.


6. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7. 7. Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001. 8. NSF Potable-Water Materials: NSF 61. 9. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. 10. Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951. 11. Supply Fittings: ASME A112.18.1. 12. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.

I. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous fittings:

1. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001. 2. Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A112.18.1. 3. Manual-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037. 4. Plastic Tubular Fittings: ASTM F 409. 5. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2. 6. Sensor-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037 and UL 1951.

J. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous components: 1. Flexible Water Connectors: ASME A112.18.6. 2. Floor Drains: ASME A112.6.3. 3. Grab Bars: ASTM F 446. 4. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7. 5. Off-Floor Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1M. 6. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. 7. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5. 8. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLUMBING FIXTURES

A. See schedule.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before plumbing fixture installation.

B. Examine cabinets, counters, floors, and walls for suitable conditions where fixtures will be installed.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 AAFES FURNISHED CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT

A Provide rough-ins and final connections to all Exchange furnished equipment including shut off valves, piping, traps, etc. necessary to connect up equipment after it has be installed in place.

B. Install all faucets, sinks drains, tailpieces, overflows, traps, etc. furnished loose with all Exchange

furnished equipment.

C. All exposed piping readily visible for Exchange furnished equipment shall be chrome plated red brass pipe and fittings. Braces for support of exposed piping shall be chrome plated.

D. Pending installation of Exchange furnished equipment, all service lines shall be suitably capped,

plugged and protected. All water lines shall be valved.


E. Furnish vacuum breakers, pressure regulators solenoid valves, traps, piping, etc. as required for

installation of equipment.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Install off-floor supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounting fixtures.

1. Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures. 2. Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste piping. 3. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible fixtures.

C. Install back-outlet, wall-mounting fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to supports.

D. Install floor-mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping or building substrate.

E. Install wall-mounting fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports.

F. Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework.

G. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

H. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.

1. Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valves if supply stops are not specified with fixture.

I. Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to sanitary drainage system.

J. Install tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly connected to drainage system.

K. Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on wide side of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy for people with disabilities to reach.

L. Install toilet seats on water closets.

M. Install trap-seal liquid in dry urinals.

N. Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

O. Install water-supply flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at stop valves.

P. Install faucet flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

Q. Install traps on fixture outlets. 1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps. 2. Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated.

R. Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Escutcheons are specified in Division 22.


S. Set service basins in leveling bed of cement grout. Grout is specified in Division 22.

T. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and countertops using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Sealants are specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

3.4 CONNECTIONS


B. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.


A. Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed.

B. Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified components.

C. Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at faucets and flushometer valves to produce proper flow and stream.

C. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials. Do the following: 1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers and

spouts. 2. Remove sediment and debris from drains.

B. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished fixtures, faucets, and fittings, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.

B. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.

END 22 42 13

MECHANICAL - GENERAL PROVISIONS 23 01 00-1

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 23 01 00 - MECHANICAL - GENERAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. General Provisions of the contract, including the following, shall apply to Division 23 Specification Sections: Solicitation Documents and Division 00 and Division 01 of the specifications.

B. The Work to be performed under this Division shall include all labor, materials, equipment,

transportation, construction plant, and facilities necessary to provide a complete and satisfactory system ready to use. Wherever the words "the Contractor" or "this Contractor" appears in this Division, they refer to the Contractor for the work specified in that Section. This Contractor shall examine all Drawings and all Sections of the Specifications and shall be responsible for ascertaining to what extent other Drawings and Sections affect the Work herein specified.

1.2 CODES, REGULATIONS, AND STANDARDS

A. All work must be performed in accordance with the requirements of local, county, state and national codes and regulations including the requirements of the following: 1. 2015 International Building Code. 2. 2014 National Electrical Code. 3. 2015 International Plumbing Code. 4. 2015 International Mechanical Code. 5. Occupational Safety and Health Act. of 1970 6. Life Safety Code, N.F.P.A. No. 101. 7. For work not specifically listed above, use standards and codes of the National Fire

Protection Association.

B. All equipment, apparatus and systems shall be rated, tested, fabricated and/or installed in accordance with the applicable industry standard mentioned. The following list will serve to clarify abbreviations that appear in other sections of this specification: 1. AABC Associated Air Balance Council 2. ADC Air Diffusion Council 3. AGA American Gas Association. 4. AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association 5. ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute 6. ANSI American National Standards Institute 7. ASE Association of Safety Engineers 8. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineer 9. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 10. AWWA American Water Works Association 11. EPA Environmental Protection Agency 12. FS Federal Specifications 13. IBR Institute of Boiler and Radiator Manufacturers 14. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 15. MCAA Mechanical Contractors' Association of American 16. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association 17. NSC National Safety Council 18. NSF National Sanitation Foundation 19. SBI Steel Boiler Institute Industry 20. SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association 21. UL Underwriters Laboratories 22. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials. 23. NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau. 24. NEC National Electric Code (NFPA 70).


1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. FURNISH: The term furnish means supply and deliver to the Project Site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation and similar operations.

B. INSTALL: The term install describes operations at the Project Site including the actual unloading,

unpacking, assembly, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning and similar operations.

C. PROVIDE: The term provides means to furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use.

1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALS

A. See Division 01 for requirements for shop drawings and product data.

B. Asbestos-Free Material/Product: Prior to approval of the material/product to be used, the manufacturer/supplier shall furnish the Contracting Officer with written certification that the material/product contains no asbestos. This certificate is mandatory before approval will be issued. Submittals furnished without the asbestos-free certification will be returned to the Contractor with no action taken until such certification is provided.

C. See applicable sections to this Division for items requiring shop drawings.

1.5 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

A. Materials, the style, make or quality of which is specifically designated, shall be as specified.

B. Contractor shall furnish necessary materials in ample quantities and as frequently as required to avoid delay in the progress of the Work, and shall so store them as to prevent interference with other work.

1.6 DEFECTIVE WORK AND MATERIAL

A. All materials or work found to be defective or not in strict conformity with the drawings or different from requirements of the drawings and specifications or defaced or injured through negligence of Contractor or his employees, or through action of fire or weather will be rejected and shall be immediately removed from premises by Contractor and satisfactory materials and work substituted without delay.

B. All defective work or imperfect work shall be corrected immediately on notice from

Architect/Engineer. No previous inspection or certificate on account shall be held to relieve Contractor from his obligation to furnish sound materials and to perform good and satisfactory work.

1.7 COOPERATION AND COORDINATION

A. Contractor shall confer with other contractors at the site before installing his work to avoid interferences so that maximum head room and clearances may be maintained. In event that interferences develop between work of various contractors, Architect/Engineer’s decision will be final and no additional compensation will be allowed for changes required.

B. Particular attention shall be paid to situations where recessed equipment, pipes and lights occur,

or where the work of several trades occurs together above suspended ceilings, in pipe shafts or in areas where space is limited.

C. All fixtures, equipment, devices, switches, outlets, pumps, etc., shall be positioned to avoid all

interferences with and to assure proper coordination with work of all other trades, cases, partitions, wall, floor and ceiling patterns, architectural features, etc. All recessed devices, fixtures, etc., shall be coordinated with all wall, floor and ceiling patterns.


1.8 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

A. Contractor shall keep all his respective pipe openings closed by means of plugs or caps to prevent entrance of foreign matter during construction and cover all fixtures, equipment, and apparatus as required to protect them against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical damage both before and after installation. Any such fixtures, equipment or apparatus damaged prior to final acceptance of the Work shall be restored to its original condition or replaced by Contractor at no cost to Owner.

1.9 CONTRACT DRAWINGS

A. The layout shown on the Contract Drawings is necessarily diagrammatic but shall be followed as closely as actual construction and as other work will allow. The dimensions of work as shown on the Contract Drawings are not as-built dimensions. No measurements shall be scaled from the drawings and used as definite dimensions for laying out or fitting work in place.

B. The layout of manufactured equipment as shown on the drawings shall be checked and the exact

location shall be determined from the dimensions of equipment shop drawings. 1.10 MAINTENANCE MANUAL AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

A. Upon completion of the Work, Contractors shall provide with three copies of maintenance manual for all equipment furnished and installed under his Work. Manuals shall be in substantial 3-ring binders with project name and number inscribed on face and hinged back.

B. The manual shall include manufacturer's lubricating and operating instructions and parts list and

serial numbers for all operating machinery, including drive information, and motor horsepower, amperage, and voltage readings on all phases, valve chart, sequence of operation, index following the order listed in the specifications, warranties in the name of the Installation, and a list of manufacturers, service firms and subcontractors names and telephone numbers.

C. Training attendance rosters for each training session shall be included in manuals. Roster will

identify training subject, date, attendees name, job title, office symbol, grade/rank, and telephone number.

D. All switches, controls, and safety devices shall be clearly and permanently marked with embossed

or printed plates as to purpose and as to operation and shall be tested in the presence of the Owner designated representative to ensure that he understands their function and purpose.

E. Upon completion of the Work, Contractors shall put the systems into service. Contractors shall be

entirely responsible for the equipment during all testing operations including the lubricating and turning on and off of such apparatus.

1.11 PROJECT RECORD AND CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS

A. See Division 01 for red lining of all documents during construction to reflect "as-built" conditions.

END 23 01 00

BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS – MECHANICAL 23 05 00-1

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 23 05 00 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS - MECHANICAL


A. Provide all material as specified in this Section. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Each major component of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name, address, model number and rating on a plate securely affixed in a conspicuous place.

B. Code ratings, labels or other data which are die-stamped or otherwise affixed to the surface of the

equipment shall be in easily visible location. 1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Follow manufacturer's directions in delivery, storage, protection and handling of all equipment and materials.

B. Deliver and store equipment and materials to the site in original containers, suitably sheltered

from the elements and mechanical injury, but readily accessible for inspection until installed.

C. Items subject to moisture damage shall be stored in dry, heated spaces.

D. Ascertain, from examination of building, whether any special temporary access openings in the building(s) will be required for admission of apparatus furnished under this Division.

E. Machinery movers shall not rig, tie to, or rest weight upon any building member of any part of

building premises or make use of any stairway until specific permission is obtained from Architect/Engineer.

F. Permission to rig to or in any way make use of any part of building premises shall not relieve

Installer of responsibility for any damage resulting from, or because of said rigging or use. 1.4 PROTECTION

A. Keep pipe openings closed by means of plugs or caps to prevent entrance of foreign matter, and cover all fixtures, equipment and apparatus as required to protect them against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical damage both before and after installation.

B. Fixtures, equipment or apparatus damaged prior to final acceptance of work shall be restored to

original condition or replaced by Installer. C. Equipment shall be inherently safe and moving parts shall be covered with guards which meet

OSHA requirements.

D. Provide protective guards for devices such as or similar to thermostats, valves, switches and sprinkler heads which are so located as to be readily subject to tampering, accidental damage, or vandalism.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. All materials shall be manufactured in the United States. 2.2 CONDUIT AND WIRING

BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS – MECHANICAL 23 05 00-2

A. Wiring systems provided under Division 23 shall be as specified in Division 26.

B. All electrical terminals shall be labeled.

C. Provide wiring diagrams inside each cabinet.

D. Conduit shall provide a continuous ground and shall be heavy wall galvanized in slabs and where

subject to damage and EMT where protected or out of the way.

E. Final connections to equipment shall be flexible. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND INSERTS

A. Provide all hangers, supports, bracing, inserts, beams, anchors, guides, sleeves and miscellaneous steel for the proper support, alignment, expansion and contraction of piping and equipment.

B. Hanger supports shall be securely fastened to structural members by approved beam clamps and

clips, concrete inserts, anchors, or other appropriate methods agreed upon with the Architect/Engineer.

C. Maximum spacing of hangers and supports for steel piping shall be as follows:

Pipe Size Spacing 1/2" and 3/4" Not over 6'-0" 1" and 1-1/4" Not over 8'-0" 1-1/2" thru 3" Not over 10'-0" 4" and 6" Not over 12'-0"

D. Hanger and support spacing for copper piping shall not exceed 8 ft. on centers.

E. Additional hangers and supports shall be provided to minimize undesirable stress on valve bodies,

other fittings and equipment.

F. Provide all supplemental angles, channels and plates of adequate sizes where bracing or supports are required for piping and curbs between structural members.

3.5 OPENINGS IN CONSTRUCTION

A. All cutting required that may be necessary for the installation of this Work shall be done by this Contractor, and all patching and repairing shall be done by workmen competent in the trade required at the expense of this Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for arranging the work so that minimum cutting will be required. All rubbish and excess material involved in such cutting shall be promptly removed from the building and disposed of by this Contractor. Cutting through the floor or roof system shall be done only with approval of the Architect/Engineer so as to avoid cutting beams or the structural system. Approval must be obtained from the Architect/Engineer before cutting operations begin to avoid damage to the structure. All cutting must be carefully and neatly accomplished so as to minimize noise and dusting or staining of surrounding finishes.

END 23 05 00

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

23 05 13 - 1

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 23 05 13 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Provide single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following:

1. Motor controllers. 2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in HVAC equipment schedules or Sections.

B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

C. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level.

B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.

2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.

B. Efficiency: Premium efficiency.

C. Service Factor: 1.15.

D. Variable speed drive duty.

E. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.

F. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

G. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

23 05 13 - 2

H. Insulation: Class F.

2.4 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application:

1. Permanent-split capacitor. 2. Split phase. 3. Capacitor start, inductor run. 4. Capacitor start, capacitor run. 5. ECM.

B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.

C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole or ECM type.

E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

END 23 05 13

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR MECHANICAL 23 05 29-1

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 23 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR MECHANICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. Hangers and supports for mechanical piping and equipment. 1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Terminology used in this Section is defined in MSS SP-90. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design seismic restraint hangers and supports, for piping and equipment.

B. Design and obtain approval from authority with jurisdiction over seismic restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following according to Division 01.

B. Product data for each type of hanger and support.

C. Submit pipe hanger and support schedule showing manufacturer's Figure No., size, location, and features for each required pipe hanger and support.


A. Qualify welding processes and welding operators according to AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding

processes involved and, it pertinent, has undergone recertification.

B. Qualify welding processes and welding operators according to ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code," Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

C. Listing and Labeling: Provide hangers and supports, that are listed and labeled as defined in NFPA

70, Article 100.

1. UL and FM Compliance: Hangers, supports, and components include listing and labeling by UL and FM where used for fire protection piping systems.

2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

D. Licensed Operators: Use operators that are licensed by powder-operated tool manufacturers to

operate their tools and fasteners. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS


A. Hangers, Supports, and Components: Factory-fabricated according to MSS SP-58.

1. Components include galvanized coatings where installed for piping and equipment that will not have a field-applied finish.

2. Pipe attachments include nonmetallic coating for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

B. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: 100 psi average compressive strength, waterproofed calcium silicate,

encased with sheet metal shield. Insert and shield cover entire circumference of pipe and are of length indicated by manufacturer for pipe size and thickness of insulation.

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized.

B. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex-head, track bolts and nuts.

C. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers.

D. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink, nonmetallic.

1. Characteristic include post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement-type grout that is nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous and is recommended for both interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000psi, 28 day compressive strength. 3. Water: Potable. 4. Packaging: Premixed and factory-packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 HANGERS AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS

A. Specific hanger requirements are specified in the Section specifying the equipment and systems.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping specification Sections.

3.2 HANGERS AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with MSS SP-69 and SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.

B. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping supported together on field-fabricated,

heavy-duty trapeze hangers where possible.

C. Install supports with maximum spacings complying with MSS SP-69.

D. Where pipes of various sizes are supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers.

E. Install building attachments to structural steel. Space attachments within maximum piping span

length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping.

F. Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install

according to fastener manufacturer's written instructions. Do not use in lightweight concrete slabs or in concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick.


G. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

H. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapezes: Field-fabricate from ASTM A 36 steel shapes selected for loads being

supported. Weld steel according to AWS D-1.1.

I. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems, permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and stresses from

movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 "Building Services Piping" is not exceeded.

M. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements.

1. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting through

insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ASME B31.9. 1. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ASME B31.9.

2. Saddles: Install protection saddles MSS Type 39 where insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with segments of insulation that match adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Shields: Install MSS Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields span an arc of 180 degrees and have dimensions in inches not less than the following: NPS (Inches) LENGTH (Inches) THICKNESS (Inches)

1/4 to 3-1/2 12 0.048 4 12 0.060 5 and 6 18 0.060

4. Insert Material: Length at least as long as the protective shield. 5. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation of same thickness as piping.


A. Fabricate structural steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or support equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment, and make a smooth bearing surface.

3.4 METAL FABRICATION

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for pipe and equipment supports. B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field-weld connections that cannot be

shop-welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for manual shielded metal-arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, methods used in correcting welding work, and the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so that no roughness shows after finishing, and so that

contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours. 3.5 ADJUSTING


A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

3.6 PAINTING

A. Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal is specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply

galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END 23 05 29

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

23 05 53 - 1

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 23 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. Provide equipment labels.

B. Provide duct labels.

C. Provide stencils.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

2. Letter Color: White. 3. Background Color: Black. 4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by

3/4 inch. 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2

inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets. 8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated


23 05 53 - 2

(plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.2 DUCT LABELS

A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

B. Letter Color: White.

C. Background Color: Yellow.

D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel self-tapping screws.

H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

I. Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, duct size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with duct system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.

2.3 STENCILS

A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; minimum letter height of 1-1/4 inches for ducts; and minimum letter height of 3/4 inch for access panel and door labels, equipment labels, and similar operational instructions.

1. Stencil Material: Fiberboard or metal. 2. Identification Paint: Exterior, alkyd enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1 unless otherwise

indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.

3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.


23 05 53 - 3

3.3 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install plastic-laminated duct labels with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color codes:

1. Blue: For cold-air supply ducts. 2. Green: For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed-air ducts. 3. ASME A13.1 Colors and Designs: For hazardous material exhaust.

B. Stenciled Duct Label Option: Stenciled labels, showing service and flow direction, may be provided instead of plastic-laminated duct labels, at Installer's option, if lettering larger than 1 inch high is needed for proper identification because of distance from normal location of required identification.

C. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system.

D. Omit duct labeling on exposed ductwork.

END 23 05 53

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF HVAC SYSTEMS 23 05 95-1

DIVISION 23 – HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 23 05 95 – TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

OF HVAC SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. The HVAC systems will be tested and balanced by an independent testing and balancing (TAB) agency under separate contract with AAFES.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT APPLICABLE PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF HVAC SYSTEMS

The HVAC systems will be tested and balanced by an independent testing and balancing agency that is certified by AABC or NEBB.

A. The independent air testing and balancing agency (TAB) shall perform the balancing and testing

of the HVAC in accordance with the procedures of AABC or NEBB to analyze, balance, adjust and test air and water moving equipment, air and water distribution systems including kitchen exhaust hood systems.

B. The HVAC Contractor shall put all heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems and equipment

into operation and shall continue the operation of same during each working day of testing and balance and shall place the automatic temperature control system in satisfactory operation before the TAB agency shall begin work.

C. Prior to the final acceptance of the HVAC systems by the Contracting Officer, the Contractor shall

allow the TAB agency to schedule this work in cooperation with other trades involved and comply with the completion date of the project.

D. The Contractor shall make available to the TAB agency a complete copy of shop drawing

submittal data on mechanical equipment including performance curves (fans and pumps, chillers, air distribution devices, etc.) necessary to test and balance the HVAC systems.

E. The Contractor shall schedule the following necessary personnel:

1. Automatic Temperature Control Manufacturer's Service Representative to set

adjustments of automatic operated damper and devices to operate as specified, and/or noted, including setting of all controls for proper calibrations.

2. Mechanics - To operate, adjust, replace or repair the HVAC equipment that is found requiring any change/replacement in the pulleys, belts, dampers, valves, etc., of Contractors furnished and installed equipment.

3. Electrician - To assist in any problems resulting from any of the power or control wiring installation, including replacement of starters, and heater elements.

F. The Contractor shall make any changes in pulleys, belts and dampers or the addition of dampers as required for correct balance of the system as recommended by TAB agency, at no cost to Owner/Government.

G. The Contractor shall make all necessary corrections within 48 hours upon notification of TAB

agency of the deficiencies requiring adjustment, (piece-meal correction is not acceptable) and within 10 working days for items that require replacement or installation.

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF HVAC SYSTEMS 23 05 95-2

H. The Contractor shall leave all air filters replaced prior to the start of testing and balancing activity.

I. If the Contractor had scheduled the TAB agency to perform the work and the HVAC systems are

not ready to be tested and balanced, any additional cost required to extend the TAB work shall be at the Contractor's expense.

END 23 05 95

MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 07 00-1

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 23 07 00 - MECHANICAL INSULATION



1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. External insulation of ductwork, where indicated and specified.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Hot Surfaces: Normal operating temperatures of 100 deg F or higher.

B. Dual-Temperature Surfaces: Normal operating temperatures that vary from hot to cold.

C. Cold Surfaces: Normal operating temperatures less than 75 deg. F.

D. Thermal Resistivity: r-values represent the reciprocal of thermal conductivity (k-value). Thermal conductivity is the rate of heat flow through a homogenous material exactly 1 inch thick. Thermal resistivities are expressed by the temperature difference in degrees F between two exposed faces required to cause one Btu to flow through one square foot of material, in one hour, at a given mean temperature.

E. Density: Is expressed in lb/sq.ft.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following according to Division 1 requirements.

B. Product data for each type of mechanical insulation identifying k-value, thickness, and accessories.


A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Conform to the following characteristics for insulation including facings, cements, and adhesives, when tested according to ASTM E 84, by UL or other testing or inspecting organization acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. Label insulation with appropriate markings of testing laboratory.

1. Interior Insulation: Flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or

less. 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after testing of piping and duct systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Glass Fiber: a. Certain Teed Corporation. b. Knauf Fiberglass GmbH. c. Johns-Manville.


d. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corporation. 2.2 GLASS FIBER

A. Materials: Inorganic glass fibers, bonded with a thermosetting resin.

B. Jacket: All-purpose, factory-applied, laminated glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant kraft paper and aluminum foil having self-sealing lap.

C. Blanket: ASTM C 553, Type II, Class F-1, jacketed flexible blankets.

1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.32 average maximum, at 75 deg F. mean temperature.

D. Adhesive: Produced under the UL Classification and follow up service.

1. Type: Non-flammable, solvent-based. 2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to 180 deg F.

E. Vapor Barrier Coating: Waterproof coating recommended by insulation manufacturer for outside

service. 2.3 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS

A. Glass Cloth and Tape: Woven glass fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 ounces per sq.yd. 1. Tape Width: 4 inches. 2. Cloth Standard: MIL-C-20079H, Type I. 3. Tape Standard: MIL-C-20079H, Type II.

B. Corner Angles: 28 gage, 1 inch by 1 inch aluminum, adhered to 2 inch by 2 inch Kraft paper.

C. Anchor Pins: Capable of supporting 20 pounds each. Provide anchor pins and speed washers of

sizes and diameters as recommended by the manufacturer for insulation type and thickness.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean, dry, and remove foreign materials such as rust, scale, and dirt.

B. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water. Mix insulating cements contacting stainless-steel surfaces with demineralized water. 1. Follow cement manufacturers printed instructions for mixing and portions.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses required for each mechanical system.

B. Select accessories compatible with materials suitable for the service. Select accessories that do no

corrode, soften, or otherwise attack the insulation or jacket in either the wet or dry state.

C. Install vapor barriers on insulated pipes, ducts, and equipment having surface operating temperatures below 60 deg. F.

D. Apply insulation material, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturers printed

instructions.


E. Install insulation with smooth, straight, and even surfaces.

F. Seal joints and seams to maintain vapor barrier on insulation requiring a vapor barrier.

G. Seal penetrations for hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections in insulation requiring a vapor barrier.

H. Seal Ends: Except for flexible elastomeric insulation, taper ends at 45 degree angle and seal with

lagging adhesive. Cut ends of flexible elastomeric cellular insulation square and seal with adhesive.

I. Apply adhesives and coatings at manufacturers recommended coverage-per-gallon rate.

J. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

K. Item Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated do not apply insulation to the following systems, materials, and equipment.

1. Metal ducts with duct liner. 2. Factory-insulated flexible ducts. 3. Factory-insulated plenums, casings, terminal boxes, and filter boxes and sections. 4. Flexible connectors for ducts and pipes. 5. Vibration control devices. 6. Testing laboratory labels and stamps. 7. Nameplates and data plates. 8. Access panels and doors in air distribution systems.

3.3 DUCT INSULATION

A. Blanket Insulation: Install tight and smooth. Secure to ducts having long sides or diameters as follows: 1. Smaller Than 24 Inches: Bonding adhesive applied in 6 inch wide transverse strips on 12

inch centers. 2. 24 Inches and Larger: Anchor pins spaced 12 inches apart each way. Apply bonding

adhesive to prevent sagging of the insulation. 3. Overlap joints 3 inches. 4. Seal joints, breaks, and punctures with vapor barrier compound.

3.4 APPLICATIONS

A. General: Materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.

B. Duct Systems: Unless otherwise indicated, insulate the following duct systems:

1. Interior concealed rigid supply and tempered outside air ductwork. 3.5 DUCT SYSTEMS INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. INTERIOR CONCEALED RIGID HVAC SUPPLY AND TEMPERED OUTSIDE AIR DUCTS AND PLENUMS

THICKNESS VAPOR FIELD-

MATERIAL FORM IN BARRIER APPLIED INCHES REQ’D JACKET

Glass Fiber Blanket 2 Yes None

END 23 07 00

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 09 00 - 1

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 23 09 00 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Stand-alone building control panel and network to controllers for rooftop units and air terminals. Dampers and actuators are provided with each rooftop unit.

B. Power and signal wiring to ventilation air terminals.

C. Conduit to utility meters pulse generators.

D. Interlock wiring for hood exhaust fans and associated ventilation air terminals.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. DDC: Direct digital control.B. I/O: Input/output.

B. MS/TP: Master slave/token passing.

C. PC: Personal computer.

D. PID: Proportional plus integral plus derivative.

E. RTD: Resistance temperature detector.

1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

A. Comply with the following performance requirements:

1. Object Command: Reaction time of less than two seconds between operator command of a binary object and device reaction.

2. Object Scan: Transmit change of state and change of analog values to control units or workstation within six seconds.

3. Alarm Response Time: Annunciate alarm at workstation within 45 seconds. Multiple workstations must receive alarms within five seconds of each other.

4. Program Execution Frequency: Run capability of applications as often as five seconds, but selected consistent with mechanical process under control.

5. Performance: Programmable controllers shall execute DDC PID control loops, and scan and update process values and outputs at least once per second.

6. Reporting Accuracy and Stability of Control: Report values and maintain measured variables within tolerances as follows: a. Space Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F. b. Ducted Air Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F. c. Outside Air Temperature: Plus or minus 2 deg F. d. Dew Point Temperature: Plus or minus 3 deg F. e. Temperature Differential: Plus or minus 0.25 deg F.

B. Comply with UFC 3-410-02.

1.4 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION: See 23 09 93.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


A. Product Data: Include manufacturer’s technical literature for each control device. Indicate dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes for materials, and installation and startup instructions for each type of product indicated.

1. DDC System Hardware: Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer, and model number. Include technical data for operator workstation equipment, interface equipment, control units, transducers/transmitters, sensors, actuators, valves, relays/switches, control panels, and operator interface equipment.

2. Control System Software: Include technical data for operating system software, operator interface, color graphics, and other third-party applications.

3. Controlled Systems: Instrumentation list with element name, type of device, manufacturer, model number, and product data. Include written description of sequence of operation including schematic diagram.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer, and model number. 2. Schematic flow diagrams showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, and control

devices. 3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 4. Details of control panel faces, including controls, instruments, and labeling. 5. Written description of sequence of operation. 6. Schedule of dampers including size, leakage, and flow characteristics. 7. DDC System Hardware:

a. Wiring diagrams for control units with termination numbers. b. Schematic diagrams and floor plans for field sensors and control hardware. c. Schematic diagrams for control, communication, and power wiring, showing trunk

data conductors and wiring between operator workstation and control unit locations.

8. Control System Software: List of color graphics indicating monitored systems, data (connected and calculated) point addresses, output schedule, and operator notations.

9. Controlled Systems: a. Schematic diagrams of each controlled system with control points labeled and

control elements graphically shown, with wiring. b. Drawings showing mounting, routing, and wiring of elements including bases and

special construction. c. Points list.

C. Data Communications Protocol Certificates: Certify that each proposed DDC system component complies with Lonworks standards.

E. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: Include the following:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On a magnetic media or compact disc, complete with data

files. 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens. 5. Software license required by and installed for DDC workstations and control systems.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For HVAC instrumentation and control system to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Maintenance instructions and lists of spare parts for each type of control device and compressed-air station.


2. Interconnection wiring diagrams with identified and numbered system components and devices.

3. Keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator function. 4. Inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and calibration

tolerances. 5. Calibration records and list of set points.


A. Installer Qualifications: Automatic control system manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of system components required for this Project.


1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGDELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Factory-Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this Section are indicated to be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping of control devices to equipment manufacturer.

B. System Software: Update to latest version of software at Project completion.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate location of sensors, thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with plans and room details before installation.

B. Coordinate supply of conditioned electrical branch circuits for control units and operator workstation.

C. Coordinate equipment with Division 26 to achieve compatibility of communication interfaces.

D. Coordinate equipment with Division 26 to achieve compatibility with starter coils and annunciation devices.

E. Coordinate equipment with Division 26 to achieve compatibility with motor starters and annunciation devices.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Provide one year parts and labor warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Honeywell. 2. TAC. 3. Johnson Controls. 4. Trane. 5. Carrier.


2.2 CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, accessories, and software connected to distributed controllers operating in multiuser, multitasking environment on token-passing network and programmed to control mechanical systems.

2.3 DDC EQUIPMENT

A. Local Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with electronically programmable, nonvolatile, read-only memory; and backup power source.

1. Units monitor or control each I/O point, process information, and download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit.

2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions include the following: a. Global communications. b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O. c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.

3. Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit.

B. I/O Interface: Hardwired inputs and outputs may tie into system through controllers. Protect points so that shorting will cause no damage to controllers. 1. Binary Inputs: Allow monitoring of on-off signals without external power. 2. Pulse Accumulation Inputs: Accept up to 10 pulses per second. 3. Analog Inputs: Allow monitoring of low-voltage (0- to 10-V dc), current 4 to 20 mA), or

resistance signals. 4. Binary Outputs: Provide on-off or pulsed low-voltage signal, selectable for normally open

or normally closed operation. 5. Analog Outputs: Provide modulating signal, either low voltage (0- to 10-V dc) or current

(4 to 20 mA). 6. Tri-State Outputs: Provide two coordinated binary outputs for control of three-points,

floating-type electronic actuators. 7. Universal I/Os: Provide software selectable binary or analog outputs.

C. Power Supplies: Transformers with Class 2 current-limiting type or overcurrent protection; limit connected loads to 80 percent of rated capacity. DC power supply shall match output current and voltage requirements and be full-wave rectifier type with the following:

1. Output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak to peak. 2. Combined 1 percent line and load regulation with 100-mic.sec. response time for 50

percent load changes. 1. Built-in overvoltage and overcurrent protection and be able to withstand 150 percent

overload for at least 3 seconds without failure.

D. Power Line Filtering: Internal or external transient voltage and surge suppression for workstations or controllers with the following:

1. Minimum dielectric strength of 1000 V. 2. Maximum response time of 10 nanoseconds.

2. Minimum transverse-mode noise attenuation of 65 dB. 3. Minimum common-mode noise attenuation of 150 dB at 40 to 100 Hz.


2.4 UNITARY CONTROLLERS

A. Unitized, capable of stand-alone operation with sufficient memory to support its operating system, database, and programming requirements, and with sufficient I/O capacity for the application.

1. Configuration: Local keypad and display; diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor; wiring termination to terminal strip or card connected with ribbon cable; memory with bios; and 72-hour battery backup.

2. Operating System: Manage I/O communication to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information and allow central monitoring and alarms. Perform scheduling with real-time clock. Perform automatic system diagnostics; monitor system and report failures.

3. Enclosure: NEMA 1.

2.5 ELECTRONIC SENSORS

A. Temperature Sensors and Transmitters:

1. Manufacturers: a. BEC Controls Corporation. b. Ebtron, Inc. c. Johnson Controls. d. I.T.M. Instruments Inc. e. MAMAC Systems, Inc. f. RDF Corporation.

2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 deg F at calibration point. 3. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable. 4. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 8 inches (200 mm) long; use where not

affected by temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft. 5. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 72 inches (1830 mm) long, flexible; use where prone to

temperature stratification or where ducts are larger than 10 sq. ft.

6. Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight.

B. Pressure Transmitters/Transducers:

1. Static-Pressure Transmitter: Nondirectional sensor with suitable range for expected input, and temperature compensated. a. Accuracy: 2 percent of full scale with repeatability of 0.5 percent. b. Output: 4 to 20 mA. c. Building Static-Pressure Range: 0- to 0.25-inch wg. d. Duct Static-Pressure Range: 0- to 5-inch wg.

2. Differential-Pressure Switch (Air or Water): Snap acting, with pilot-duty rating and with suitable scale range and differential.

3. Pressure Transmitters: Direct acting for gas, liquid, or steam service; range suitable for system; linear output 4 to 20 mA.

2.6 STATUS SENSORS

A. Status Inputs for Electric Motors and Fans: Comply with ISA 50.00.01, current-sensing fixed- or split-core transformers with self-powered transmitter, adjustable and suitable for 175 percent of rated motor current.


2.7 ACTUATORS

A. Electric Motors: Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or two-position action.

1. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

2. Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil immersed and sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback potentiometer.

3. Nonspring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running torque of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf.

4. Spring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf.

B. Electronic Actuators: Direct-coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full-stroke cycles at rated torque.

1. Dampers: Size for running torque calculated as follows: a. Parallel-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 7 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper. b. Opposed-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 5 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper. c. Parallel-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 4 inch-lb/sq. ft of damper. d. Opposed-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 3 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper. e. Dampers with 2- to 3-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 1000 to

2500 fpm: Increase running torque by 1.5. f. Dampers with 3- to 4-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 2500 to

3000 fpm: Increase running torque by 2.0.

2. Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle. 3. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry. 4. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism. Provide external, manual

gear release on nonspring-return actuators. 5. Proportional Signal: 2- to 10-V dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10-V dc position feedback

signal. 6. Temperature Rating: Minus 22 to plus 122 deg F.

2.8 CONTROL CABLE

A. Electronic and fiber-optic cables for control wiring shall comply with Division 27.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that power supply is available to control units and Exchange furnished operator workstation.

B. Verify that duct, pipe, and equipment-mounted devices are installed before proceeding with installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Connect and configure equipment and software to achieve sequence of operation specified.

B. Verify location of sensors with Drawings and room details before installation. Install devices 48 inches above the floor.


1. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern.

C. Install guards on thermostats and sensors in the following locations:

1. Entrances. 2. Public areas. 3. Where indicated.

D. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

E. Install electronic and fiber-optic cables according to Division 27.

3.3 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION

A. Install building wire and cable according to Division 26.

B. Install signal and communication cable according to Division 27.

1. Conceal cable, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping are exposed.

2. Install cables in raceway in mechanical and electrical rooms. 3. Install cable drops to space sensors in raceway. 4. Install concealed cable tight to structure with tie wraps. 5. Bundle and harness multiconductor instrument cable in place of single cables where

several cables follow a common path. 6. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect against

abrasion. Tie and support conductors. 7. Number-code or color-code conductors for future identification and service of control

system, except local individual room control cables. 8. Install wire and cable with sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of

piping and equipment.

C. Connect hand-off-auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is in hand position.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. 3. Test calibration of electronic controllers by disconnecting input sensors and stimulating

operation with compatible signal generator. 4. Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating control

set points are as required. 5. Test each control loop to verify stable mode of operation and compliance with sequence

of operation. Adjust PID actions. 6. Test each system for compliance with sequence of operation. 7. Test software and hardware interlocks. 8. Coordinate testing with AAFES Commissioning Agent.

B. DDC Verification:


1. Verify that instruments are installed before calibration, testing, and loop or leak checks. 2. Check instruments for proper location and accessibility. 3. Check instrument installation for direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion depth,

and other applicable considerations. 4. Check flow instruments. Inspect tag number and line and bore size, and verify that inlet

side is identified and that meters are installed correctly. 5. Check pressure instruments, piping slope, installation of valve manifold, and self-

contained pressure regulators. 6. Check temperature instruments and material and length of sensing elements. 7. Check DDC system as follows:

a. Verify that DDC controller power supply is from emergency power supply, if applicable.

b. Verify that wires at control panels are tagged with their service designation and approved tagging system.

c. Verify that spare I/O capacity has been provided. d. Verify that DDC controllers are protected from power supply surges.

8. Coordinate checking with AAFES Commissioning Agent.

C. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment and repeat testing procedures.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Calibrating and Adjusting:

1. Calibrate instruments. 2. Make three-point calibration test for both linearity and accuracy for each analog

instrument. 3. Calibrate equipment and procedures using manufacturer's written recommendations and

instruction manuals. Use test equipment with accuracy at least double that of instrument being calibrated.

4. Control System Inputs and Outputs: a. Check analog inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span. b. Check analog outputs using milliampere meter at 0, 50, and 100 percent output. c. Check digital inputs using jumper wire. d. Check digital outputs using ohmmeter to test for contact making or breaking. e. Check resistance temperature inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span using a

precision-resistant source. 5. Pressure:

a. Calibrate pressure transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span. b. Calibrate pressure switches to make or break contacts, with adjustable

differential set at minimum. 6. Temperature:

a. Calibrate resistance temperature transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span using a precision-resistance source.

b. Calibrate temperature switches to make or break contacts.

7. Stroke and adjust control dampers with positioners, following manufacturer's recommended procedure, so that valve and damper is 0, 50, and 100 percent closed.

8. Provide diagnostic and test instruments for calibration and adjustment of system. 9. Provide written description of procedures and equipment for calibrating each type of

instrument. Submit procedures review and approval before initiating startup procedures.

B. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC instrumentation and controls. Refer to Division 01 Section


"Demonstration and Training." Provide minimum of one 8 hour workday. Coordinate with Owner and Architect/Engineer.

1. Provide two identical training sessions – one morning, one afternoon.

END 23 09 00

SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS 23 09 93 - 1

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 23 09 93 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS

PART 1. GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Control sequences for HVAC systems, subsystems, and equipment.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. DDC: Direct digital control.

1.3 UNIT OPERATING SEQUENCE

A. Dedicated Outdoor Air System (DOAS) Unit with Humidity Control:

1. Occupied Time Schedule: a. Input Devices: DDC system time schedule, hood fan current sensors. b. Output Devices: DDC system and digital outputs. c. Action: Change temperature setpoints, fan status, and low leakage outside air

damper position.

2. Supply Air Temperature: a. Input Device: Duct mounted sensor. b. Output Device: Digital outputs to control cooling stages and heating stages. c. Action: Control cooling/heating capacity to maintain supply air temperature.

3. Humidity Control: Provided by hot gas reheat coil.

a. Input Device: Space humidity sensor. b. Output Device: Cooling stages; digital output to activate the refrigerant hot gas

coil. c. Action: Activate cooling stages when air humidity exceeds 55% (adjustable).

Control refrigerant hot gas coil to maintain supply air setpoint.

4. Air Volume Control: a. Input Device: Duct mounted pressure sensor. b. Output Device: Variable Speed Drive on supply fan. c. Action: Modulate fan speed to maintain duct static pressure setpoint.

5. Display:

a. Supply air temperature setpoint. b. Supply air temperature. c. Heating output. d. Cooling output. e. Supply fan status output. f. Supply fan status verification. g. Humidity setpoint. h. Space Humidity. i. Reheat coil status. j. Supply fan speed. k. Duct static pressure setpoint. l. Duct static pressure.

B. Ventilation Air Terminals:

1. Occupancy:


a. Input Devices: Time schedule at workstation, Co2 sensors, hood fan current sensors.

b. Output Devices: DDC system binary outputs. c. Action: Report occupancy and enable occupied air volume setpoint.

(1) Occupied Setpoint: 100% open unless noted otherwise. (2) Unoccupied Setpoint: 0% open. (3) Co2 Sensor: Boxes controlled by Co2 sensors shall modulate damper to

maintain Co2 setpoint below 900 ppm, unless driven full open by exhaust hood interlock.

2. Air Volume: a. Input Device: Sensing grid in air terminal. b. Output Device: Electronic damper actuators. c. Action: Modulate damper to maintain air volume or Co2 setpoint. Fully open

scheduled terminals with operation of exhaust fans.

3. Display: a. Room/area served. b. Room occupied/unoccupied status. c. Room air volume. d. Room air volume setpoint. e. Air volume alarm if air flow falls more than 15% below setpoint for more than 10

minutes. f. Air-damper position as percent open.

C. Rooftop Units

1. Occupied Time Schedule: a. Input Devices: DDC system time schedule. b. Output Devices: DDC system and digital outputs. c. Action: Change temperature setpoints and fan status.

2. Space Temperature: a. Input Device: Room sensor. b. Output Device: Digital outputs to control cooling stages and heating stages. c. Action: Cycle cooling/heating stages to maintain room air temperature.

Economizer controller, actuators, and dampers provided as part of rooftop unit.

3. Display: a. Space temperature setpoint. b. Space air temperature. c. Supply air temperature. d. Heating stage status. e. Cooling stage status. f. Supply fan status output. g. Supply fan status verification.

1.4 EXHAUST FANS

A. Exhaust Fan E-5: Interlock with rooftop unit RT-1 occupied mode.

B. Range hood fans: Provide current sensors to start DOAS and open ventilation air terminals when fans E-1, E-2, E-3, E-4, or E-6 are started.

1.5 UTILITY METERS

A. Water: Provide digital input for pulse generator by others.


B. Electricity: Provide digital input for pulse generator by others.

C. Natural Gas: Provide digital input for pulse generator by others.

PART 2. PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3. EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

END 23 09 93

METAL DUCTWORK 23 31 13-1

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 23 31 13 - METAL DUCTWORK



1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. Sheet metal ductwork for air distribution systems including accessories.

B. Welded Carbon Steel ductwork for Popeye’s hood exhaust.

C. Prefabricated exhaust ductwork for Burger King exhaust. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Codes and Standards:

1. SMACNA Standards: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible" for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork.

2. ASHRAE Standards: Comply with ASHRAE Handbook, Equipment Volume, Chapter 1 "Duct Construction", for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork.

3. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems" and NFPA 90B "Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems". Comply with NFPA-96 and International Mechanical Code for installation of exhaust hood ductwork.

B. Field Reference Manual: Have available for reference at project field office, copy of SMACNA "HVAC

Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible". C. Hood exhaust ductwork shall comply with NFPA-96 and International Mechanical Code.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for metal ductwork materials and products in accord with Division 1.


A. Protection: Protect shop-fabricated and factory-fabricated ductwork, accessories and purchased products from damage during shipping, storage and handling. Prevent end damage and prevent dirt and moisture from entering ducts and fittings.

B. Storage: Where possible, store ductwork inside and protect from weather. Where necessary to store

outside, store above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCTWORK MATERIALS

A. Sheet Metal: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate ductwork from galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A 527, lockforming quality; with G 90 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A 525; and mill phosphatized for exposed locations.

B. Carbon Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 1008A/A 1008M. C. Exposed round ductwork shall be spiral seam construction.


D. Stainless Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A408A or 480M, type 304 or 316. E. Burger King hood ductwork shall be Metal-Fab double-lined PIC series.

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS

A. General: Provide miscellaneous materials and products of types and sizes indicated and, where not otherwise indicated, provide type and size required to comply with ductwork system requirements including proper connection of ductwork and equipment.

B. Fittings: Provide radius type fittings fabricated of multiple sections with maximum 15 degree change

of direction per section. Unless specifically detailed otherwise, use 45 degree laterals and 45 degree elbows for branch takeoff connections. Where 90 degree branches are indicated, provide conical type tees.

C. Duct Sealant: Non-hardening, non-migrating mastic or liquid elastic sealant, type applicable for

fabrication/installation detail, as compounded and recommended by manufacturer specifically for sealing joints and seams in ductwork.

D. Duct Cement: Non-hardening migrating mastic or liquid neoprene based cement, type applicable for

fabrication/installation detail, as compounded and recommended by manufacturer specifically for cementing fitting components, or longitudinal seams in ductwork.

E. Ductwork Support Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hot-dipped galvanized steel

fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, trim and angles for support of ductwork. 2.3 FABRICATION

A. Shop fabricate ductwork in 4, 8, 10 or 12-ft. lengths, unless otherwise indicated or required to complete runs. Preassemble work in shop to greatest extent possible, so as to minimize field assembly of systems. Disassemble systems only to extent necessary for shipping and handling. Match-mark sections for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Shop fabricate ductwork of gages and reinforcement complying with SMACNA "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards".

C. Fabricate duct fittings to match adjoining ducts, and to comply with duct requirements as applicable to fittings. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate elbows with center-line radius equal to associated duct width; and fabricate to include turning vanes in elbows where shorter radius is necessary. Limit angular tapers to 30 deg. for contracting tapers and 20 deg. for expanding tapers.

D. Fabricate ductwork with accessories installed during fabrication to the greatest extent possible. Refer

to Division 23 section "Ductwork Accessories" for accessory requirements. E. Fabricated Popeyes hood exhaust ductwork of 16 gage carbon steel with welded joints. Material and

fabrication shall comply with NFPA-96. Joints shall be externally welded liquid tight. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION

A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which metal ductwork is to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF METAL DUCTWORK


A. General: Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve air-tight (5% leakage for systems rated 3" and under; 1% for systems rated over 3") and noiseless (no objectionable noise) systems, capable of performing each indicated service. Install each run with minimum number of joints. Align ductwork accurately at connections, within 1/8" misalignment tolerance and with internal surfaces smooth. Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors of type which will hold ducts true-to-shape and to prevent buckling. Support vertical ducts at every floor.

B. Field Fabrication: Complete fabrication of work at project as necessary to match shop-fabricated

work and accommodate installation requirements.

C. Routing: Locate ductwork runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Locate runs as indicated by diagrams, details and notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run ductwork in shortest route which does not obstruct useable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. Limit clearance to 1/2" where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of ducts, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where possible, locate insulated ductwork for 1" clearance outside of insulation. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal ductwork from view, by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as specifically shown. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling and lighting layouts and similar finished work.

D. Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, conceal space between

construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same gage as duct. Overlap opening on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2". Fasten to duct and substrate. 1. Where ducts pass through fire-rated floors, walls, or partitions, provide firestopping between

duct and substrate, in accordance with requirements of SMACNA.

E. Coordination: Coordinate duct installations with installation of accessories, dampers, coil frames, equipment, controls and other associated work of ductwork system.

F. Installation: Install metal ductwork in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. G. Popeye’s hood ductwork: Install Popeye’s hood exhaust ductwork in compliance with NFPA-96 and

International Mechanical Code.

H. Burger King hood ductwork: Install in compliance with Metal-Fab and Gaylord Instructions. 3.3 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. General: Connect metal ductwork to equipment as indicated, provide flexible connection for each ductwork connection to equipment mounted on vibration isolators, and/or equipment containing rotating machinery. Provide access doors as indicated.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Clean ductwork internally, unit by unit as it is installed, of dust and debris. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances which might cause corrosive deterioration of metal or, where ductwork is to be painted, might interfere with painting or cause paint deterioration.

B. Temporary Closure: At ends of ducts which are not connected to equipment or air distribution devices

at time of ductwork installation, provide temporary closure of polyethylene film or other covering which will prevent entrance of dust and debris until time connections are to be completed.


END 23 31 13

DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 23 33 00-1

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 23 33 00 - DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES



1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. Ductwork accessories. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of ductwork accessories, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years.

B. Codes and Standards:

1. SMACNA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible".

2. Industry Standards: Comply with ASHRAE recommendations pertaining to construction of ductwork accessories, except as otherwise indicated.

3. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of NFPA 90A "Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems", pertaining to installation of ductwork accessories.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accord with Division 01.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each type of ductwork accessory, including dimensions, capacities, and materials of construction; and installation instructions.

C. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's maintenance data including parts lists for each type of

duct accessory. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with Division 01.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DAMPERS

A. Low Pressure Manual Dampers: Provide dampers of single blade type or multiblade type, constructed in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards".

B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide dampers of one of the following:

1. Air Balance, Inc. 2. Nailor. 3. American Warming & Ventilating, Inc. 4. Arrow Louver and Damper. 5. Greenheck. 6. National Controlled Air. 7. Ruskin Mfg. Co. 8. Leader.

C. Motorized dampers specified in 23 09 00 and 23 74 13. 2.2 TURNING VANES


A. Fabricated Turning Vanes: Provide fabricated turning vanes and vane runners, constructed in

accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards".

B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Provide turning vanes constructed of 1-1/2" wide curved blades set at 3/4" o.c., supported with bars perpendicular to blades set at 2" o.c., and set into side strips suitable for mounting in ductwork.

C. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Provide acoustic turning vanes constructed of airfoil shaped aluminum

extrusions with perforated faces and fiberglass fill.

D. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide turning vanes of one of the following: 1. Aero Dyne Co.

2. Airsan Corp. 3. Anemostat Products Div.; Dynamics Corp. of America. 4. Duro Dyne Corp. 5. Environmental Elements Corp.; Subs. Koppers Co., Inc. 6. Hart & Cooley Mfg. Co. 7. Register & Grille Mfg. Co., Inc. 8. Souther, Inc.

2.3 DUCT HARDWARE

A. General: Provide duct hardware, manufactured by one manufacturer for all items on project, for the following: 1. Test Holes: Provide in ductwork at fan inlet and outlet, and elsewhere as indicated, duct test

holes, consisting of slot and cover, for instrument tests. 2. Quadrant Locks: Provide for each damper, quadrant lock device on one end of shaft; and

end bearing plate on other end for damper lengths over 12". Provide extended quadrant locks and end extended bearing plates for externally insulated ductwork.

B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide duct hardware of one of the

following: 1. Ventfabrics, Inc.

2. Young Regulator Co. 3. Duro Dyne Corp.

2.4 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS

A. General: Provide flexible duct connections wherever ductwork connects to vibration isolated equipment. Construct flexible connections of neoprene-coated flameproof fabric crimped into duct flanges for attachment to duct and equipment. Make airtight joint. Provide adequate joint flexibility to allow for thermal, axial, transverse, and torsional movement, and also capable of absorbing vibrations of connected equipment.

B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide flexible connections of one of the

following:

1. Duro Dyne Corp. 2. Flexaust (The) Co. 3. Ventfabrics, Inc.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which ductwork accessories will be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.


3.2 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES

A. Install ductwork accessories in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, with applicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended function.

B. Install turning vanes in square or rectangular 90 deg. elbows in supply and exhaust air systems, and

elsewhere as indicated.

C. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, as necessary to interface installation of ductwork accessories properly with other work.

D. Install manual damper at each branch duct take-off.


A. Operate installed ductwork accessories to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Test for air leakage while system is operating. Repair or replace faulty accessories, as required to obtain proper operation and leakproof performance.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Adjusting: Adjust ductwork accessories for proper settings, install fusible links in fire dampers and adjust for proper action. 1. Label access doors in accordance with Division-23 section "Mechanical Identification".

2. Final positioning of manual dampers is specified in Division-23, Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing".

B. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with

manufacturer's touch-up paint. END 23 33 00

FANS 23 34 23-1

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 23 34 23 - FANS



1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. All materials, equipment, tools, labor, etc required to complete the installation of the fans as shown on the drawings and as specified.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data for selected models, including specialties, accessories; and the following: 1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. 2. Certified fan sound power ratings. 3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor and fan accessories. 4. Materials gages and finishes, including color charts. 5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.

C. Maintenance data for fans, for inclusion in Operation and Maintenance Manual specified in Division

01. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. UL Compliance: Fans and components shall be UL listed and labeled.

B. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory and NEMA Compliance (NRTL): Fans and components shall be NRTL listed and labeled. The term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

C. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.

D. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70 "National

Electrical Code." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Lift and support units with the manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.

B. Disassemble and reassemble units as required for movement into the final location following manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Deliver fan units as a factory-assembled unit to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with

protective crating and covering. 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate the installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations specified in Division 07.

B. Coordinate the size and location of structural steel support members.

FANS 23 34 23-2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following. 1. Cook (Loren) Co.

2.2 FANS, GENERAL

A. General: Provide fans that are factory fabricated and assembled, factory tested, and factory finished, with indicated capacities and characteristics.

B. Fans and Shafts: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation at the

maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower. 1. Fan Shafts: Turned, ground, and polished steel designed to operate at no more than 70

percent of the first critical speed at the top of the speed range of the fan's class.

C. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation. 1. Service Factor: 1.4.

D. Belts: Oil-resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic. E. Motors and Fan Wheel Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 15 HP; fixed pitch for

use with motors larger than 15 HP. Select pulley so that pitch adjustment is at the middle of the adjustment range at fan design conditions. 1. Belt Guards: Provide steel belt guards for motors mounted on the outside of the fan cabinet.

F. Shaft Bearings: Provide type indicated, having a median like "Rating Life" (AFBMA L) of 200,000

calculated in accordance with AFBMA Standard 9 for ball bearings and AFBMA Standard 11 for roller bearings.

2.3 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS

A. Description: Belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, and accessories.

B. Housing: Heavy-gage, removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; venture inlet cone. C. Fan Wheel: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades. D. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to housing, with the following features:

1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub. 2. Shaft Bearings: permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings. 3. Pulleys: Cast iron, adjustable pitch motor pulley. 4. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream.

E. Accessories:

1. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal overload protection mounted inside fan housing, factory wired through internal aluminum conduit.

2. Bird Screens: Removable, ½ inch mesh, aluminum or brass wire. 3. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel blade, backdraft dampers mounted in wall sleeve;

factory set to close when fan stops. 4. Roof Curbs: Prefabricated galvanized steel curbs with internal insulation. 5. Accessories to meet NFPA-96 as scheduled.

a. Include curb extensions as required to locate fan discharge minimum of 40” above roof deck.

2.4 MOTORS

A. See Section 23 05 13.

FANS 23 34 23-3

B. Starters, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are specified in Division

26. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, housekeeping pads, and other conditions affecting performance of fans.

B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install fans level and plumb, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Support units as described below, using the vibration control devices indicated. Vibration control devices are specified in Division 23.

1. Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with stainless steel hardware.

B. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air handling units for service and

maintenance. 3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Duct installations and connections are specified in other Division 23 sections. Make final duct connections with flexible connections.

B. Electrical Connections: The following requirements apply:

1. Electrical power wiring is specified in Division 26. 2. Temperature control wiring and interlock wiring are specified in Section 23 0900. 3. Grounding: Connect unit components to ground in accordance with the National Electrical

Code. 3.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Clean unit cabinet interiors to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Vacuum clean fan wheel and cabinet.

END 23 34 23

AIR CURTAINS 23 34 33 - 1

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 23 34 33 - AIR CURTAINS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Air curtains.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories for each unit.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air curtains to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of air curtains and are based on the specific product indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."


C. Comply with AMCA 220, "Test Methods for Air Curtain Units," for airflow, outlet velocity, and power consumption.

D. Comply with NSF 37, "Air Curtains for Entranceways in Food and Food Service Establishments."

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of air curtains and suspension system components with other construction, including light fixtures, fire-suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Berner International Corp. 2. Mars Air Products; Mars Air Door Division. 3. Leading Edge.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Housing Materials: Galvanized steel with electrostatically applied epoxy enamel finish over powdered mirror.

B. Intake Louvers: Integral part of the housing.

C. Discharge Nozzle: Integral part of the housing, containing adjustable air-directional vanes.

2.3 FANS

A. Fans: Centrifugal, forward curved, double width, double inlet statically and dynamically balanced.

AIR CURTAINS 23 34 33 - 2

B. Fan Drives: Direct.

2.4 MOTORS

A. Motor Type: Resiliently mounted, continuous duty, with integral thermal-overload protection.

B. Bearings: Permanently sealed, lifetime, prelubricated, ball bearings.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Mounting Brackets.

B. Microswitches.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions where air curtains will be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install air curtains with clearance for equipment service and maintenance.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

END 23 34 33

AIR TERMINAL UNITS 23 36 00 - 1

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 23 36 00 - AIR TERMINAL UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Shutoff, single-duct air terminal units without electric reheat coils.


A. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.”

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following products, including rated capacities, furnished specialties, sound-power ratings, and accessories.

1. Air terminal units. 2. Liners and adhesives. 3. Sealants and gaskets.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air terminal units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Instructions for resetting minimum and maximum air volumes.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHUTOFF, SINGLE-DUCT AIR TERMINAL UNITS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Krueger. 2. Price. 3. Titus.

B. Configuration: Volume-damper assembly inside unit casing with control components inside a protective metal shroud.

C. Casing: 0.034-inch steel, single wall.

1. Casing Lining: Adhesive attached coated, fibrous-glass duct liner complying with ASTM C 1071, and having a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50, for both insulation and adhesive, when tested according to ASTM E 84. a. Cover liner with nonporous foil.

2. Air Inlet: Round stub connection or S-slip and drive connections for duct attachment.


3. Air Outlet: S-slip and drive connections. 4. Access: Removable panels for access to parts requiring service, adjustment, or maintenance;

with airtight gasket. 5. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in

ASHRAE 62.1.

D. Volume Damper: Galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self-lubricating bearings.

1. Maximum Damper Leakage: ARI 880 rated, 2 percent of nominal airflow at 3-inch wg inlet static pressure.

2. Damper Position: Normally open.

2.2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Stainless steel rods and nuts.

B. Air Terminal Unit Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.

C. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes and plates for units with steel casings; aluminum for units with aluminum casings.

D. Channel Support System: Shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces and with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end. Include matching components and corrosion-resistant coating.


A. Factory Tests: Test assembled air terminal units according to ARI 880.

1. Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, maximum and minimum factory-set airflows, coil type, and ARI certification seal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install air terminal units according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."

B. Install air terminal units level and plumb. Maintain sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance.


A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Hangers and Supports." Each unit’s supports shall be designed to withstand 150% of unit weight in the vertical plane and 50% of unit weight in the horizontal plane.

B. Building Attachments: Structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

C. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

D. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.


3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect ducts to air terminal units according to Section 23 31 13.

B. Make connections to air terminal units with flexible connectors complying with requirements in Section 23 33 00.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, and maximum and minimum factory-set airflows. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for equipment labels and warning signs and labels.

END 23 36 00

AIR OUTLET AND INLET 23 37 13-1

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 23 37 13 - AIR OUTLET AND INLET



1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. All grilles, registers, and diffusers. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air outlets and inlets of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Codes and Standards:

1. ARI Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with ARI 650 "Standard

for Air Outlets and Inlets". 2. ASHRAE Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with ASHRAE 70

"Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets". 3. ADC Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in certified laboratories under

requirements of ADC 1062 "Certification, Rating and Test Manual". 4. ADC Seal: Provide air outlets and inlets bearing ADC Certified Rating Seal. 5. AMCA Compliance: Test and rate louvers in accordance with AMCA 500 "Test Method for

Louvers, Dampers and Shutters". 6. AMCA Seat: Provide louvers bearing AMCA Certified Rating Seal. 7. NFPA Compliance: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with NFPA 90A "Standard for

the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems". 1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for air outlets and inlets including the following: 1. Schedule of air outlets and inlets indicating drawing designation, room location, number

furnished, model number, size, and accessories furnished. 2. Data sheet for each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicating

construction, finish, and mounting details. 3. Performance data for each type of air outlet and inlet furnished, including aspiration ability,

temperature and velocity traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings. Indicate selections on data.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver air outlets and inlets wrapped in factory-fabricated fiber-board type containers. Identify on outside of container type of outlet or inlet and location to be installed. Avoid crushing or bending and prevent dirt and debris from entering and settling in devices.

B. Store air outlets and inlets in original cartons and protect from weather and construction work traffic.

Where possible, store indoors; when necessary to store outdoors, store above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping.

AIR OUTLET AND INLET 23 37 13-2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GRILLES, REGISTERS, AND DIFFUSERS

A. General: Units are scheduled on the drawings.

B. Finish Compatibility: Provide with border styles that are compatible with adjacent finish systems. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of finish systems which will contain each type of air device.

C. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide air devices of one of the following:

1. Krueger. 2. Price. 3. Titus.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which air outlets and inlets are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in accordance with recognized industry practices to insure that products serve intended functions.

B. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork and duct accessories, as necessary to interface

installation of air outlets and inlets with other work.

C. Locate ceiling air diffusers, registers, and grilles, as indicated on general construction "Reflected Ceiling Plans". Unless otherwise indicated, locate units in center of acoustical ceiling modules.

END 23 37 13

FOOD SERVICE VENTILATION SYSTEMS 23 38 15-1

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 23 38 15 – FOOD SERVICE VENTILATION SYSTEMS



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide:

1. Complete Food Service Ventilating systems including canopy, filters, lights, ductwork, surrounding stainless steel panels and extinguishing system.

2. Extinguishing system may be factory installed or field fabricated. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Regulatory Requirements:

1. National Fire protection Association, NFPA: a. 90A: Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. b. 96: Installation of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and Grease-Laden

Vapor from Commercial Cooking Equipment. c. 17A: Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems.

2. National Sanitary Foundation, NSF:

a. Seal of approval.

3. Underwriter's Laboratories, UL: a. UL listed and labeled components.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Division 01.

B. Product Data:

1. Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit layout of entire extinguishing system including nozzles, piping, and fused links. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Exhaust Hoods: See Schedule.

B. Extinguishing System:

1. Ansul or Amerex as scheduled.

2.2 CANOPY HOODS:

A. Construction:

FOOD SERVICE VENTILATION SYSTEMS 23 38 15-2

1. 18 gauge stainless steel, Type 304. 2. Canopy internal supports consisting of angles and channels to reinforce and prevent

vibration and fatigue. 3. Canopy fabricated as one piece and shipped as one piece.

B. Filter:

1. Canopy filter housing of same material as canopy liner, complete with UL classified

extractor type aluminum grease filters full length. 2. Filter shall provide constant pressure drop. 3. Filter housing shall terminate at bottom with pitched drip tray full length of canopy and

shall be equipped with grease cup for easy removal and daily cleaning.

C. Extinguishing System:

1. System shall protect range hoods, exhaust ducts, filters and appliances. 2. Automatic operation initiated by fusible metallic links with temperature ratings in

accordance with below referenced installation manual. 3. Piping:

a. Pipe: Standard weight, Schedule 40; black steel; chrome-sleeved where exposed.

b. Fittings: Malleable-iron, ductile-iron, steel or cast-iron; of standard weight. c. Pipe reamed and cleaned before assembly and after assembly.

4. Provide manual release station, located as indicated on drawings, for each extinguishing

system. Provide permanent plastic laminate tag at each pull station, clearly indicating hood served.

5. Provide set of dry contacts for contacts for fire alarm system. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION

A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which exhaust hoods are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF HOODS

A. Install hoods and extinguishing systems as indicated on Drawings and in accord with NFPA 96 and 17A.

B. Provide all miscellaneous framing, anchors, and brackets necessary to properly support hoods.

C. Install piping and extinguishing systems in compliance with manufacturer’s requirements and

recommendations. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Start-Up:

1. Provide start-up supervision. 2. Provide instruction to AAFES Personnel on system operation. 3. Provide field certification by system manufacturer. 4. Provide acceptance test observed by Base Fire Department personnel. Test

extinguishing system in conjunction with fire alarm tests. Contractor shall provide all material and labor to conduct the test(s).

END 23 38 15

PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, HEATING AND COOLING MAKEUP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 23 74 13-1

DIVISION 23 – HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 23 74 13 - PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provision of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section includes:

1. Provide and install packaged, outdoor, central-station air-handling units (rooftop units and DOAS units) with the following components and accessories, where specified. a. Direct-expansion cooling. b. Gas furnace. c. Hot gas reheat coil (where scheduled). d. Enthalpy economizer controller and dampers. e. Roof curb. f. Miscellaneous steel at curb and duct openings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. DDC: Direct-digital controls.

B. ECM: Electrically commutated motor.

C. RTU: Rooftop unit. As used in this Section, this abbreviation means packaged, outdoor, central-station air-handling units. This abbreviation is used regardless of whether the unit is mounted on the roof or on a concrete base on ground.

D. Supply-Air Fan: The fan providing supply air to conditioned space. "Supply air" is defined as the air entering a space from air-conditioning, heating, or ventilating apparatus.

E. Supply-Air Refrigerant Coil: Refrigerant coil in the supply-air stream to absorb heat (provide cooling) during cooling operations. "Supply air" is defined as the air entering a space from air-conditioning, heating, or ventilating apparatus.

F. DOAS: Dedicated outdoor air system.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with Division 1.

B. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical data for each RTU, including rated capacities, dimensions, required clearances, characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

C. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For RTUs to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Comply with Division 1.


E. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. ARI Compliance:

1. Comply with ARI 210/240 and ARI 340/360 for testing and rating energy efficiencies for RTUs.

2. Comply with ARI 270 for testing and rating sound performance for RTUs.

B. ASHRAE Compliance:

1. Comply with ASHRAE 15 for refrigeration system safety. 2. Comply with ASHRAE 33 for methods of testing cooling and heating coils. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems and

Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

D. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.

E. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1995.

F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace components of RTUs that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Compressors: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five years from date of Substantial Completion.

2. Warranty Period for Gas Furnace Heat Exchangers: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 10 years from date of Substantial Completion (DOAS only).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Aaon. 2. Trane. 3. Daikin. 4. York.

2.2 CASING

A. General Fabrication Requirements for Casings: Formed and reinforced insulated panels, fabricated to allow removal for access to internal parts and components, with joints between sections sealed. Access to fans, filters and controls shall be through hinged panels with tool-less fasteners.

B. Exterior Casing Material: Galvanized steel with factory-painted finish, with pitched roof panels and knockouts with grommet seals for electrical and piping connections and lifting lugs.


C. Casing Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

1. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I. 2. Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). 3. Liner materials shall have air-stream surface coated with an erosion- and temperature-

resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric. 4. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.

D. Condensate Drain Pans: Formed sections of galvanized steel sheet, a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) deep, and complying with ASHRAE 62.1-2004.

1. Drain Connections: Threaded nipple. 2. Pan-Top Surface Coating: Corrosion-resistant compound.

E. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

2.3 FANS

A. Supply-Air Fans: Centrifugal; with permanently lubricated, single-speed motor installed on an adjustable fan base resiliently mounted in the casing.

B. Condenser-Coil Fan: Propeller, mounted on shaft of permanently lubricated motor.

2.4 COILS

A. Supply-Air Refrigerant Coil and Hot Gas Heat Reclaim Coil:

1. Aluminum plate fin and seamless copper tube in steel casing with equalizing-type vertical distributor.

2.5 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT COMPONENTS

A. Number of Refrigerant Circuits: Two minimum.

B. Compressor: Hermetic, scroll, mounted on vibration isolators; with internal overcurrent and high-temperature protection, internal pressure relief, and crankcase heater.

C. Refrigeration Specialties:

1. Refrigerant: 410A. 2. Expansion valve with replaceable thermostatic element. 3. Refrigerant filter/dryer. 4. Manual-reset high-pressure safety switch. 5. Automatic-reset low-pressure safety switch. 6. Minimum off-time relay. 7. Automatic-reset compressor motor thermal overload. 8. Brass service valves installed in compressor suction and liquid lines. 9. Low-ambient kit high-pressure sensor. 10. Variable capacity compressor for stage 1 cooling (DOAS only).

2.6 AIR FILTRATION

A. Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2. 1. Pleated: Minimum MERV 8. 2. Depth: 2” pleated disposable.


2.7 GAS FURNACE

A. Description: Factory assembled, piped, and wired; complying with ANSI Z21.47 and NFPA 54.

B. Burners: Stainless steel (DOAS) or aluminized steel.

1. Fuel: Natural gas. 2. Ignition: Electronically controlled electric spark or hot-surface igniter with flame sensor.

C. Heat-Exchanger and Drain Pan: Aluminized or stainless steel.

D. Power Vent: Integral, motorized centrifugal fan interlocked with gas valve.

E. Safety Controls:

1. Gas Control Valve: Two stage. 2. Gas Train: Single-body, regulated, redundant, 24-V ac gas valve assembly containing

pilot solenoid valve, pilot filter, pressure regulator, pilot shutoff, and manual shutoff.

2.8 DAMPERS

A. Outdoor Air Dampers: Low leakage parallel- or opposed-blade galvanized-steel dampers mechanically fastened to cadmium plated or galvanized-steel operating rod in reinforced cabinet.

2.9 ELECTRICAL POWER CONNECTION

A. Provide for single connection of power to unit with unit-mounted disconnect switch accessible from outside unit and control-circuit transformer with built-in overcurrent protection.

1. Provide through the base connection. 2. Provide unit mounted disconnect.

2.10 CONTROLS

A. See Section 23 0900.

2.11 ACCESSORIES

A. Hail guards of galvanized steel, painted to match casing.

B. Roof Curb: Full perimeter sheet metal curb with wood nailer; neoprene sealing strips, and internal insulation. Slope to match roof.

C. Enthalpy economizer controller, sensors, dampers, and actuators (except for DOAS).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of RTUs.

B. Examine roughing-in for RTUs to verify actual locations of piping and duct connections before equipment installation.

C. Examine roofs for suitable conditions where RTUs will be installed.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Roof Curb: Install curb level and secure, according to NRCA's "Low-Slope Membrane Roofing Construction Details Manual," Illustration "Raised Curb Detail for Rooftop Air Handling Units and Ducts." Install RTUs on curbs and coordinate roof penetrations and flashing with roof construction specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories." Secure RTUs to upper curb rail, and secure curb base to roof framing or concrete base with anchor bolts.

B. Unit Support: Install unit level on structural curbs. Coordinate wall penetrations and flashing with wall construction. Secure RTUs to structural support with anchor bolts.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Install condensate drain, minimum connection size, with trap and indirect connection to nearest roof drain.

B. Install piping adjacent to RTUs to allow service and maintenance.

1. Gas Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 22. Connect gas piping to burner, full size of gas train inlet, and connect with union and shutoff valve with sufficient clearance for burner removal and service.

C. Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection requirements:

1. Install ducts to termination at top of roof curb. 2. Remove roof decking only as required for passage of ducts. Do not cut out decking

under entire roof curb. 3. Connect supply ducts to RTUs with flexible duct connectors specified in Division 23

Section "Air Duct Accessories."


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing.

B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. Report results in writing.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing RTUs and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units for compliance with requirements.

2. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper motor rotation and unit operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls

and equipment.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

3.5 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.


B. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and do the following:

1. Inspect for visible damage to unit casing. 2. Inspect for visible damage to furnace combustion chamber. 3. Inspect for visible damage to compressor, coils, and fans. 4. Inspect internal insulation. 5. Verify that labels are clearly visible. 6. Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing. 7. Verify that controls are connected and operable. 8. Verify that filters are installed. 9. Clean condenser coil and inspect for construction debris. 10. Clean furnace flue and inspect for construction debris. 11. Connect and purge gas line. 12. Remove packing from vibration isolators. 13. Inspect operation of barometric relief dampers. 14. Verify lubrication on fan and motor bearings. 15. Inspect fan-wheel rotation for movement in correct direction without vibration and binding. 16. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension. 17. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions.

a. Start refrigeration system. b. Do not operate below recommended low-ambient temperature. c. Complete startup sheets and attach copy with Contractor's startup report.

18. Inspect and record performance of interlocks and protective devices; verify sequences. 19. Operate unit for an initial period as recommended or required by manufacturer. 20. Perform the following operations for both minimum and maximum firing. Adjust burner for

peak efficiency. a. Measure gas pressure on manifold. b. Inspect operation of power vents. c. Measure combustion-air temperature at inlet to combustion chamber. d. Measure flue-gas temperature at furnace discharge.

21. Adjust and inspect high-temperature limits. 22. Inspect outdoor-air dampers for proper stroke and interlock with return-air dampers. 23. After startup and performance testing and prior to Substantial Completion, replace

existing filters with new filters.

3.6 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing RTU and air-distribution systems, clean filter housings and install new filters.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain rooftop air handling units.

B. Provide morning and evening training sessions. END 23 74 13

BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 26 05 19-1

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 05 19 - BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Building wire and cable. B. Wiring connectors and connections.

1.2 REFERENCES A. NECA Standard of Installation (National Electrical Contractors Association). B. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and

Systems (International Electrical Testing Association). C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Division 01 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide for each cable type.

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Division 01 – Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Test Reports: Indicate procedures and values obtained. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use

stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements.

1.5 SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Division 01 – Project Record Documents. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and circuits.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with

minimum three years documented experience.

1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to NFPA 70. B. Furnish building wire and wiring connectors listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.,

as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Conductor sizes are based on copper. C. Wire and cable routing indicated is schematic unless dimensioned.


1.9 COORDINATION

A. Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing

and lengths required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BUILDING WIRE

A. Description: Single conductor insulated wire. B. Conductor: Copper. C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts. D. Insulation: NFPA 70, Type THHN-2/THWN-2. E. Use standard color coding for phase A, phase B, phase C, neutral and ground: Insulation: 1. 208/120 volt circuits: black, red, blue, white, green.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather. B. Verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed. C. Verify that raceway installation is complete and supported.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire.

3.3 WIRING METHODS A. Use wiring methods indicated. B. All branch circuit and feeder wiring shall be installed in raceways.

3.4 INSTALLATION A. Route wire and cable as required to meet Project Conditions. B. Install cable in accordance with the NECA "Standard of Installation” and NFPA 70. C. Use stranded conductors for power circuits. D. Use stranded conductors for control circuits. E. Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits. F. Use conductor not smaller than 14 AWG for fused control circuits. G. Unless a larger size is indicated on plans, use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt

branch circuits with homeruns longer than 75 feet.


H. Use solid copper for conductors #12 and smaller. Use stranded for conductors #10 and larger. I. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time. J. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG and larger. K. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards. L. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors. M. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible

temperature rise. N. Use split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. Tape

uninsulated conductors and connector with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor.

O. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices and taps,

8 AWG and smaller. P. Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, 10

AWG and smaller. Q. Identify and color code wire and cable under provisions of Section 16195. Identify each conductor

with its circuit number or other designation indicated.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.1.

3.6 INSULATION RESISTANCE TESTS A. Perform tests after cables have been installed in raceways, but before connection to lugs. Notify

Contracting Officer at least 14 days prior to cable tests. B. Measure resistance line-to-ground using a commercial meggar tester. Apply 1000 volts DC to

cables 2 AWG and larger and record DC insulation resistance for each circuit conductor. Minimum acceptable level is 50 megohms.

C. Record test results and include in O and M manual.

END 26 05 19

MANUFACTURED WIRING SYSTEMS 26 05 20-1

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 05 20 - MANUFACTURED WIRING SYSTEMS


A. Prefabricated flexible cable assemblies. B. Distribution units. C. Cable accessories.

1.2 REFERENCES A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 01 – Submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate distribution box, switch box, outlet, and cable layout and branch circuit

configuration. C. Product Data: Provide for each cable type and for each fitting and accessory. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by

Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product.

E. Provide voltage drop calculation showing wire size that will support use per NEC guidelines.

1.4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Division 01 – Project Record and Closeout Documents. B. Record actual locations of cable assemblies and branch circuit arrangements.

1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Submit under provisions of Division 01 – Project Record and Closeout Documents. B. Maintenance Data: Include replacement parts list.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this Section with

minimum three year experience.

1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose

specified and shown. 1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.

MANUFACTURED WIRING SYSTEMS 26 05 20-2

1.9 COORDINATION A. Furnish luminaire connectors to luminaire manufacturer for factory installation.


A. AMP Inc. B. Hubbell Wiring Devices C. Siemens Co. D. Light Fixture Manufacturer.

2.2 MANUFACTURED WIRING SYSTEMS A. Cable Assemblies: Factory assembled units with appropriate connector on each end, with lengths

and circuit configurations as required. B. Voltage: 120 volts. C. Switching Unit Assemblies: Cable assembly with 6 inch pigtail on one end. Provide cables

configured for 3-way and 4-way switches where required. D. Luminaire Connector Assemblies: Connector suitable for mounting in luminaire body knockout.

At Contractor’s option, provide connector factory mounted in luminaire. E. Accessories: Provide manufacturer's standard accessories, including cable extenders,

distribution tees, and switching assemblies. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Support cable by means of straps and clamps independently of ceiling suspension system. C. Support cable minimum 24” above suspended ceiling to avoid contact with and interference with

removal of ceiling panels. D. Arrange cable to avoid interference with access to other work.

END 26 05 20

GROUNDING AND BONDING 26 05 26-1

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING AND BONDING


A. Grounding electrodes and conductors. B. Equipment grounding conductors. C. Bonding.

1.2 REFERENCES A. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and

Systems (International Electrical Testing Association). B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.3 GROUNDING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Metal underground water pipe. B. Effectively grounded metal frame of the building. C. Rod electrode. D. Concrete encased electrode.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Grounding System Resistance: 5 ohms maximum.

1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Division 01 – Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide for grounding electrodes and connections.

1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Division 01 - Submittals: Submittals for information. B. Test Reports: Indicate overall resistance to ground. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by


1.7 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT

A. Division 01 – Project Record and Closeout Documents: Procedures for submittals. B. Record actual locations of components and grounding electrodes.

1.8 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with




A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ROD ELECTRODES

A. Material: Copper-clad steel. B. Diameter: 3/4 inch. C. Length: 10 feet.

2.2 MECHANICAL CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: Burndy or approved equal. B. Material: Bronze.

2.3 EXOTHERMIC CONNECTIONS A. Manufacturers: Cadweld or approved equal.

2.4 WIRE A. Material: Stranded copper. Unless noted otherwise, provide with green insulation. B. Size: As required by NEC.

2.5 GROUND BUSHING/LUG

A. Insulated metallic grounding bushings, tin-plated open-type lug dual rated for CU-AL conductors, thermoplastic liners rated 105 degrees C, die cast zinc, to provide a smooth, well-rounded bearing surface for wires or cable at the end of threaded conduit or a conduit connector as required by the NEC.

2.6 ISOLATED GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

A. Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor at both ends of conductors and at any boxes or splice locations with alternating bands of green and yellow tape. Provide at least three bands of green and two bands of yellow tape.


A. Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install rod electrodes at exterior of building near service equipment. Install additional rod

electrodes as required to achieve specified resistance to ground.


B. Provide 3/0 AWG bare copper grounding electrode conductor and connect to reinforcing steel in foundation footing. Bond steel together using tie wires so there is a minimum of 40 feet of continuous bar to which to bond grounding electrode conductor.

C. Provide 3/0 AWG bare copper grounding electrode conductor and connect to metal cold water

pipe. Metal cold water pipe must be in continuous direct contact with the earth a minimum of 10 feet. Make connection a maximum of 5 feet from the point of entrance to the building.

D. Provide bonding to meet Regulatory Requirements. E. In addition to bonded equipment grounding conductors, provide isolated grounding conductors for

circuits shown on plans. Conductors shall be 12 AWG unless noted otherwise and one per circuit. F. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide separate, insulated conductor within each feeder and

branch circuit raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing. G. Where multiple ground terminal strips are provided with new panels, run solid bare #8AWG

between all ground terminal strips.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.13.

C. Maximum acceptable resistance to ground shall be 5 ohms.

END 26 05 26

SUPPORTING DEVICES 26 05 29-1

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 05 29 - SUPPORTING DEVICES


A. Conduit and equipment supports. B. Anchors and fasteners.

1.2 REFERENCES A. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association. B. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 01 – Submittals. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog data for fastening systems. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by

Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product.


A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. Materials and Finishes: Provide adequate corrosion resistance. B. Provide materials, sizes, and types of anchors, fasteners and supports to carry the loads of

equipment and conduit. Consider weight of wire in conduit when selecting products. C. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Concrete Structural Elements: Use precast insert system or expansion anchors and

preset inserts. 2. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps or welded fasteners. 3. Concrete Surfaces: Use self-drilling anchors and expansion anchors. 4. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts and hollow wall

fasteners. 5. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors and preset inserts. 6. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws. 7. Wood Elements: Use wood screws.

2.2 STEEL CHANNEL A. Manufacturer: Unistrut (P1000 unless otherwise noted) or approved equal. B. Description: Galvanized or painted steel. (1-5/8” square.)

SUPPORTING DEVICES 26 05 29-2

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation",

NFPA 70 and maximum distance between conduit support tables. C. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, ceiling support wires, and conduit. D. Do not use spring steel clips and clamps. E. Do not use powder-actuated anchors. F. Do not drill or cut structural members. G. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel. Rigidly weld members or use hexagon

head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts.

H. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. I. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards one inch

off wall. J. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in

hollow partitions.

END 26 05 29

CONDUIT 26 05 33-1

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 05 33 - CONDUIT


A. Metal conduit. B. Flexible metal conduit. C. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. D. Electrical metallic tubing. E. Nonmetallic conduit. F. Fittings and conduit bodies.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section Division 01 – Roofing Penetrations. B. Section Division 01 – Firestopping.

C. Section 26 05 34 – Boxes.

D. Section 26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding.

E. Section 26 05 29 – Supporting Devices.

F. Section 26 05 53 – Electrical Identification.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Conduit and tubing shall meet the requirements of the latest editions of following standards: 1. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated. 2. ANSI C80.3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated. 3. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable

Assemblies. 4. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 5. NECA "Standard of Installation." 6. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit

and Intermediate Metal Conduit. 7. NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.

1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Conduit Size: ANSI/NFPA 70. Limit conductor cross sectional area to no more than 40% of

conduit cross sectional area.

1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 01 – Submittals. B. Product Data: Provide for metallic conduit, flexible metal conduit, liquid tight flexible metal

conduit, metallic tubing, nonmetallic conduit, fittings, conduit bodies.

CONDUIT 26 05 33-2

1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Division 01 – Project Record Documents. B. Accurately record actual routing of interior conduits larger than 2 inches on project record

documents and of all underground conduits regardless of size. For locations of underground conduits provide dimensions indicating locations and depth.


A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose

specified and shown.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage. B. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide

appropriate covering. C. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight.

1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings. B. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough-in. C. Conduit routing is shown schematically on Drawings unless dimensioned. Route as required to

complete wiring system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS

A. Minimum Size: ¾” inch unless otherwise specified. B. Underground Installations: 1. More than Five Feet outside Foundation Wall: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal

conduit, plastic coated rigid steel conduit or thickwall nonmetallic (Schedule 40 PVC) conduit.

2. Within Five Feet Inside Foundation Wall: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit, plastic coated rigid steel conduit or thickwall nonmetallic (Schedule 40 PVC) conduit.

3. Under Slab on Grade: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit, plastic coated rigid steel conduit or thickwall nonmetallic (Schedule 40 PVC) conduit.

C. Outdoor Locations, Above Grade: Use rigid steel or intermediate metal conduit. D. Wet and Damp Interior Locations Above Floor Slab: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal

conduit or electrical metallic tubing. Use wet and/or damp location fittings. E. Dry Interior Locations Above Floor Slab (Including Hollow Stud Partitions): 1. Concealed: Use rigid steel, intermediate metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing. 2. Exposed: Use rigid steel, intermediate metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing.

CONDUIT 26 05 33-3

2.2 METAL CONDUIT A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid steel. C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; material to match conduit, threaded connections.

2.3 PVC COATED METAL CONDUIT A. Description: NEMA RN 1; rigid steel conduit with external PVC coating, 40 mil thick. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; steel fittings with external PVC coating to match

conduit. 2.4 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT

A. Description: Interlocked steel construction. B. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1.

2.5 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket. B. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1.

2.6 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) A. Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; steel compression type or set screw type.

2.7 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT A. Description: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3.


A. Install conduit in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation” and NFPA 70. B. Install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70. C. Provide supports as required by NEC maximum distance between conduit support tables. Arrange

supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation. D. Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis

hangers, and split hangers. Where possible, support conduits in ceiling cavity space at the level of structural roof joists.

E. Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel; provide

space on each rack for 25 percent additional conduits. F. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of Section 16190.

DO NOT SUPPORT CONDUITS DIRECTLY FROM ROOF DECK.

CONDUIT 26 05 33-4

G. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary

supports. H. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires. Fasten individual conduits to roof joists. I. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance. J. Route exposed conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls. K. Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls. L. Route conduit under slab directly from point-to-point where possible. Avoid conduit crossovers

where possible. M. Do not install conduit in floor slab on grade or floor slab above grade. Run conduits 1-1/2” and

below on grade at bottom of gravel sub-base. Conduits larger than 1-1/2” shall be trenched in below grade so top of conduit is at top of grade.

N. Maintain minimum 6-inch clearance between conduit and piping. O. Maintain 12 inch clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104

degrees F. P. Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut ends before joining. Q. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely. R. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic

conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for 10 minutes, minimum. Use only an approved hotbox bender to make bends in nonmetallic conduit.

S. Use conduit hubs or sealing locknuts to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and wet

locations and to cast boxes. T. Install no more than equivalent of three 90-degree bends between boxes (no more than two 90-

degree bends for conduits containing telephone cables, fire alarm cables, intrusion system cables, local area network (LAN) cables, etc.). Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use hydraulic one-shot bender to fabricate factory elbows for bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch size.

U. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system. V. Provide expansion/deflection couplings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit

crosses seismic joints or expansion joints. Such couplings shall have braided copper bonding jumpers.

W. Provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves less than 20 feet long and

nipples. X. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. Y. Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Section 26 05 26. Z. Identify conduit under provisions of Section 26 05 53. AA. Where conduits for telephone cables, cash register cables, etc. are stubbed from wall boxes or

cabinets to above accessible ceilings, turn conduits out of wall approximately 12 inches above accessible ceiling. Coordinate location with other trades. Provide bushing on end of conduit to

CONDUIT 26 05 33-5

prevent signal cable contact with sharp metal. Provide tag on end of conduit indicating type and location of utilization outlet (example: TELEPHONE - BREAK ROOM).

BB. In interior locations, turn nonmetallic conduits through floor slab using rigid steel elbows.

Continue raceway above floor slab using metallic conduit. CC. Where conduits turn up into switchboard, padmount transformer or large utilization equipment,

provide grounding bushings on ends of conduits, and bond to equipment grounding terminal strip or lugs using bonding jumper sized according to NFPA 70.

DD. Where conduits enter boxes and cabinets, provide bushings with plastic insulated throat for

conduits 1 inch and larger. EE. Seismic Bracing: provide seismic bracing for suspended conduits 2” or larger and trapeze

hangers at interval of 20 feet or less. Bracing shall consists of 1-5/8" square channel both parallel and perpendicular to conduit, and fastened to roof joist at 45 degree angle relative to vertical.

FF. AC and MC cable shall not be acceptable for use on this project. Except as specified in Section 26

05 20.

GG. Paint exposed conduit to match adjacent surface.

3.2 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials

and methods under the provisions of Division 01. B. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack with

pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation.

END 26 05 33

BOXES 26 05 34-1

DIVISIION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 05 34 - Boxes


A. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes. B. Pull and junction boxes.

1.2 REFERENCES A. NECA - Standard of Installation. B. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. C. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports. D. NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports. C. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals under provisions of Division 01 – Submittals. B. Product Data: Provide dimensions, materials, and accessories.


A. Division 01 – Project Record and Closeout Documents. B. Record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull, and junction boxes on project record

documents.

1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Provide Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the

purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OUTLET BOXES

A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. 1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported;

include male fixture studs where required. 2. Concrete Ceiling Boxes: Concrete type. B. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, cast feralloy. Provide gasketed cover by box manufacturer.

Provide threaded hubs. C. Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section 16141.

BOXES 26 05 34-2

D. Weatherproof exterior boxes to house receptacles: Receptacle shall be installed flush with wall. The cast aluminum receptacle cover shall have ports to allow two 3/8” diameter cords to pass through and must not protrude over 4-½” from wall surface. Enclosure must have gasket between enclosure and mounting surface to assure that the enclosure is weathertight in use per NEC 410-57b. Hubbell #WP700 or equal.

2.2 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES

A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. B. Hinged Enclosures: As specified in Section 16160. C. Surface Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 6; flat-flanged, surface mounted junction box: 1. Material: Galvanized cast iron. 2. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws. D. In-Ground Box: NEMA 250, Type 6, inside flanged, recessed cover box for flush mounting: 1. Material: Polymer concrete. 2. Cover: Nonskid cover with neoprene gasket and stainless steel cover screws. 3. Cover Legend: "ELECTRIC" or “TELEPHONE” as appropriate.


A. Install boxes in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." D. Install in locations as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling,

equipment connections and compliance with regulatory requirements. E. Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights indicated. F. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Adjust

box location up to 10 feet if required to accommodate intended purpose. G. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices as specified in Section 26 27 26. H. Maintain headroom and present neat mechanical appearance. I. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only. J. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from ceiling

access panel or from removable recessed luminaire. K. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements. L. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and

backsplashes. M. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan. N. Unless otherwise indicated on plans, align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches,

manual starters, interval timers, thermostats, and similar devices. Align wall mounted boxes for receptacles, telephone jacks, local area network outlets, and the like. Where such devices are shown in close proximity on plans, locate adjacent outlets with no more than 4 inch space between adjacent boxes.

O. Use flush mounting outlet boxes in all areas except mechanical rooms and electrical closets.

BOXES 26 05 34-3

P. Unless otherwise indicated on plans, locate flush mounting boxes in masonry wall to require

cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening. Q. Do not install flush mounting boxes back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches separation. R. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for

surface finish thickness. After finished wall material is applied, provide box extensions for all boxes with setback more than 1/8 inch.

S. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs. T. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness. U. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box. V. DO NOT FASTEN BOXES TO CEILING SUPPORT WIRES OR DIRECTLY TO ROOF DECK. W. Support boxes independently of conduit. X. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box. Y. Use 4” square box with plaster ring for single device outlets. Z. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather and wet locations. Provide vapor

seals at conduit entrances to these boxes. Use U.L. listed sealing compound. AA. Large Pull Boxes: Use hinged enclosure in interior dry locations, surface-mounted cast metal box

in other locations. Z. Provide pull boxes in feeder circuits as required but at least every 150 feet in straight runs. AA. Identify all junction boxes by panel and circuit number on outside cover with legible permanent ink

marker on outside face of cover.

3.2 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Coordinate installation of outlet box for equipment connected to allow accessibility of box and

proper operation of equipment.

3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material. B. Install knockout closures in unused box openings.

3.4 CLEANING A. Division 01 – Cleaning: Clean installed work. B. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material. C. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish. D. Check boxes for the presence of drywall screws, concrete residue, and other sharp objects.

Remove all sharp objects.

END 26 05 34

CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES 26 05 35-1

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 05 35 - CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES


A. Hinged cover enclosures. B. Cabinets. C. Terminal blocks. D. Accessories.

1.2 REFERENCES A. NECA Standard of Installation (National Electrical Contractors Association). B. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). C. NEMA ICS 4 - Terminal Blocks for Industrial Control Equipment and Systems. D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Division 01 – Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard data for enclosures and cabinets.

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Division 01 – Submittals: Submittals for information. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by



A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Division 01 – Project Record and Closeout Documents.. B. Furnish two of each key. Cabinets and enclosures shall be keyed to same key as panel boards.


A. Hoffman B. Square D

CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES 26 05 35-2

C. General Electric

2.2 HINGED COVER ENCLOSURES A. Construction: NEMA 250, Type 1 inside, or 3R where exposed to weather or moisture, steel

enclosure. B. Covers: Continuous hinge, held closed by flush latch operable by key. Covers in damp and wet

locations shall have continuous gasket. C. Provide removable interior metal panel for mounting terminal blocks and electrical components;

finish with white enamel. Provide standoff devices for separation of equipment mounting panel from enclosure.

D. Enclosure Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel.

2.3 CABINETS A. Boxes: Galvanized steel. B. Backboard: Provide white enamel finished metal backboard for mounting terminal blocks or other

devices. C. Fronts: Steel, Flush type with door with concealed hinge, and flush lock keyed to match branch

circuit panelboard. Finish with gray baked enamel. D. Provide metal barriers to form separate compartments wiring of different systems and voltages. E. Provide accessory feet for free-standing equipment.


A. Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation” and NFPA 70. B. Install enclosures and boxes plumb. Anchor securely to wall and structural supports at each

corner under the provisions of Section 26 05 29. C. Install cabinet fronts plumb.

3.2 CLEANING A. Division 01 – Cleaning: Clean installed work. B. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and harmful materials. C. Remove dirt and debris from enclosure. D. Clean finishes and touch up damage.

END 26 05 35

DUCT BANK 26 05 43-1

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 05 43 - DUCT BANK


A. Metal conduit.

B. Duct. C. Precast concrete handholes.


A. Division 31 - Excavation.

B. Division 31 - Backfilling.

C. Division 03 - Concrete Formwork.

D. Division 03 - Concrete Reinforcement.

E. Division 03 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.

F. Division 22 - Plumbing. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc-Coated.

B. ASTM A48 - Gray Iron Castings.

C. ASTM C857 - Minimum Structural Design Loading for Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures.

D ASTM C858 - Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures.

E. ASTM C891 - Installation of Underground Precast Utility Structures. F. ASTM C1037 - Inspection of Underground Precast Utility Structures.

G. IEEE C2 - National Electrical Safety Code.

H. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies.

I. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and EPC-80).

J. NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.

K. NEMA TC 6 - PVC and ABS Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installation.

L. NEMA TC 9 - Fittings for ABS and PVC Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installation.

M. NEMA TC 10 - PVC and ABS Plastic Communications Duct and Fittings for Underground

Installation.

N. NEMA TC 14 - Filament-Wound Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit and Fittings.

O. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.


P. UL 651A - Type EB and A PVC Conduit and HDPE Conduit.

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

A. Division 01 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals.

B. Product Data: Provide for metallic conduit, nonmetallic conduit, and warning tape.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, reinforcement, size and locations of opening and accessory locations for precast manholes and handholes.

1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION

A. Division 01 - Submittals: Submittals for information.

B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product.


A. Division 01 - Project Closeout.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing and elevations of underground conduit and duct. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.


A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and IEEE C2.

B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

B. Verify routing and termination locations of duct bank prior to excavation for rough-in.

C. Duct bank routing is shown in approximate locations unless dimensions are indicated. Route as required to complete duct system.

D. Verify locations of handholes prior to excavating for installation.

E. Handhole locations are shown in approximate locations unless dimensions are indicated. Locate as

required to complete ductbank system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RIGID STEEL CONDUIT

A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.

B. Fittings: NEMA FB 1, steel.


2.2 PLASTIC CONDUIT

A. Rigid Plastic Conduit: NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 PVC, with fittings and conduit bodies to NEMA TC 3.

2.3 PLASTIC DUCT

A. Plastic Utilities Duct: NEMA TC 6; PVC.

B. Plastic Utility Duct Fittings: NEMA TC 9.

C. Plastic Communications Duct and Fittings: NEMA TC 6; PVC. 2.4 POLYMER CONCRETE HANDHOLE

A. 17” x 30” open bottom with 12” gravel base. Hubbell #PT1730BA18 or equal. B. 8000LB cover with two hex head bolts. Provide “Communication” label as required.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Underground Warning Tape: 4 inch wide plastic tape, detectable type, colored as noted below and suitable warning legend describing buried utility lines per A.P.W.A.

1. Red – Caution Buried Electric Line Below. 2. Purple – Caution Buried Reclaimed Water Line Below. 3. Orange – Caution Buried Telephone Line Below.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DUCT BANK INSTALLATION

A. Install all duct to locate top of ductbank minimum 36 inches below finished grade.

B. Install duct with minimum slope of 4 inches per 100 feet (0.33 percent). Slope duct away from building entrances.

C. Cut duct square using saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut ends.

D. Insert duct to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.

E. Join nonmetallic duct using adhesive as recommended by manufacturer.

F. Wipe nonmetallic duct dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of adhesive to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes, minimum.

G. Install no more than equivalent of two 90-degree bends between pull points.

H. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where required.

I. Stagger duct joints vertically in concrete encasement 6 inches minimum.

J. Use suitable separators and chairs installed not greater than 4 feet on centers.

K. Band ducts together before backfilling or placing concrete.

L. Securely anchor duct to prevent movement during concrete placement.

M. Place concrete under provisions of Division 03. Use mineral pigment to color concrete red for power. Orange for communications.


N. Provide minimum 3-inch concrete cover at bottom, top, and sides of secondary ductbank.

O. Provide suitable nylon pull string in each empty duct except sleeves and nipples.

P. Swab duct. Use suitable caps to protect installed duct against entrance of dirt and moisture.

Q. Backfill trenches under provisions of Division 31.

R. Interface installation of underground warning tape with backfilling specified in Division 31. Install tape 6 inches below finished surface.

S. Terminate duct at manhole entries using bell end.

T. Provide reinforcing per raceway details.

U. Connect to manhole wall using dowels.

V. Connect to existing concrete encasements using dowels.

W. Accomplished changes in direction of runs exceeding a total of 10 degrees, either vertically or horizontally, by long sweeping bends having a minimum radius of 7.62 m (25ft.). Long sweeps may be made up of one or more curved or straight sections and/or combinations thereof. Bends made manually will not reduce the internal diameter of the conduit. There will be no more than the equivalent of two 90 degree bend (180) degrees total between pull points, including offset and kicks with a curvature radius of less than 30 m (100 ft.). Back-to back 90 degree bends will be avoided.

X. Where the radius is less than 12m (40ft.), 4.6m (15ft.) radius-manufactured bends must be used. If possible, the entire change in direction should be made with a single arc of 4.6m (15ft.) radius. Manufactured bends may be used on subsidiary/lateral conduits at the riser pole or building entrance. Manufactured bend will have a minimum radius of 10 times the internal diameter of the conduit in accordance with NEC Chapter 9 and ANSI/TIA/SIA-758.

Y. Bends and sweeps will be concrete-encased to protect the duct from the pressures developed while pulling cables. Where a duct enters a building and sweeps up through a floor slab, galvanized RSC will be used. For ducts transitioning from the lower duct window of a maintenance hole to the nominal trench depth, the transition will be accomplished in no less than 9.1m (30 linear ft) from the maintenance hole in order to reduce the radius of the bends. The duct should be concrete-encased in the transition area.

3.2 PRE-CAST HANDHOLE INSTALLATION

A. Division 01: Manufacturer’s instructions. B. Excavate for handhole installation under the provisions of Division 31.

C. Install and seal in accordance with ASTM C891.

D. Install handholes plumb.

E. Coordinate with final grading to bring handhole cover to finished elevation.

F. Backfill handhole excavation under the provisions of Division 31.

END 26 05 43

ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 05 53-1

DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL Section 26 05 53 – Electrical Identification


A. Nameplates. B. Wire and cable markers. C. Conduit markers.

1.2 REFERENCES A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 01 – Submittals. B. Product Data: Provide catalog data for nameplates, labels, and markers. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by

Product testing agency specified under regulatory requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation and installation of Product.


A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose

specified and shown. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NAMEPLATES

A. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, white letters on black background. Screw

on type with two self tapping screws. Mastic type nameplates not allowed. B. Locations: 1. Main disconnect switch. 2. Each lighting and appliance panelboard. 3. Each breaker in Switchboard. 4. Each safety switch. 5. Each automatic motor starter. 6. Relays and contactors. Indicate loads controlled. 7. Time switches. Indicate load controlled. 8. Fire alarm and mass notification equipment cabinets. Label to match plans. 9. Where more than two switches are located adjacent to each other or where switches

control loads not in same space. 10. Where noted on plans. C. Letter Size: 1. Use 1/8 inch letters for identifying individual equipment and loads such as safety switches,

motor starters, and relays.


2. Use 1/4 inch letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads such as panelboards, switchboards, and motor control centers.

2.2 WIRE MARKERS

A. Description: Cloth, tape, split sleeve, or tubing type wire markers. B. Locations: Each conductor at distribution equipment panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet and

junction boxes, and each load connection. C. Legend: 1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder circuit number. 2. Control Circuits: Control wire number corresponding to applicable control schematics.

2.3 CONDUIT MARKERS A. Location: Conduit couplings and junction box covers shall be painted to indicate system that

conduit serves. B. Color: 1. 208 Volt System: Natural conduit. 2. Fire Alarm System: Red. 3. Comm/Data: Blue

2.4 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE

A. Description: 6 inch wide plastic tape, detectable type, A.P.W.A. colored tape with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines. Detection shall be by means of continuous integral metal conductor factory installed in warning tape. 1. Red – “Caution Buried Electric Line Below.” 2. Orange – “Caution Buried Telephone Line Below.”

B. Provide ½” black on clear adhesive label tape on each device coverplate centered between top of

the coverplate and the device indicating panel and branch circuit number. This label will be in addition to any labeling required to indicate loads controlled when multiple light switches are grouped together.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates.

3.2 APPLICATION A. Install nameplate parallel to equipment lines. B. Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws. C. Identify conduit using field painting under provisions of Section 09910. D. Field paint colored couplings on each conduit longer than 6 feet and conduit stubs. E. Color: 1. 208 Volt System: Natural conduit.


2. Fire Alarm System: Red. 3. Comm/Data: Blue F. Identify underground conduits using underground warning tape. Install one tape per trench at 12

inches above conduits or duct bank.

END 26 05 53

ELECTRIC CONTROLS 26 09 23-1

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 09 23 - ELECTRIC CONTROLS


A. Time switches. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 26 05 35 - Enclosures: Cabinets and terminal blocks.

B. Section 26 09 24 - Enclosed Contactors. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. NEMA ICS 1 - General Standards for Industrial Control Systems.

B. NEMA ICS 2 - Standards for Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies.

C. NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems.

D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Division 01.

B. Product Data: Provide for each component showing electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS



A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Furnish Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TIME SWITCHES

A. Time switches shall be programmable, astronomic, seven day plus 365 day solid state electronic type, capable of independent programming of two (2) independent channels, with programmable automatic daylight savings time adjustment, and shall be housed in a lockable, non-metallic, surface mount case.

B. Switches shall be capable of fully independent 7 day scheduling, with minimum of 3 ON and 3 Off times per

channel per day, plus a special 365 holiday schedule, assigned by month and day.

ELECTRIC CONTROLS 26 09 23-2

C. They shall be capable of independent duty cycling during the scheduled ON time, with up to 3 patterns per channel per day and built-in 5 minute short cycle protection.

D. They shall have independent timed override for each channel for manual control and be programmable

independently per channel per day, from 1 minute to 23 hours and 59 minutes.

E. Switches shall have brown-out protection and automatic 4 second load staggering when channels are programmed to be ON at the same time or after power outages and shall be equipped with a rechargeable carry-over system for up to 14 hours of carry-over. Switches shall perform a self-test every 60 seconds to assure a fail-safe operation.

F. Time switches shall be powered by a 120VAC, 60HZ source. Contact configuration to be N.O. (N.C.) For

each channel, with a rating of 15 amperes ballast, 120/240/277VAC. Contact closure on time switch shall be momentary for pilot control of mechanically held contactors and relays.

G. Manufacturers for time switches:

1. Time Switch: Tork #DZM200BP-0 or equal with USB-MMP option and software.


A. Install equipment according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Train and lace wiring in cabinets.

C. Program time switches according to instructions from Contracting Officer.

D. Label each time switch with engraved nameplate.

E. Label each time switch load contact indicating contactors controlled by each load contact.

F. Provide two hours training of AAFES personnel in programming operations. G. Provide programming module and PC based software for programming of time switch. Turn module program

and software instructions over to AAFES at completion of project. Obtain hand receipt and include with O & M manuals.

END 26 09 23

ENCLOSED CONTACTORS 26 09 24-1

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 09 24 - ENCLOSED CONTACTORS


A. General purpose contactors and relays. B. Lighting contactors.

1.2 REFERENCES A. NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems. B. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies. C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Division 01 – Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide dimensions, size, voltage ratings and current ratings.


A. Division 01 - Submittals: Submittals for information. B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.

1.5 PROJECT CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Division 01 – Phase Turnover and Contract Closeout. B. Record actual locations of each contactor and indicate circuits controlled on project record

documents. C. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for replacing and maintaining coil and contacts.




purpose specified and indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL PURPOSE CONTACTORS

A. Manufacturers:


1. General Electric. 2. Siemens. 1. Square D. 4. ASCO. 5. Allen-Bradley. 6. Cutler Hammer. B. Description: NEMA ICS 2, AC general purpose magnetic contactor. C. Coil Voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hertz or as indicated. Separate latching and unlatching coils with coil

clearing contacts in series with each coil to ensure only momentary contact. D. Poles: As scheduled or indicated. E. Size: As scheduled or indicated. F. Enclosure: ANSI/NEMA ICS 6, Type as required to meet conditions of installation. G. Surface mount in janitor, mechanical and electrical spaces and above accessible ceilings. Surface

mount above panels where panel is surface mounted. Flush mount above flush mounted panel. H. Label per Section 16195.

2. 2 LIGHTING CONTACTORS A. Manufacturers: 1. General Electric. 2. Siemens. 3. Square D. 4. Asco. 5. Allen-Bradley. 6. Cutler Hammer. B. Description: NEMA ICS 2, magnetic lighting contactor. C. Configuration: Mechanically held, 3 wire control. D. Coils: 120 volts, 60 Hertz. Separate latching and unlatching coils with clearing contacts in series

with each coil to ensure only momentary energization of coils. E. Poles: As scheduled or indicated. F. Contact Rating: As scheduled or indicated. Match branch circuit overcurrent protection,

considering derating for continuous loads. G. Enclosure: ANSI/NEMA ICS 6, Type as required to meet conditions of installation. H. Accessories: 1. Auxiliary Contacts: Two field convertible. I. Label per Section 26 05 53.


A. Mount contactors true and plumb according to manufacturer’s written instructions.


B. Ensure proper operation by several open/close operations of the load contacts.

3.2 CLEANING

A. Division 01 – Cleaning: Cleaning installed work. B. Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish. C. Clean dust and debris from interior and exterior of contactors.

3.3 LABELLING

A. Provide engraved nameplate per 26 05 53. Nameplate shall indicate contactor designation and branch circuits controlled. Example: “CONTACTOR CA-1” on first line; “CKTS SL 1, 5, 9” on second line.

END 26 09 24

OCCUPANCY SENSORS 26 09 25-1

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 09 25 - OCCUPANCY SENSORS


A. Occupancy sensors for lighting control. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 26 05 19 - Building Wire and Cable.

B. Section 26 05 33 - Conduit.

C. Section 26 05 34 - Boxes. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. In accordance with Division 01 – Submittals, provide:

1. Product Data: Provide electrical ratings, adjustment ranges, enclosure type, outline dimensions, mounting dimensions, and terminal connection information.

2. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product.

3. CAD generated lighting plans for each building marked by occupancy sensor manufacturer showing proper product, location, and orientation of each sensor.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS



A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Provide Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose

specified and indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SENSORS

A. Ceiling mounted dual technology sensors shall employ both passive infrared and ultrasonic detection methods. Sensors shall have a multiple segmented lens and provide coverage for up to a 40' x 40' room.

B. Wall mounted combination dual technology sensor with integral light switch shall employ both passive

infrared and ultrasonic detection methods. Sensors shall have a multi-segmented lens and provide coverage for the room they serve.

C. All sensors shall be capable of operating normally with any electronic ballasts and compact fluorescent

lamp systems.

OCCUPANCY SENSORS 26 09 25-2

D. Coverage of sensors shall remain constant after sensitivity control has been set. No automatic reduction shall occur in coverage due to the cycling of air conditioner or heating fans.

E. All sensors shall have readily accessible, user adjustable controls for time delay (0 - 15 minutes) and

sensitivity.

F. In the event of failure, a bypass manual “override on” shall be provided on each sensor. When bypass is utilized, control shall divert to a wall switch until sensor is replaced.

G. All sensors shall provide a method of indication to verify that motion is being detected during testing and

that the unit is working.

H. All sensors shall have no leakage current to load, in manual or in Auto/Off mode, for safety purposes and shall have voltage drop protection.

2.2 CIRCUIT CONTROL HARDWARE - CU

A. Control unit(s) shall mount through a 2" knock-out on a standard electrical enclosure and be an integrated, self-contained unit consisting internally of an isolated load switching control relay and a transformer to provide low-voltage power. Transformer shall provide power to a maximum of four (4) sensors and shall power to a larger number of sensors where indicated on plans.

B. Relay contacts shall have ratings of:

1. 20A - 120 VAC for non-linear loads. 2. Where noted on plans, provide relays with two (2) load contacts.

C. Control wiring between sensors and controls units shall be Class II, 18-24 AWG, stranded UL Classified,

jacketed cable. Cable shall be plenum rated. 2.3 MANUFACTURERS

A. Leviton.

B. Wattstopper. C. Hubble. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Locate and aim sensors in the correct location required for complete coverage. Rooms shall have ninety (90) to one hundred (100) percent coverage. The locations and quantities of sensors shown on the drawings are diagrammatic and indicate only the rooms which are to be provided with sensors. Provide additional sensors if required to properly and completely cover the respective room.

B. Meet with the manufacturer’s factory authorized representative, at the jobsite, to verify

placement of sensors and installation criteria prior to beginning work.

C. Locate sensors to ensure the best possible coverage in the available space and to overcome local difficulties due to space limitations or interference of structural components. Provide training necessary to familiarize Owner’s key personnel with the operation, use, adjustment, and problem solving diagnosis of the occupancy sensing devices and systems.

END 26 09 25

DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARD 26 24 13-1

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 24 13 - DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS


A. Pad mounted switchboards.

B. Switchboard accessories. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Division 03 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete for supporting foundations and pads.

B. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding.

C. Section 26 43 13 – Surge Protection Devices (TVSS).

1.3 REFERENCES

A. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers.

B. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum).

C. NEMA PB 2 - Dead Front Distribution Switchboards.

D. NEMA PB 2.1 - Instructions for Safe Handling, Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Deadfront Switchboards Rated 600 Volts or Less.

C. NEMA 260 - Safety Labels for Padmounted Switchgear and Transformers Sited in Public Areas.

D. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment (International

Electrical Testing Association).

E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

A. Division 01 – Submittals: Procedures for submittals.

B. Product Data: Provide electrical characteristics including voltage and ampere ratings, fault current withstand ratings, and time-current curves of all equipment and components.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate front and side views of enclosures with overall dimensions shown; conduit entrance

locations and requirements; nameplate legends; size and number of bus bars per phase, neutral, and ground; and switchboard instrument details.


A. Division 01 – Submittals: Submittals for information.

B. Test Reports: Indicate results of factory production tests.

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing

agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product.



A. Division 01 – Project Record and Closeout Documents: Submittals for project closeout.

B. Record actual locations of switchboard in project record documents.

C. Maintenance Data: Include spare parts listing; source and current prices of replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS




B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. Provide UL service equipment listing and labeling.


A. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.

B. Handle in accordance with NEMA PB 2.1 and manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided

for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to switchboard internal components, enclosure, and finish. 1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.11 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Division 01 – Project Record and Closeout Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. General Electric.

B. Siemens.

C. Square D. D. Cutler Hammer.

2.2 SWITCHBOARD

A. Description: NEMA PB 2 switchboard with electrical ratings and configurations as indicated and specified.

B. Ratings:

1. Voltage: 120/208 volts. 2. Configuration: Three phase, four wire, grounded. 3. Main Bus: As indicated on riser diagram. 4. Integrated Equipment Rating: 200,000 rms amperes symmetrical.

C. Main Section Devices: Circuit breaker type.


D. Distribution Section Devices: Individually mounted and compartmented.

E. Auxiliary Section Devices: Individually mounted and compartmented.

F. Bus Material: Copper, standard size.

G. Bus Connections: Bolted, accessible from front only for maintenance.

H. Fully insulate load side bus bars in rear accessible compartments. Do not reduce spacing of insulated bus.

I. Ground Bus: Shall extend the full length of the switchboard.

J. Line and Load Terminations: Accessible from the front only of the switchboard, suitable for the conductor

materials and sizes indicated.

K. Future Provisions: Fully equip spaces for future devices with bussing and bus connections, suitably insulated and braced for short circuit currents. Provide continuous current rating as indicated.

L. Enclosure: Type 1 - General Purpose.

1. Align sections at front and rear. 2. Switchboard Height: 90 inches, excluding floor sills, lifting members and pull boxes. 3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard light gray enamel over external surfaces. Coat internal surfaces with

minimum one coat corrosion-resisting paint or plate with cadmium or zinc. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

A. Provide concrete housekeeping pad under the provisions of Section 03300. Provide 6" high pad with 6" x 6" continuous wire mesh at vertical center of pad. Extend pad 6" beyond front and sides of switchboard. Provide 1 inch x 45 degree chamfer at front and side edges.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install switchboard in locations shown on Drawings, according to NEMA PB 2.1.

B. Tighten accessible bus connections and mechanical fasteners after placing switchboard.

C. Provide sheet metal barriers to seal any void around equipment if not tight to walls. Gauge and color to match equipment.

D. Provide and install arc flash warning signs per NEC 110.16.


A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.

B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.1. 3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Division 01 – Project Record and Closeout Documents: Adjusting installed work.

B. Adjust all operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement.

C. Tighten bolted bus connections in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.5 CLEANING


A. Division 01 – Cleaning: Cleaning installed work.

B. Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish.

C. Clean dust and debris from interior and exterior of switchboard.

END 26 24 13

PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-1

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 24 16 - PANELBOARDS


A. Branch circuit panelboards.


A. Section 26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding. B. Section 26 05 53 – Electrical Identification.

C. Section 26 43 13 – Surge Protective Devices (SPD).

1.3 REFERENCES

A. NECA Standard of Installation (published by the National Electrical Contractors Association). B. NEMA AB1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers. C. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies. D. NEMA KS1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum). E. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards. F. NEMA PB 1.1 - Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards

Rated 600 Volts or Less. G. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment

(published by the International Electrical Testing Association). H. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Division 01 – Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity,

integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker and fusible switch arrangement and sizes. C. Arrange circuit breakers in panels same as shown on plans.

1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Division 01 – Submittals: Submittals for information. B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of

use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product.


A. Division 01 – Project Record and Closeout Documents: Submittals for project closeout. B. Record actual locations of panelboards and record actual circuiting arrangements in project

record documents.


C. Maintenance Data: Include spare parts listing; source and current prices of replacement parts

and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.



1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose

specified and indicated.

1.9 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Division 01 – Project Record and Closeout Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS

A. Manufacturers: 1. General Electric. 2. Siemens. 3. Square D. 4. Cutler Hammer. B. Description: NEMA PB1, circuit breaker type, lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboard. C. Panelboard Bus: Copper, ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus in each panelboard;

provide insulated ground bus where scheduled. D. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 208 volt

panelboards. Provide higher ratings where indicated. Series rating not allowed. E. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, bolt-on type thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers,

with common trip handle for all poles, listed as Type SWD for lighting circuits, Type HACR for heating, air conditioning, or refrigeration equipment circuits, Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers where scheduled. Do not use tandem circuit breakers.

F. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1 for dry locations, type 3R for exterior locations. G. Cabinet Box: 6 inches deep, 20 inches wide. Where multiple section panel cabinets are specified,

all cabinets shall be of same dimensions. H. Cabinet Front: With concealed trim clamps, door in door type hinge, metal directory frame, and

flush lock all keyed alike. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel. I. Where multiple section panel cabinets are specified, all cabinets shall be of same dimensions.


A. Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1 and the NECA "Standard of Installation."


B. Install panelboards plumb. Install recessed panelboards flush with wall finishes. C. Height: 6 feet to top of panelboard; install panelboards taller than 6 feet with bottom no more than

4 inches above floor and with handle of top circuit breaker no more than 6'-6" above floor. D. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards. E. Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to reflect

circuiting changes required to balance phase loads. F. Provide screw-on type engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 26 05 53. G. Provide spare conduits out of each recessed panelboard to an accessible location above ceiling.

Stub spare conduits out of wall minimum 6" below roof joist in areas with exposed roof structure. See Riser Diagram. Identify each as SPARE.

H. Ground and bond panelboard enclosure according to Section 26 05 26.

I. Do not splice conductors in panelboard cabinets. J. Land only one conductor to each circuit breaker. Where multiple conductors are used, splice in

junction box before entering panelboard.

K. Where multiple ground terminal strips are provided with new panels, run solid, bare, #8AWG between all ground terminal strips.

L. Provide and install arc flash warning signs per NEC 110.16. M. Rigidly mount surface mounted panels to unistrut supports spanning a minimum of two studs.

Panel shall be supported at a minimum of two locations vertically. Provide similar installation at masonry construction. Toggle bolts shall not be used.


A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.4 for switches, Section 7.5 for circuit

breakers.

3.3 CLEANING A. Division 01 – Cleaning: Clean installed work. B. Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish. C. Clean dust and debris from interior and exterior of panelboards.

END 26 24 16

WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26-1

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICES


A. Wall switches. B. Receptacles. C. Device plates and decorative box covers.

1.2 REFERENCES A. NECA - Standard of Installation. B. NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices. C. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device -- Dimensional Requirements. D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Division 01- Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and

configurations.

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Division 01 - Submittals: Submittals for information. B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.




purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WALL SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell 2. Pass & Seymour 3. Leviton 4. G.E. B. Description: NEMA WD 1, Heavy-Duty, AC only general-use snap switch. Provide single pole,

double pole, three-way, four way, pilot light, or momentary contact type as indicated.


C. Body and Handle: Plastic with toggle handle. D. Indicator Light: Separate pilot strap; red lens. E. Ratings: 1. Voltage: 120 volts, AC. 2. Current: 20 amperes. F. For control of mechanically held contactors or relays; provide three position, momentary contact

switches with spring return to center off position. Momentary contact switches shall be rated 120/277 volt, 20 amperes.

G. Color: Architect shall select from manufacturers standard colors. Note: Architect may chose

multiple colors throughout project.

2.2 RECEPTACLES A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell 2. Pass & Seymour 3. Leviton 4. G.E. B. Description: NEMA WD 1, heavy duty, specification grade receptacle. In dining and serving

areas, provide safety type receptacles which shall discourage insertion of foreign object into receptacle by small children.

C. Device Body: Nylon. D. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, type as specified and indicated. E. Convenience Receptacle: Type 5-20. F. GFCI Receptacle: Convenience receptacle with integral ground fault circuit interrupter to meet

regulatory requirements. Devices shall utilize “Lock Out” technology to ensure outlet can not be used if ground fault protection fails. Device shall have status LED.

G. Isolated Ground Receptacle: Type 5-20. Provide with orange body and plate. H. Color: Architect shall select from manufacturers standard colors. Note: Architect may chose

multiple colors throughout project. 2.3 WALL PLATES

A. Decorative Cover Plate: Smooth nylon in all areas except food prep. Devices in food prep shall be

stainless steel. Manufacturer same as device manufacturer. Color to match device. B. Exterior Wall Receptacle Cover: Receptacles shall be installed flush with wall. The cast aluminum

receptacle cover shall have ports to allow two 3/8” diameter cords to pass through and must not protrude over 4-½” from wall surface. Recessed enclosure must have gasket between the enclosure and the mounting surface to assure that the enclosure is “Weather proof while in use.” The enclosure shall be UL Listed. Provide Hubbell #WP700 or equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that outlet boxes are installed at proper height. B. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates. C. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring

devices.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. B. Clean debris from outlet boxes.

3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." B. Install devices plumb and level. C. Install switches with OFF position down. D. Install receptacles with grounding pole on top. D. After connecting wires to GFCI receptacles, wrap terminals with four layers of electrician’s tape. F. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. G. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas. H. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal when using solid

conductors. Provide crimp on lugs for terminations when using stranded conductors. I. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas and above

accessible ceilings.

J. Provide ½” black on clear adhesive label tape on each device coverplate centered between top of the coverplate and the device indicating panel and branch circuit number. This label will be in addition to any labeling required to indicate loads controlled when multiple light switches are grouped together.

3.4 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS

A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 34 to obtain mounting heights

indicated on drawings.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each wiring device for defects. B. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation. C. Verify that each receptacle device is energized. D. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity. E. Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation.

3.6 CLEANING


A. Section Division 01 – Project Record and Closeout Documents: Clean installed work. B. Clean exposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish.

END 26 27 63

ENCLOSED SWITCHES 26 28 17-1

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 28 17 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES


A. Nonfusible switches.

1.2 REFERENCES A. NECA - Standard of Installation (published by the National Electrical Contractors Association). B. NEMA KS1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum). C. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and

Systems (published by the International Electrical Testing Association). D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Division 01 – Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide switch ratings and enclosure dimensions.

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT A. Division 01 – Project Record and Closeout Documents: Submittals for project closeout. B. Record actual locations of enclosed switches in project record documents.




specified and indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. General Electric. B. Siemens. C. Square D. D. Cutler Hammer.

2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCH ASSEMBLIES

ENCLOSED SWITCHES 26 28 17-2

A. Description: NEMA KS 1, Type HD enclosed load interrupter knife switch. Handle lockable in OFF position.

2.3 ENCLOSURES

A. Fabrication: NEMA KS 1. 1. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1. 2. Exterior Locations: Type 3R.


A. Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." B. Apply adhesive tag on inside door of each fused switch indicating NEMA fuse class and size

installed. C. Provide engraved nameplates for switches not in sight of controlled loads. Indicate load type and

location.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.5.

3.3 CLEANING A. Division 01 – Cleaning: Clean installed work. B. Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finishes. C. Clean dust and debris from interior and exterior of cabinet.

END 26 28 17

ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS 26 29 13-1

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 29 13 - ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS


A. Manual motor starters.

B. Magnetic motor starters.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

B. NECA "Standard of Installation," published by National Electrical Contractors Association.

C. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers.

D. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies.

E. NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems.

F. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Division 01 – Submittals.

B. Product Data: Provide catalog sheets showing voltage, controller size, ratings and size of

switching and overcurrent protective devices, short circuit ratings, dimensions, and enclosure details.

C. Test Reports: Indicate field test and inspection procedures and test results.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use

stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product.


A. Perform Work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with




B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Square D.

B. Siemens.

C. G.E. D. Cutler Hammer.

2.2 MANUAL CONTROLLERS

A. Manual Motor Controller: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A manually operated,

full-voltage controller without overload element, red pilot light, when not in sight of controlled motor and toggle operator. Flush mount in finished spaces such as toilets and janitor closets.

B. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6; Type 1 unless otherwise noted.

2.3 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLERS

A. Magnetic Motor Controllers: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A magnetic controller for

induction motors rated in horsepower.

B. Coil operating voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hertz.

C. Overload Relay: NEMA ICS; melting alloy.

D. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 for interior, dry locations, Type 3R for exterior locations.

2.4 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND FEATURES

A. Auxiliary Contacts: NEMA ICS 2, 2 each normally open and normally closed.

B. Cover Mounted Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 2, heavy duty type, HAND-OFF-AUTO rotary switch unless noted otherwise.

C. Pilot Device Contacts: NEMA ICS 2, Form Z, rated A150. D. Pushbuttons Where Required: Unguarded STOP, shrouded START unless noted otherwise.

E. Indicating Lights: LED type red RUN light unless otherwise noted.

F. Relays: NEMA ICS 2.

G. Control Power Transformers: 120 volt secondary, in each motor starter. Provide fused secondary,

and bond unfused leg of secondary to enclosure.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install enclosed controllers where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install enclosed controllers plumb. Provide supports in accordance with Section 26 05 29.

C. Height: 5 ft to operating handle, switch, or pushbutton.

D. Provide screw-on type engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 26 05 53. Nameplates shall indicate load type and location.


E. Provide neatly typed label inside each motor controller door identifying motor served, nameplate horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service factor, and voltage/phase rating.


A. Inspect and test each enclosed controller to NEMA ICS 2.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Division 01 – Cleaning: Cleaning installed work.

B. Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish.

C. Clean dust and debris from interior and exterior of motor controller.

END 26 29 13

SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES (SPD) 26 43 13-1

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 43 13 - SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPDs)


A. Contractor provide:

1. SPD units mounted integral switchboards and panelboards as indicated on riser diagram. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 26 24 13 - Switchboards B. Section 26 24 16 – Panelboards.

1.3 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES

A. Underwriters Laboratory (UL) B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) F. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) G. Federal Information Processing Standards, Pub 94 (FIPS) H. ANSI/IEEE C62.41, Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power

Circuits, Category C I. ANSI/IEEE C62.45, Guide on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage AC Power

Circuits. J. UL 1449, Current Edition – Surge Protective Devices K. UL 1283 L. NEMA LS-1, Low Voltage Surge Protective Devices M. NEC Article 285

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. In accordance with Division 01, provide:

1. Shop drawings and product data sheets indication physical and electrical characteristics in accordance with Division 1.

2. UL1449 file card copies. 3. Third party test results verifying label ratings.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Warrant all equipment for ten (10) years from date of substantial completion.



A. Liebert.

B. Current Technology.

C. EFI Electronics.

D. United Power.

E. Leviton.

F. Square D.

G. Seimens ITE.

H. G.E. 2.2 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS A. SPD Types 1. Service Entrance: SPD shall be UL 1449 labeled as Type 1 or Type 4 intended for Type 1 or

Type 2 applications, verifiable at UL.com, without need for external or supplemental overcurrent controls.

B. Nominal System Operating Voltages

1. 208Y/120 VAC, 3-phase, 4 wire, plus ground for panelboard units.

C. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltages (MCOV)

1. 125% of nominal system operating voltage.

D. Operating Frequency

1. 60 Hertz.

E. Seven (7) Protection Modes on Grounded Wye System

1. L-G, L-N and N-G (L = Line, N = Neutral, and G = Ground).

F. The SPD shall be UL Tested and labeled as a complete assembly to a symmetrical fault current

rating greater than or equal to the rating of the connected panel, in accordance with NEC Article 285, without the requirement of a dedicated breaker feeder to obtain the fault current withstand rating.

G. The Voltage Protection Rating (VPR) shall be tested with the integral disconnect in accordance with

UL-1449, Third Edition. The UL VPR values shall not exceed the following (including disconnect). If the device is remote mounted it shall be fed by a circuit breaker and the UL VPR rating shall include the breaker in series with the SPD.

H. Maximum UL 1449 Voltage Surge (Category C1)

System Voltage L-N, L-G, N-G Modes 208Y/120 VAC 800V


I. Protection and Filtering Elements:

1. The SPD shall have a maximum surge current rating of:

Service Entrance 300 kA per mode. Devices that derive a maximum surge current rating by adding test results of individual components are not acceptable. Test documentation of kA rating shall be required. Devices must be rated per mode, not per PHASE per NEMA.

2. The SPD device repetitive surge current capacity shall be tested utilizing a 1.2x50ms, 20kV

open circuit voltage, 8x20ms, 10kA short circuit Category C3 test waveform (as defined by ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1991 and ANSI/IEEE C62.45-1992) at one minute intervals. A failure is defined as either performance degradation or more than 10% deviation of clamping voltage at the specified surge current. The service entrance device shall be capable of surviving a minimum of 20,000 C3 impulses without failure or performance degradation of more than 10%. Downstream devices shall be capable of surviving a minimum of 5,000 C3 impulses without failure or performance degradation of more than 10%.

3. The SPD device shall be capable of surviving a minimum of 5,000 surges using a 10x1000ms impulse (1kV, 4kA for 277/480V devices, .5kV, 2kA for 120/208V devices), confirmed by an independent nationally recognized test lab (R&B Labs).

4. Systems using selenium, gas tubes or silicon avalanche diodes in surge current path are not acceptable.

5. The Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV) for all voltage configurations shall be 125% of nominal or greater.

6. The fusing system shall be capable of allowing the rated maximum surge current to pass through without fuse operation. Systems utilizing a fusing system that opens below the maximum surge current level are unacceptable. The fusing system shall be included in the surge current testing.

J. The SPD shall incorporate a UL 1283 listed EMI/RFI filter with minimum attenuation of – 50dB at

100kHz. K. The SPD shall be UL labeled with 20kA I-nominal (I-n).

L. Overcurrent Protection:

1. Fuses rated for 200 KAIC (integral fused disconnect).

M. Diagnostic Monitoring:

1. Fuse monitoring. 2. MOV monitoring. 3. Green/red indicator lights for each phase. Red light indicating damaged phase. 4. Form C contacts for remote annunciation of unit status. 5. Press-to-test diagnostics to verify operational integrity of monitoring system. 6. Surge event counter and audible alarm. 7. Remote status monitor.

N. Serviceability:

1. SPD system module(s) must be field replaceable by qualified individuals or licensed

Electricians.

O. Equipment Mounting:

1. Distribution Panel SPD – The SPD shall include an integral disconnect switch which has been tested to the surge current rating of the SPD and match or exceed the fault current rating of the board per NEC 285. The Disconnect must switch the phases and neutral. Use of circuit breakers for disconnect mean is not acceptable due to impedance and the requirement for


neutral disconnect. The SPD shall be mounted integral to the equipment. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Provide factory installed SPD units.

B. Verify SPD unit ratings with service rating and voltage characteristics, and with Electrical Requirements section of this specification. Ensure proper system configuration and coordination prior to ordering any equipment.

C Provide source breaker or fused disconnect switch for SPD units sized in accordance with SPD

manufacturer's recommendations.

D Ground equipment and SPD units per manufacturer's recommendations, NEC, and Section 26 05 26.

E. Provide mounting brackets, bus bar, breaker stabs, and filler pieces for unused spaces. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform SPD unit tests according to manufacturer's instructions. Provide verification of test results to Architect/Engineer.

B. Provide services of manufacturer's factory trained Engineer for length of time required to:

1. Coordinate installation. 2. Conduct functional tests on all equipment and field test listed herein. 3. Provide training during normal working hours to AAFES's personnel in operation, testing,

adjusting, and maintenance. 4. Submit written report to Architect/Engineer and AAFES stating results of tests conducted and

listing personnel trained. 3.3 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING

A. Adjust operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement.

B. Tighten bus connections and mechanical fasteners, in accordance with manufacturer's published torque value recommendations and UL 486A and B.

C. Touch-up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish.

D. Clean interior and exterior of enclosure.

END 26 43 13

INTERIOR LUMINAIRES 26 51 00-1

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 51 00 - INTERIOR LUMINAIRES


A. Interior luminaires and accessories. B. Exit signs. C. Drivers. D. Luminaire accessories.

1.2 REFERENCES A. ANSI ANSLG – LED Driver Performance. B. IES LM-79 – LED lamp and luminaire performance C. IES LM-85 - LED Package Characteristics. D. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices-Dimensional Requirements. E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. F. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Division 01 – Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a standard

product of the manufacturer. Provide ballast information for each fixture. C. Product Data: Provide dimensions, ratings, and performance data.

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Division 01 – Submittal: Submittals for information. B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of

use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product.


A. Division 01 – Project Record and Closeout Documents: Submittals for project closeout. B. Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance instructions for each product. C. Ten year warranty for drivers, exit signs, and emergency standby drivers per UFC 3-350-01 2-

4.1.1.




1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Conform to requirements of NFPA 101. C. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose

specified and indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMINAIRES

A. Furnish products as scheduled. Contractors wishing to submit voluntary substitutions shall submit

complete cut sheet information showing fixture dimensions, options and photometrics. Alternate fixtures must be received at engineers’ office minimum two weeks prior to bidding. Engineers’ evaluation shall be final. Fixtures submitted without prior approval will be returned to contractor without comment.

2.2 LED Drivers

A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturers Standard complying with ANSI ANSLG requirements.

2.3 LED Standby Drivers A. Manufacturers: Bodine, ITOA or approved equal. B. Description: Emergency battery power supply suitable for installation in ballast compartment of

fluorescent luminaire or for remote mounting. C. Ratings: As shown on fixture schedule. D. Battery: Sealed pure lead type, rated for 10 year life. Provide 3 year full warranty. E. Include TEST switch and AC ON indicator light, installed to be operable and visible from the

outside of an assembled luminaire.


A. Support recessed luminaires independent of ceiling framing. For recessed luminaires,

provide four hanger wires fastened at corners of luminaires and at structural joists. Provide two hanger wires for recessed downlights. Supports wires shall be same type and gauge as ceiling support wires.

B. Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on reflected ceiling plan. C. Support surface mounted luminaires on grid ceiling directly from building structure. D. Install surface mounted luminaires and exit signs plumb and adjust to align with building lines and

with each other. Secure to prevent movement. E. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below. F. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.


G. Connect luminaires to branch circuits provided under Section 26 05 33 using flexible conduit. In exposed grid ceiling areas, use premanufactured wiring systems at contractor’s option.

H. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for

temperature conditions within luminaire. I. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. J. Install specified lamps in each luminaire.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and

operation.

3.3 ADJUSTING A. Position exit sign directional arrows as indicated.

3.4 CLEANING A. Division 01 – Cleaning: Cleaning installed work. B. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials. C. Remove dirt and debris from enclosures. D. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. E. Clean finishes and touch up damage.

3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Prior to final acceptance, replace luminaires that have failed LEDs.

END 26 51 00

SITE LIGHTING 26 56 00-1

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 56 00 - SITE LIGHTING


A. Exterior luminaires and accessories. B. Poles.

1.2 REFERENCES A. ANSI ANSLG – LED Driver Performance. B. IES LM-79 – LED lamp and luminaire performance C. IES LM-85 - LED Package Characteristics. D. IES RP-8 - Recommended Practice for Roadway Lighting. E. IES RP-20 - Lighting for Parking Facilities. F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Division 01 – Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire which is not a standard

Product of the manufacturer. C. Product Data: Provide dimensions, ratings, photometric data, and performance data. D. Provide Auto Cad drawing from lighting manufacturer showing photometric data from pole and

building mounted light fixtures. Submittal shall show all relevant information used in calculations. Auto Cad drawings available from engineer. Request drawings minimum 2 weeks prior to need.

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Division 01 – Submittals: Submittals for information. B. Test Reports: Indicate measured illumination levels. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of

use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product.

D. Provide computer generated photometric layout at parking lot and building perimeter lighting

levels. 1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT

A. Division 01 – Project Record and Closeout Documents: Submittals for project closeout. B. Maintenance Data: For each luminaire. C. Driver warranty.





specified and indicated.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Transport, handle, store, and protect products to avoid damage to poles, luminaires, lenses, and

paint finishes. B. Store poles and luminaires in original shipping containers.

1.9 COORDINATION A. Furnish bolt templates and pole mounting accessories to installer of pole foundations. B. Furnish one gallon of touch-up paint. Provide the paint formula to AAFES manager and include

with O & M manual for future access to paint. Obtain singed receipt showing manufacturer and paint model number.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMINAIRES AND ACCESSORIES

A. Provide luminaires, poles, and accessories as scheduled on plans. B. Poles shall be high density aluminum. C. Pole/luminaire assembly shall be rated for 100 mph wind loads with a 1.3 gust factor.

2.2 LAMPS A. Lamp Types: Factory installed LED assemblies with performance and lumen output as specified

for luminaire. B. Lamps shall be as specified for luminaire.

2.3 POLES

A. Material and Finish: 1. Aluminum, dark bronze, square cross section, wall thickness as required to coordinate

with EPA rating requirements. 2. Concrete base. Hand rub with grout to give finished appearance.

B. Accessories:

1. Handhole. 2. Anchor bolts. 3. Built-in pole vibration dampeners. 4. Provide in-line fusing at each site lighting pole accessible via handhole at each pole base.

Size fusing at 150% of fixture load.


C. Loading Capacity Ratings:

1. Steady Wind: 100 miles per hour, minimum.


A. Provide reinforced concrete bases for lighting poles at locations indicated, in accordance with

Division 31. B. Install poles plumb. Provide double nuts to adjust plumb. Grout around each base. C. Install lamps in each luminaire. D. Bond luminaires and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. Provide

supplementary grounding electrode at each pole. D. Provide high strength grout between pole bearing plate and concrete pole base to distribute

structural load on bearing plate. Leave weep hole in grout to allow condensation within pole to drain.


A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for improper connections and

operation. 3.3 CLEANING

A. Division 01 – Cleaning: Cleaning installed work. B. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials. C. Remove dirt and debris from enclosure. D. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. E. Clean finishes. Use touch-up paint to cover scratched or damaged surfaces.

3.4 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A At substantial completion of the building, repair or replace luminaires which have failed.

END 26 56 00

TESTING 26 60 00-1

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 60 00 - TESTING


A. Provide:

1. Testing of electrical components and systems: a. Insulation resistance test. b. Grounding electrode test. c. Continuity test. d. Voltage test. e. Phase relationship verification. f. Fire alarm / mass notification system acceptance test. g. Power transmission equipment test.

2. Test reports. 3. Correction of defective components or systems. 4. Retest of corrected components, systems.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Test Reports: Submit seven (7) copies of all test reports to Contracting Officer.

1. Type each test report on 8-1/2 inch x 11 inch paper. Include: a. Project Number. b. Project title and location. c. Test performed. d. Date performed. e. Test equipment used. f. Contractor's name, address and telephone number. g. Testing firm's name, address and telephone number if other than Contractor. h. Name (s) and title (s) of person (s):

1. Performing test. 2. Observing test.

i. Statement verifying each test. j. Nameplate data from each motor and equipment item tested. k. Test results. l. Retest results after correction of defective components, systems.

2. For each copy, assemble all test reports and bind them in a folder. Label each folder,

"Electrical Test Reports". PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: Furnish all equipment, manpower and casual labor to perform specified testing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

A. When temporary electrical service is used for testing, do not energize any equipment or portion of permanent system that exceeds capacity of temporary service.

B. Ensure that all electrical work is complete and ready for testing.

TESTING 26 60 00-2

C. Disconnect all devices or equipment that might be damaged by application of test voltages, voltage of

reversed phase sequence or other test procedures. 3.2 TESTING: Conduct tests and adjust equipment to verify compliance with specified performance. 3.3 INSULATION RESISTANCE TESTS

A. Resistance measured; line-to-ground.

B. Perform testing on the following items: Min. Acceptance

Item Tested Voltage of Test Resistance in Megohms 1. No. 2 and larger

cables (600V) 1000V 50 2. Motors 500V 5 3. Switchboard and Panelboard Buses 1000V 25

3.4 GROUNDING ELECTRODE TEST: Measure and record ground resistance from system neutral connection at

service entrance to convenient ground reference point using suitable ground testing equipment. Maximum acceptable resistance: 10 ohms. When resistance exceeds 10 ohms drive and bond another ground rod, one ground rod length away and repeat test.

3.5 CONTINUITY TESTS: Test branch circuits and control circuits to determine continuity of wiring and

connections. 3.6 VOLTAGE TESTS

A. Make and record voltage tests and recorded at the following listed points. Conduct tests under normal load conditions.

1. Service entrance at main panel. 2. Terminals of all motors.

3.7 PHASE RELATIONSHIP

A. Examine connections to equipment for proper phase relationships. Verify proper motor rotation. 3.8 FIRE ALARM / MASS NOTIFICATION ACCEPTANCE TEST

A. See 28 31 76 for additional testing requirements. Have the fire alarm acceptance test performed by the Alarm Company Representative and Installing Contractor in the presence of the A/E, fire chief or his / her designated representative.

B. Acceptance Test Procedures:

EXPECTED INDICATION ON PANEL/RECEIVING STATION PREMISES AND REMOTE STATION

1. Normal Power to Panel (Normal) 2. Disconnect Power to Panel (Trouble) 3. Activate Detection Device (Alarm) 4. Silence Alarm Signaling Devices (Trouble) 5. Return Normal Power to Panel & Reset Panel (Normal) 6. Place Each Function Switch in an Abnormal Position (Trouble) 7. Remove supervised Devices from System (During

this portion of testing, ensure proper wire has been used and devices are properly installed.)

8. Return Supervised Device to System (Normal) 9. Disconnect Normal Power to Panel (Trouble) 10. Activate Detector(s) for each Zone (Alarm)

TESTING 26 60 00-3

11. Inspect all Alarm Indicating Devices and Auxiliary Devices (Working List) 12. Silence Horns (Alarm/Trouble) 13. Reset System (Trouble) 14. Return Normal Power to System (Normal) 15. Place Panel in Alarm Condition. Disconnect Primary

Power Source for a Minimum of 15 Seconds and Return to Normal Power. (The above transfer procedure shall not cause a loss of an alarm condition at Receiving Station.)

3.9 CORRECTION OF DEFECTS

A. When tests disclose any unsatisfactory workmanship or equipment furnished under this Contract, correct defects and retest. Repeat tests until satisfactory results are obtained.

B. When any wiring or equipment is damaged by tests, repair or replace such wiring or equipment. Test

repaired items to ensure satisfactory operation.

END 26 60 00

FIRE ALARM / MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEMS 28 31 76 - 1

DIVISION 28 – ALARMS AND SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 31 76 - FIRE ALARM / MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes description of methods and materials for:

1. Preamplifiers. 2. Power amplifiers. 3. Microphones. 4. Control panel. 5. Activation stations. 6. Speakers. 7. Alarm devices. 8. Conductors and cables. 9. Surge protection.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. FA/MNS: Fire Alarm/Mass Notification System.

B. FMCP: Combined Fire Alarm/Mass Notification Panel

C. FMAP: Fire Alarm / Mass Notification Annunciator Panel

D. LOC: Local operating console.

E. UFC: Unified Facilities Criteria.

F. LED: Light-emitting diode.

G. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.

H. Definitions in NFPA 72 apply to fire alarm terms used in this Section.

I. AHJ: Authority Having Jurisdiction is an individual responsible for review, inspection, and/or approval of a system. For this project, the AHJ shall be Assistant Chief For Prevention Dana Pelletier.

J. INWS: Installation Notification and Warning System.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. All references shall be of the latest edition.

B. Factory Mutual (FM):

1. FM AG Approval Guide

C. Unified Facilities Criteria:

1. UFC 3-600-01 Fire Protection Engineering for Facilities (August 2016). 2. UFC 3-601-02 Operation and Maintenance: Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Fire

Protection Systems. 3. UFC 4-021-01 Design and O&M: Mass Notification.


D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code. 2. NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code. 3. NFPA 90A Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 4. NFPA 96 Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations. 5. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code.

E. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Appropriate UL equipment standards:

1. UL 864 Control Panels. 2. UL 268 Smoke Detectors. 3. UL 268A Smoke Detectors (HVAC). 4. UL 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes. 5. UL 1971, Standard for Visual Signaling Appliances.

F. Building Codes:

1. International Building Code. 2. International Fire Code. 3. UL 2572, Standard for Control and Communications Units for Mass Notification Systems.

G. State and Local Building Codes as adopted and/or amended by The Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).

H. ADA, and/or State and local equivalency standards as adopted by The Authority Having Jurisdiction.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. The United States Military has developed provisions for Mass Notification of personnel in the event of threats. Threats could vary from land attacks, sea attacks, chemical attacks, radiological attacks, fires, and other threats of the life and safety of building occupants. Mass notification is the capability to provide real-time information to all building occupants or personnel in the immediate vicinity of a building during emergency situations. To reduce the risk of mass casualties, there must be a timely means to notify building occupants of threats and what should be done in response to those threats. Pre-recorded and live voice emergency messages are required to provide this capability.

B. Noncoded, analog-addressable system; automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors; and multiplexed signal transmission. Signal communication within the premises shall be by hard-wired circuits

C. The FMCP shall be interfaced with the building Public Address System. Tones and voice messages initiated by the FMCP shall mute all other programs such as music, paging, or prerecorded commercial announcements.

D. All equipment furnished shall be new and the latest state of the art products by manufacturers, engaged in the manufacturing and sale of UL listed fire detection and/or communication devices for over five years.

E. The system as specified is subject to review, full testing, and approval by the AHJ, and shall be turned over to AAFES in an operational condition.

F. In the interest of job coordination and responsibilities the installing contractor shall contract with a single supplier, to the maximum extent possible, for equipment, engineering, programming, inspection, and testing.

G. The Contractor shall provide a representative as requested for project meetings such as to assist in coordination of crafts.



A. Comply with all referenced documents.

B. FA/MNS signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices: 1. Manual pull stations 2. Smoke detectors 3. Carbon monoxide sensors 4. Fire extinguishing system operation (Popeyes and Burger King) 5. Switches located with the main FMCP and LOC. 6. Microphone in FMCP and LOC.

C. FA/MNS activation shall initiate the following actions:

1. Sound an audible alarm and display a custom screen/message defining the building/zone/room in alarm and the specific alarm point initiating the alarm.

2. Log to the system history archives all activity pertaining to the alarm condition. 3. Display action initiated on the FMCP. 4. HVAC shut down shall be accomplished by system operated duct detectors as per local

requirements. Unless specifically required by the AHJ, HVAC and duct detectors shall sound the general alarm.

5. Initiate the appropriate visual alert and pre-recorded message for the respective alert switch activated. Messages shall use a female voice. Content of messages shall be in accordance with UFC 4-021-01.

6. Emergency messages shall override each other based on priority. Verify message priority with AHJ.

7. Fire signals shall latch and not end automatically and shall continue until manually reset. Other messages shall automatically end after 10 minutes unless silenced earlier.

8. If separate strobes are provided for Fire and Mass Notification messages, fire alarm strobes may continue to flash and shall be synchronized with mass notification strobes.

9. Transmit the signal type to the monitoring station or as indicated on Drawings.

D. Upon activation of a supervisory signal, the following shall take place or be provided:

1. Display the origin of the supervisory condition report at the FMCP. 2. Activate supervisory audible and dedicated visual signals. 3. Provide a means for silencing a supervisory signal shall be permitted only if it is key-operated,

located in a locked enclosure, or arranged to provide equivalent protection against unauthorized use. Such a means shall be permitted only if it transfers the supervisory indication to a lamp or other visible indicator and subsequent supervisory signals in other zones cause the supervisory notification appliance(s) to re-sound.

4. Provide a supervisory signal if the fire alarm message is overridden during simultaneous fire and terrorist events. The supervisory signal shall be annunciated at the FMCP and any remote fire alarm annunciators and be transmitted to the fire department. The visual annunciation of the separate supervisory signal shall be distinctly labeled or otherwise clearly identified.

5. Record within system history the initiating device and time of occurrence of the event. 6. Transmit the signal to the monitoring station.

E. Upon activation of a trouble signal, the following shall take place or be provided:

1. Display at the FMCP panel the origin of the trouble condition report. 2. Activate trouble audible and visual signals at the control panel and as indicated on the drawings. 3. Silence audible signals via a trouble acknowledge switch. 4. Trouble reports for primary system power failure to the master control shall be optionally delayed

for a period of time not greater than 200 seconds. Trouble conditions that have been restored to normal shall be automatically removed from the trouble display queue and not require operator intervention. This feature shall be software selectable and shall not preclude the logging of trouble events to the historical file.


5. Record within system history, the occurrence of the event, the time of occurrence and the device initiating the event.

6. Transmit the signal to the monitoring station.

F. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Initiate audible and visual signals at the main panels and remote annunciators.

G. Power and Voltage Limitations:

1. Battery capacity calculations. Battery size shall be a minimum of 125 percent of the calculated requirement.

2. Power supplies shall be sized to furnish the total connected load in a worst-case condition plus 25 percent spare capacity. (i.e. 4A supply x .25 spare = 1A reserve.)

3. The power supplies shall be capable of accepting 120 VAC, 60 Hz. 4. Voltage drop calculations for wiring runs demonstrating worst-case condition. Unless otherwise

approved by the Government’s Designated Representative, voltage drop calculations shall be performed using the Lump-Sum or Point to Point approach. Calculations must include and clearly indicate wire length out and back to panel. Calculations shall be provided for alarm indicating device circuits.

5. Device current values for voltage drop calculations shall be based on the lowest nameplate voltage or 85% of secondary power when using batteries. (i.e. current values at a voltage of 20.4 volts shall be used when available rather than current values for 24 volts.)

6. Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC) design shall incorporate a 25 percent spare capacity for future expansion.

7. End-of-line voltage reading will be required for each circuit and must have a 25 percent spare capacity. (i.e. 24V circuit – 21V nameplate = 3 volt drop x 0.25 spare = 0.75 volt safety factor required.)

8. In no case shall alarm indicating device circuits be designed or measured to have an end-of-line voltage below 20 volts or the manufactures nameplate voltage, whichever is higher.

1.6 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Five copies of all submittals shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer for review. The contractor shall include the following information in submittals.

1. Shop Drawings shall be prepared and signed by Fire Protection Engineer.

2. System Operation Description: Detailed description for this Project, including method of operation

and supervision of each type of circuit and sequence of operations for manually and automatically initiated system inputs and outputs. Manufacturer's standard descriptions for generic systems are not acceptable.

3. Device Address List: Coordinate with final system programming. 4. Control input/output Matrix per NFPA 72, paragraph 7.4.9. 5. System riser diagram with device addresses, conduit sizes, and cable and wire types and sizes. 6. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Include diagrams for equipment and for

system with all terminals and interconnections identified. Show wiring color code. 7. Batteries: Size calculations. 8. Duct Smoke Detectors: Performance parameters and installation details for each detector,

verifying that each detector is listed for the complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating. Coordinating the installation of duct smoke detectors and access to them. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes, the detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators. Locate detectors according to manufacturers written recommendations.

9. Elevation Details: Details shall be provided showing mounting of wall and ceiling devices. Where exposed or pocketed ceilings are involved, specific dimensioned details of detector and notification devices shall be provided.


10. Device Mounting Details: Details of device back-box requirements shall be provided. 11. Floor Plans: Indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable device. Show

size and route of cable and conduits.

C. Cut Sheets, Calculations, and Other Design Documents: Each set of shop drawings shall be accompanied with supportive submittal documentation. This documentation shall be quality bound and shall be organized and numerically tabbed into the following sections.

1. Control Panels, Power Supplies and Annunciators. 2. Detection Devices. 3. Audio/Visual Devices. 4. System Components, Modules and Relays. 5. Battery Calculations and cut sheets (summary of results shall also be on plans). 6. Voltage Calculations (summary of results shall also be on plans). 7. Compatibility Listings (matrix, table, or info showing device compatibility). 8. Operating Instructions for entire System. (This will include a copy of what will be posted adjacent

to FMCP.) 9. Manufacturers Inspection instructions and other maintenance criteria from NFPA 72 and UFC 3-

601-02. 10. Designer and installer certificates. (Documents prepared by a PE do not require certificate, but

are required to be sealed.)

D. Qualification Data: Copies of certificates for installers and documenting approved manufacture representation shall be provided.

E. Field quality control test reports.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire alarm system to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Comply with NFPA 72, Appendix A, recommendations for owner’s manual. Include abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at the FMCP.

G. Submittals to Authorities Having Jurisdiction: In addition to distribution requirements for submittals specified in Division 01 Administrative Requirements, make an identical submittal to authorities having jurisdiction. To facilitate review, include copies of annotated Contract Drawings as needed to depict component locations. Resubmit if required to make clarifications or revisions to obtain approval. On receipt of comments from authorities having jurisdiction, submit them to Contracting Officer for review. Contractor shall submit to base fire department and Security Forces for review comments prior to submittal for A/E review.

H. Documentation: 1. Approval and Acceptance: Provide the "Record of Completion" form according to NFPA 72 to

Government and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Record of Completion Documents: Provide the "Permanent Records" according to NFPA 72 to

Government. Format of the written sequence of operation shall be the optional input/output matrix. a. Hard copies on paper to Government.

I. A copy of these fire alarm specifications shall be included with all submittal packages including those to AAFES and the AHJ.

J. Incomplete submittals shall be returned without review, unless previously approved by the Contracting Officer.

K. Provide sound intelligibility analysis calculations to demonstrate compliance with UFC 4-021-01.



A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Qualifications:

1. The contractor shall submit copies of all required Licenses and Bonds as required in the State having jurisdiction to the Contracting Officer upon award of contract, and engineer upon request.

2. The contractor shall employ a registered Qualified Fire Protection Engineer (QFPE per UFC 3-600-01) to prepare and seal system calculations and shop drawings. This individual shall make regular site visits as necessary to oversee the system installation and provide written notification that “the system was constructed and operates as intended in the design plans and specifications”. This requirement shall apply to the fire alarm contractor and any other contractor installing portions of the system such as wiring and/or devices by an electrical contractor.

3. At least one NICET Level II Fire Alarm Technician shall be present and have oversight at all times fire alarm equipment and/or wiring is being installed. This requirement shall apply to the fire alarm contractor and any other contractor installing portions of the system such as wiring and/or devices by an electrical contractor. Technician shall immediately provide evidence of qualification upon request.

4. Fire alarm shop drawings shall be prepared and sealed by a Fire Protection Engineer with proven and documented experience/training in fire alarm system design and codes. Plans not prepared by the Professional Engineer or under the direct supervision (same employment) of the Professional Engineer shall not be approved. Design documents prepared by a Professional Engineer shall bear a seal and signature of the engineer.

5. The State approved or licensed fire alarm contractor whose name appears on the system and who is responsible for system warranty and service shall have sole authority to establish installation responsibilities. Thus, if any portion is to be wired or installed by a separate contractor (such as an electrical contractor), then the fire alarm contractor will by contract select and warrant such contractor. An electrical or other contractor not licensed by the state and/or not meeting qualification requirements of this Specification shall not dictate installation conditions for this system.


A. Factory Mutual (FM).

1. FM AG Approval Guide.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, and are limited to, the following:

1. Fire Alarm and Mass Notification control panels:

a. Wheelock, Inc. b. Gamewell FCI; a GE-Honeywell Company. c. NOTIFIER; a GE-Honeywell Company. d. Monaco Enterprises Inc.

2. Wire and Cable:

a. Comtran Corporation. b. Helix/HiTemp Cables, Inc.; a Draka USA Company.


c. Rockbestos-Suprenant Cable Corporation; a Marmon Group Company. d. West Penn Wire/CDT; a division of Cable Design Technologies.

3. Audible and Visual Signals:

a. Gentex Corporation. b. System Sensor; a GE-Honeywell Company. c. Wheelock, Inc.

2.2 FMCP

A. General Description:

1. The system shall be a multi channel voice evacuation system incorporating user selectability of minimum of 8 distinct sounds for tone signaling, and the incorporation of a digital voice module for prerecorded messaging. The AHJ shall determine the number and content of pre-recorded messages. The system shall incorporate microphone override. The system shall have the capability of utilizing a remote microphone station with redundant controls of the evacuation system control panel.

2. A hand-held microphone shall be provided and, upon activation, shall take priority over any tone signal, recorded message or remote microphone operation in progress, while maintaining the strobe NAC Circuits activation.

3. The system shall, by the addition of a voice card / relay, be capable of interconnection with a future Installation Wide Notification and Warning System (INWS) that includes operation from a central communication center and an outdoor public notification system provided by the same manufacturer.

4. Shall be capable of remote functions via a RS-232 or RS-485 interface. Contractor to coordinate with base Fire Department and Security Forces for specific requirements.

5. Modular, power-limited design with electronic modules, UL 864 listed. 6. Addressable initiation devices that communicate device identity and status.

a. Smoke sensors shall additionally communicate sensitivity setting and allow for adjustment

of sensitivity at the FMCP. b. Temperature sensors shall additionally test for and communicate the sensitivity range of

the device. 7. Addressable control circuits for operation of mechanical equipment.

B. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at the FMCP and addressable system components including annunciation and supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming and control menu.

1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, three line(s) of 160 characters, minimum or

multifunction touch screen. 2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control commands;

and to indicate control commands to be entered into the system for control of smoke-detector sensitivity and other parameters.

C. Circuits:

1. Signaling Line Circuits: NFPA 72, Class A. 2. Notification-Appliance Circuits: NFPA 72, Class A for speakers, Class A for strobes. 3. Actuation of alarm notification appliances including emergency voice communications,

annunciation, elevator recall, and actuation of suppression systems shall occur within 10 seconds after the activation of an initiating device.

4. Notification-Appliance Circuit: Operation shall sound in a temporal pattern complying with ANSI S3.41, in addition to a voice message.

5. Power Supply for Supervision Equipment: Supply for audible and visual equipment for supervision of the ac power shall be from a dedicated dc power supply, and power for the dc component shall be from the non-filtered emergency power source.


6. Alarm Silencing, Trouble, and Supervisory Alarm Reset: Manual reset at the FMCP and remote annunciators, after initiating devices are restored to normal.

7. Silencing-switch operation halts alarm operation of notification appliances and activates an "alarm silence" light. Continue to display the identity of the alarm device.

8. Subsequent alarm signals from other devices or zones reactivate notification appliances until silencing switch is operated again.

9. When alarm-initiating devices return to normal and system reset switch is operated, notification appliances operate again until alarm silence switch is reset.

D. Walk Test: A test mode to allow one person to test alarm and supervisory features of initiating devices. Enabling of this mode shall require the entry of a password. The FMCP and annunciators shall display a test indication while the test is underway. If testing ceases while in walk-test mode, after a preset delay, the system shall automatically return to normal.

E. Remote Smoke-Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Controls shall select specific addressable smoke detectors for adjustment, display their current status and sensitivity settings, and control of changes in those settings. Allow controls to be used to program repetitive, time-scheduled, and automated changes in sensitivity of specific detector groups. Record sensitivity adjustments and sensitivity-adjustment schedule changes in system memory, and make a print-out of the final adjusted values on the system printer.

F. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, trouble, and supervisory signals to a remote station through the reporting system. Provide Monaco BTXM signal transceiver compatible with JBSA Ft. Sam Houston remote receiving equipment. Trim antenna to 140.8625 MHz. Coordinate with JBSA Ft. Sam Houston fire alarm maintenance shop prior to trimming antenna.

G. Service Modem: Ports shall be RS-232 for system printer and for connection to a dial-in terminal unit. 1. The dial-in port shall allow remote access to the FMCP for programming changes and system

diagnostic routines. Access by a remote terminal shall be by encrypted password algorithm.

H. Function of Amplifier: 1. Allow the application of and evacuation signal to indicated number of zones. 2. Programmable tone and message sequence selection. 3. Standard digitally recorded messages for each required message. 4. Generate tones to be sequenced with audio messages of the type recommended by NFPA 72

and that are compatible with tone patterns of the notification-appliance circuits of the FMCP. 5. Status Annunciator: Indicate the status of various voice/alarm speaker zones. Preamplifiers,

amplifiers, and tone generators shall automatically transfer to backup units, on primary equipment failure.

I. Primary Power: 24Vdc obtained from 120Vac non-filtered power source and a power-supply module. Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signal, supervisory signal, and supervisory and digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be powered by the 24Vdc source. 1. The alarm current draw of the FMCP system shall not exceed 80 percent of each respective

power-supply module ratings. 2. Power supply shall have a dedicated safety switch for this connection at the service entrance

equipment. Provide a red label at circuit breakers and identify it with "FIRE ALARM CIRCUIT."

J. Secondary Power: 24Vdc supply system with batteries and automatic battery charger and an automatic transfer switch. 1. Batteries: Sealed lead calcium. 2. Battery and Charger Capacity: Comply with NFPA 72. 3. Secondary Power Capacity:

a. Provide minimum 48 hours standby and 15 minutes alarm back-up power. b. Provide 60 minutes of alarm at the maximum connected load.

K. Surge Protection:


1. Install surge protection on normal ac power for the FMCP, each power supply, and all accessories. Comply with Section 26 43 13 Surge Protective Devices for auxiliary panel SPD’s

2. Install surge protectors recommended by FMCP manufacturer. Install on all system wiring external to the building housing the FMCP. This shall include power, telephone, and radio transmitter wiring.

L. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.

2.3 MANUAL ACTIVATION STATIONS

A. Description: UL 38 listed; finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color. Station shall show visible indication of operation. Mount on recessed outlet box; if indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box. 1. Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, pull-lever type. With integral

addressable module, arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FMCP.

2. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch. 3. Indoor Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear polycarbonate plastic enclosure, hinged at the

top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. Lifting the cover will not actuate an audible horn. Locate only in public areas.

2.4 MICROPHONES:

A. Microphones shall incorporate microphone override of any tone generation or prerecorded messages.

B. Microphones shall be fully supervised from the FMCP.

2.5 LOCAL OPERATING CONSOLE (LOC)

A. Comply with JBSA Ft Sam Houston and UFC 4-021-01 requirements. In case of conflict, JBSA Ft Sam Houston requirements shall govern.

B. Mount LOC in metal cabinet having hinged door. Flush mount cabinet as shown on fire alarm plans. Provide a Push-To-Talk microphone to emulate microphone operation in FMCP.

C. Provide redundant controls and system status indicators of the FMCP.

D. Provide minimum of eight (8) manual pushbuttons to initiate pre-recorded messages. Exact number of messages and message content shall be determined by JBSA Ft Sam Houston AHJ.

E. Provide pushbutton switch with normally open contact and red mushroom operator to shut down all HVAC equipment in accordance with UFC 4-010-01. Interlock pushbutton load contact with FA/MNS through a monitor module or other means. Program FA/MNS to shut down all HVAC equipment upon operation of pushbutton and to simultaneously send a supervisory signal to the remote monitoring station. Pushbutton operation shall not sound the general fire alarm.

F. Install LOC such that microphone and pushbutton mounting heights meet ADA application guide requirements.

G. Provide engraved metal placard meeting UFC requirements outside LOC enclosure. Placard shall read “HVAC Emergency Shutdown”. Stenciled or painted letters are not acceptable.

H. Duplicate annunciator functions of the FMCP for alarm, supervisory, and trouble indications and manual switching functions including acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing.


I. This unit shall meet UL Standard 864, FCC Part 15 requirements.

2.6 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS

A. General Description: 1. UL 268 listed, operating at 24-Vdc, nominal. 2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or

trouble) to the FMCP. 3. Multipurpose type, containing the following:

a. Heat sensor, combination rate-of-rise and fixed temperature. 4. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a

plug-in module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection of building wiring.

5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation.

6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type. Indicating detector has operated and power-on status. 7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog-addressable type,

individually monitored at the FMCP for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition, and individually adjustable for sensitivity from the FMCP. a. Rate-of-rise temperature characteristic shall be selectable at the FMCP for 15 or 20 deg F

per minute. b. Fixed-temperature sensing shall be independent of rate-of-rise sensing and shall be

settable at the FMCP to operate at 135 or 155 deg F. c. Provide multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor.

B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: 1. Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver. 2. Detector Sensitivity: Between 2.5 and 3.5 percent/foot smoke obscuration when tested according

to UL 268A.

C. Duct Smoke Detectors: 1. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:

a. Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver. b. Detector Sensitivity: Between 2.5 and 3.5 percent/foot smoke obscuration when tested

according to UL 268A. 2. UL 268A listed, operating at 24Vdc, nominal. 3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or

trouble) to the FMCP. 4. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a

plug-in module that connects to a fixed base. The fixed base shall be designed for mounting directly to the air duct. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to building wiring. a. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: UL listed for use with the supplied detector. The

enclosure shall comply with NEMA 250 requirements for Type 4X. 5. Self-Restoring: Detectors shall not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore

them to normal operation. 6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type. Indicating detector has operated and power-on status. 7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog-addressable type,

individually monitored at the FMCP for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition, and individually adjustable for sensitivity from the FMCP.

8. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity. 9. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for the specific duct

size, air velocity, and installation conditions. 10. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit.

2.7 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. Description: Equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections.


1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-mounting assembly.

B. Visible Alarm Devices: Xenon strobe lights listed under UL 1971. 1. Fire alarm strobes and speaker strobes Strobes shall have a clear lens with a white trim faceplate

marked “FIRE”. 2. Mass notification strobes and speaker strobes shall have a clear lens with a white trim and an

amber lens with a white trim faceplate marked “ALERT”. 3. Rated Light Output: As indicated on the Drawings. 4. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.

C. Manufacturer shall provide wall mount devices and ceiling mount devices. Devices shall be installed as indicated on Drawings.

D. Voice/Tone Speakers: 1. UL 1480 listed. 2. Range Units: Rated 1/4, 1/2, 1, 2 watts at 70-volts. 3. Mounting: Flush; bi-directional. 4. Matching Transformers: Tap range matched to the acoustical environment of the speaker

location. 5. Device shall be trimmed in white unless indicated on Drawings.

E. Speakers shall be capable of multiple alert tones. 1. a sound-pressure level of 90dBA measured 10 feet from the speaker.

2.8 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE

A. Monitor Module: listed for use in providing a system address for listed alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts.

B. Relay Base Control Module: Pilot duty with 125V, 1A load contact which shall change state when the general alarm is sounded or when prep-programmed conditions are met.

2.9 GUARDS FOR PHYSICAL PROTECTION

A. Manual pull stations in dining area shall have tamper proof covers equivalent to STI Stopper II without sounder.

2.10 TELEPHONE ACCESS

A. System shall be capable of activation and voice messaging through a telephone connection and shall be listed for such use.

2.11 WIRING

A. Wiring shall conform to NFPA 70 Article 760. Wiring for 120 Vac power shall be No. 12 AWG minimum. The SLC wiring shall be copper cable in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements. Wiring for fire alarm dc circuits shall be circuit integrity cable, UL listed FPL, 16 AWG minimum, and comply with UL 1424 and UL 2196 for 2-hour rating.. No. 16 AWG minimum. Voltages shall not be mixed in any junction box, housing, or device, except those containing power supplies and control relays. System field wiring shall be solid copper and installed in metallic conduit or electrical metallic tubing, except that rigid plastic conduit may be used under slab-on-grade. Conductors shall be color coded. Conductors used for the same functions shall be similarly color coded. Wiring code color shall remain uniform throughout the circuit. Pigtail or T-tap connections to signaling circuits, supervisory alarm circuits, and notifications appliance circuits are prohibited.


2.12 FIRE ALARM MONITORING

A. The contractor shall connect the system to base-wide fire reporting system.

B. Provide a Monaco Radio-frequency transceiver and antenna to match the JBSA Ft Sam Houston fire reporting system. See paragraph 2.2F above.

C. This equipment shall be a listed component of the FMCP and shall be installed inside the FMCP fire alarm control panel per manufacturer's criteria.

D. This equipment shall be capable of transmitting to the monitoring service the device address that is in Alarm, Supervisory, and Trouble conditions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Connect FMCP, amplifiers, strobe power supplies, and mass notification booster amplifiers to non-filtered power source.

B. Smoke Detector Spacing: 1. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet. 2. Spacing of heat detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for high ceiling

areas, shall be determined according to Appendix A in NFPA 72. 3. Spacing of heat detectors shall be determined based on guidelines and recommendations in

NFPA 72.

C. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 3 feet from supply diffuser or return opening.

D. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they extend the full width of the duct.

E. Smoke detectors shall not be installed until the construction cleanup of all trades is complete per NFPA 72. Any smoke detector that has been installed prior to the construction cleanup of all trades and without prior written approval of the engineer and local AHJ shall be marked in a permanent manner that will identify it from re-use and shall be replaced prior to commissioning of the system and/or turning over to the Government. Such detectors shall be replaced at the sole expense of the installing contractor. Subject to approval of the engineer and local AHJ this may exclude services, which do not create air-born particles such as telephone/network services, and modular furniture installation. 1. Orange shipping covers, rubber gloves, tape, or other devices shall not be used to try and get

around these basic requirements.

F. Manual pull stations located in public areas that require a tamper resistant cover shall be located on walls such that a 3-inch clearance on each side and 4-inch clearance above and below from other switches, window openings, door frames, etc. is maintained.

G. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install near each smoke detector and each sprinkler flow switch and valve supervisory switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing position.

H. Notification Devices: 1. Audible Alarm Devices: Install wall mounted devices not less than 80 inches to bottom of device

or 6 inches below the ceiling, but not higher than 96 inches unless otherwise noted. Ceiling mounted audible devices at same location or in combination with visible devices are permitted

2. Visible Alarm Devices: Install wall mounted devices adjacent to or within same enclosure as audible alarm indicating device and at least 80 inches to bottom of device or 6 inches below the ceiling, but not higher than 96 inches unless otherwise noted. Ceiling mounted devices shall be permitted with coverage per NFPA 72 tables. All visible alarm indicating devices within the same viewing area shall be synchronized.


3. In large, high ceiling areas, devices may be suspended on rigidly supported threaded conduit.

I. Install wall mounted alarm devices on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grill where finished walls are available in accordance with design documents and specific mounting details.

J. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.

K. Control panels shall be mounted in a neat, orderly, and space-limiting manner. Details in drawings shall be used as a guide and represent allotted space.

L. FMCP: Surface mount with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.

M. LOC/Annunciator: Install with operable switches and pushbuttons not more than 54 inches above the finished floor.

N. Antenna for Radio Alarm Transmitter: Mount to building structure where indicated. Use mounting arrangement and substrate connection that will resist 100-mph wind load with a 1.3 gust factor without damage. Trim antenna to 140.8625 MHz (JBSA Ft Sam Houston standard.)

O. No portion of a FA/MNS fire alarm system shall be installed prior to having plans on site that have been reviewed, approved, and stamped by the Contracting Officer, and/or AHJ. This includes wiring. Approved stamped plans shall be on site at all times while the system is in the installation stage.

3.2 BACK BOXES

A. All speakers are to be installed in at least a 4-inch square deep box with extension ring to limit potential damage to wiring.

3.3 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring according to the following: 1. NECA 1 2. TIA/EIA 568-A 3. NEC Article 760

B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway according to Division 26 requirements. 1. FA/MNS circuits and equipment control wiring associated with the FA/MNS system shall be

installed in a dedicated raceway system. This system shall not be used for any other wire or cable.

2. Devices need to be included on the circuits as indicated on the approved plans and calculations. Changes will need to be evaluated by the designer. Changes in wire routing may require new calculations.

3. Raceway system shall be minimum 3/4 inch EMT Type. 4. FA/MNS conduit shall be factory-colored red. In exposed ceiling areas, conduit may be painted to

match surroundings finish color, but provide 3/4 inch red bands every 10 feet on center.

C. Each circuit entering or exiting the building shall be protected with surge protection. This includes 24vdc, 70vcd, 120vac, and telephone circuits serving the fire alarm system.

D. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended by the manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.


E. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, cabinets, or equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.

F. Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power wiring. Color-code supervisory circuits, magnetic door release and hold-open, Signaling Line Circuits powering strobes, speaker circuits, and Initiating Device Circuits separately. Wiring to Remote Alarm Transmitting Device: 1-inch conduit between the FMCP and the transmitter. Install number of conductors and electrical supervision for connecting wiring as needed to suit monitoring function.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 26 Section Identification for Electrical Systems.

B. Paint FA/MNS system junction boxes and covers red.

C. Each conductor shall be identified as shown on the drawings at each end and at terminal points with wire markers. Attach permanent wire markers within 2 inches of the wire termination. Marker legends shall be visible.

D. Install instructions frame in a location visible from the FMCP.

E. Branch circuit breaker serving FMCP shall be red and labeled "FIRE ALARM CIRCUIT"

3.5 GROUNDING

A. Ground the FMCP and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from main service ground to the FMCP.


A. Contractor Pre-Testing and Record of Completion Testing: 1. This section covers contractor pre-testing and documentation by the installing contractor that

shall be conducted before any commissioning inspection or AHJ testing is scheduled. Contractor shall issue pre-testing paperwork to AAFES, A/E and base fire department showing system performance results for comments. After testing has been accepted, contractor shall coordinate scheduling for Final system acceptance with all parties.

2. Wiring runs shall be tested for continuity, short circuits and grounds before any system devices are installed or energized.

3. Provide the service of a competent, factory-trained engineer or technician authorized by the manufacturer of the equipment to technically supervise and participate during all of the adjustments and tests for the system. All testing shall be in accordance with NFPA 72.

4. Duct and HVAC detectors shall not be installed or in-place when the HVAC systems are first turned on. All HVAC systems shall be run sufficiently to remove loose dust and debris. Failure to protect detectors may result in detector replacement per this Specification.

5. Audibility testing shall not be conducted until all doors, windows, walls, ceilings, and carpeting are in place.

6. All alarm initiating devices shall be observed and logged for correct address and sensitivity. These devices and their bases shall be tagged with adhesive tags located in an area not visible when installed, showing the initials of the installing technician and date.

7. Computer/labeler generated labels with the address number only may be installed on the exterior of the device as long as the background is clear and installed in a quality manner. This will assist in the inspection, testing, maintenance, and trouble-shooting of the system.

8. All smoke detectors shall be commissioned using canned smoke or a method that will functionally test the smoke chamber. The use of magnets for commission testing of smoke detectors is Strictly Prohibited.

9. New detectors that show to be dirty through system sensitivity testing shall be replaced.


10. A systematic record shall be maintained of all readings using schedules or charts of tests and measurements. Areas shall be provided on the logging form for readings, dates and witnesses.

11. Air velocity readings shall be taken and recorded for each HVAC related smoke detector. 12. The installing contractor shall make instruments, tools and labor required to conduct the system

tests available. 13. The following equipment shall be a minimum for conducting the tests:

a. Ladders, scaffolds, or lifts as required to access all installed equipment. b. Multimeter for reading voltage, current and resistance. c. Two way radios, flashlights, screwdrivers, measuring tapes. d. A manufacturer recommended device for measuring airflow through air duct smoke

detector sampling assemblies. e. Calibrated decibel meter. f. Calibrated Intelligibility testing equipment, including a sound making device and listening

stations similar to NTI-Audio XL2 with TalkBox.

B. At minimum the following tests shall be conducted and documented: 1. Open initiating device circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates. 2. Open and short signaling line circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates. 3. Open and short Notification Appliance Circuits and verify that trouble signal actuates. 4. Ground all circuits and verify response of trouble signals. 5. Check presence and audibility of tone throughout building spaces. This includes measuring dBA

levels. 6. Check installation, supervision, and operation of all intelligent smoke detectors using the Walk

Test feature. 7. Each of the alarm conditions that the system is required to detect should be introduced on the

system. Verify the proper receipt and the proper processing of the signal at the FMCP and the correct activation of the control points.

8. Each alarm indicating device circuit shall be tested under standby/battery power. End-of-line voltage readings shall be taken at the end-of-line resistor for Class "B" circuits, or at the booster panel for Class "A" circuits. Any circuit that measures less than 20 volts dc or the nameplate voltage, whichever is higher, shall be considered as failing the design. Note: Some systems incorporating synchronizing modules can impair results. If the module cannot be bypassed for voltage readings, the manufacturer should be contacted for guidance.

C. When the system is equipped with optional features, the manufacturer's manual should be consulted to determine the proper testing procedures. This is intended to address such items as verifying controls performed by individually addressed or grouped devices, sensitivity monitoring, verification functionality and similar.

3.7 ACCEPTANCE TESTING

A. Coordination with other agencies: 1. Test Fire Alarm/Mass Notification system concurrently with HVAC system, and exhaust hood fire

suppression system and after remote signaling capability has been made operational. Performance testing must include all peripheral functions of the FA/MNS system such as ventilating equipment shutdown, fire alarm response to operation of exhaust hood fire suppression system, fire alarm shutdown of fuel source to food preparation equipment, and signaling capability to remote monitoring station. Do not proceed with tests until all systems are operational.

2. Notify interested parties including AHJ, HVAC sub-contractor, and fire suppression system sub-contractor a minimum of 14 calendar days before the scheduled test date.

3. The Fire Protection Engineers that seals the system shop drawing shall be present for the final acceptance testing to be done in the presence of the base Fire Depratment and Store Manager. Testing report shall be signed by QFPE, fire department and Store Manager. If testing does not pass during punchout, contractor will be held responsible for trip costs for any costs associated with retesting.


B. This section details criteria for commissioning inspections by AHJ’s and AAFES or their designated representative the government. 1. This stage of testing shall not be scheduled or conducted until all pre-testing has been completed

and is in compliance with applicable requirements. 2. A signed Record of Completion shall be provided to the inspector prior to starting this testing. 3. The contractor is responsible for testing all components in accordance with the manufacturers

required and suggested procedures and in accordance with NFPA 72. If this Specification incorporates a detailed Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP) prepared by the engineer than it shall also be followed.

4. A program matrix shall be provided by the installing contractor referencing each alarm input to every output function affected as a result of an alarm condition on that input.

5. The commissioning inspector shall use the system record drawings and other documents specified under this Specification during the testing procedure to verify operation as programmed. In conducting the commissioning test, the inspector shall request demonstration of any or all input and output functions.

6. The items tested shall include but not be limited to the following: a. System wiring shall be tested to show the following results and the systems subsequence

operation: 1) Open, Shorted or Grounded Circuits. 2) Primary and Battery power disconnected. 3) End-of-line voltage readings on notification circuits.

b. System notification circuits and appliances operate as programmed. Audibility and visual levels meet required standards.

c. A minimum of 15 dBA above ambient shall be obtained in every occupiable space, including normally non-occupied spaces per NFPA 72. This includes storage rooms, electrical rooms, telephone rooms, and any other occupiable space.

d. System shall demonstrate the correct messages at the FMCP and any remote annunciator. e. System off-site reporting shall be verified for alarm, supervisory, trouble, correct address,

facility name, contact phone number, and contact name.

C. System shall be tested for stand-by battery backup as outlined in this Specification.

3.8 FINAL DOCUMENTATION

A. Final documentation shall be supplied to AAFES and shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. System record (as-built) drawings and wiring details including one set of reproducible drawings,

and a CD ROM with copies of the record drawings in AUTOCAD .dwg format, or .dxf format for use in a CAD drafting program.

2. System Operating, Installation and Maintenance Manuals. 3. System matrix showing input signals to output commands. 4. Provide a copy of the FMCP system programming on a CD-ROM. 5. NFPA 72 closeout documents. 6. Intelligibility testing scores with locations receivers were placed marked on a plan.

B. A copy of all above materials and documentation shall be provided in the as-built plan cabinet.

3.9 FINAL SYSTEM TRAINING

A. The installation contractor shall familiarize AAFES and/or AAFES’s designated representative with location of all FA/MNS panels, modules, devices, wire routing, and plan cabinet contents.

B. The installation contractor shall furnish detailed system training as follows: 1. A simplified training manual on system operation unique to the system shall be prepared and

presented AAFES. This manual shall cover key items and day-to-day operation. Such manual shall be presented in a professional and legible format such as that provided through use of a Microsoft PowerPoint, or Microsoft Word.

2. AAFES shall be provided with at least 3 hard-copies and an electronic format that can be edited through commonly available software.


3. The training program shall be presented such that AAFES can readily train new staff over the life of the system.

4. Training in the receipt, handling and acknowledgment of alarms. This shall include emphasis that alarms shall not be silenced until after a complete and thorough investigation has been conducted. If there is a hazard, then only the fire department is authorized to silence an alarm.

5. Sequence of operation for all interconnected systems. 6. Training in the system operation including manual control of output functions from the system

control panel.

C. The total training requirement shall be a minimum of 4 hours, but shall be sufficient to cover all items specified. The contractor shall provide two training sessions (Morning/Afternoon) to allow base personnel to attend one of the sessions.

3.10 ADJUSTING AND FOLLOW-UP

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to project outside normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

B. Follow-Up Tests and Inspections: After date of Substantial Completion, test the fire alarm system complying with testing and visual inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Perform tests and inspections listed for three monthly, and one quarterly, periods. AAFES shall be encouraged to participate in these services.

C. Annual Test and Inspection: Eleven months after date of Substantial Completion, test the Fire Alarm/Mass Notification system complying with the testing and visual inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Perform tests and inspections listed for monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections. Include follow-up intelligibility testing to confirm speaker performance. AAFES should be encouraged to participate in these services as reinforcement of system operability.

3.11 WARRANTY AND SERVICES

A. The Contractor shall warranty the entire system for electrical and mechanical failures for a period of one year. The warranty shall begin with the completion of the commissioning testing or when beneficial use to AAFES is determined and so documented.

B. The FMCP and all system components shall have a 1-year manufacturer warranty.

END 28 31 76

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK Section 31 10 00 - SITE CLEARING

SITE CLEARING 31 10 00-1

1. GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work of this Section Includes:

1. Clearing and grubbing 2. Removal of surface debris. 3. Removal of asphalt paving, concrete paving, curbs, and curb and gutter. 4. Disconnecting, capping, sealing or removal of existing utilities, as indicated on

the drawings. 5. Removal of existing fence. 6. Provisions for protection, removal, replacement and disposal.

B. Related Sections

1. Section 01 00 00 - Requirements of JBSA- Sam Houston 2. Section 01 32 00 – Construction Progress Schedule 3. Section 01 33 00 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals 4. Section 01 35 56 – Storm Water Pollution Prevention Measures 5. Section 02 41 16 - Structure Demolition 6. Section 31 20 00 - Earthwork

1.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS/REFERENCES

A. Contractor shall comply with the requirements of specification Section 01 00 00 – Requirements of JBSA- Fort Sam Houston.

B. Streets, roads, trees, adjacent property, and other works to remain shall be protected throughout the work by the General Contractor.

C. Maintain all bench marks, monuments, and other reference points. If disturbed or destroyed, replace as directed by the Contracting Officer. Contractor shall contact the Contracting Officer if additional bench mark information is required.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. In accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals.

B. Construction and demolition schedule.

C. Record drawings that accurately final grades, identify location of utilities capped off or abandoned in place, location of foundations or appurtenances abandoned and covered, or items remaining that would affect future work on site.


A. Comply with local, state, and federal codes, rules and regulations applicable to demolition work including but not limited to erosion control, air pollution, noise pollution, and waste disposal.

B. Contractor shall obtain and pay for any permits required for demolition and disposal permits.

1.5 PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS

A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent structures.



B. Maintain protected egress and access at all times.

C. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers, and security devices.

D. Conduct operations with minimum interference to public or private thoroughfares.

E. Do not close or obstruct roadways and sidewalks without permits.

1.6 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

A. If Contractor encounters a hazardous material during demolition process, it shall cease operations immediately and notify the Contracting Officer of its findings.

B. Contractor shall not reinstate demolition operations until areas have been cleared for continuation of demolition work.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS FOR UTILITY ABANDONMENT IN PLACE AND REMOVAL

A. Bulkhead Concrete

1. 3000 psi at 28 days 2. ¾-inch maximum aggregate size 3. 4-inch slump

3. EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Verify that existing plant life designated to remain is tagged or identified.

B. Prior to commencement of work, the contractor shall identify the proper area for placing removed materials.

C. Underground Utilities:

1. Location of the existing utilities indicated is approximate. The Contractor shall physically verify the location, identification and elevation of the existing utilities indicated prior to starting construction.

2. Maintain utility services until removal work is authorized by Contracting Officer. 3. Remove existing site utility service lines and appurtenances within proposed

building footprint or as indicated on the drawings. 4. Remove utility structures including but not limited to, manholes, cleanouts,

inlets, catch basins, and similar appurtenances in their entirety.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. Where pedestrian and driver safety is endangered, use traffic barricades with flashing lights.

B. Trees and vegetation to be left standing shall be protected from damage during construction operations. Contractor shall submit details of protection system. Tree protection shall extend to one foot beyond the tree’s drip line.

C. Protect benchmarks, survey control points, pavements to remain, existing structures, and all existing facilities which remain from damage or displacement.

D. Provide contractor design shoring, bracing and protection systems as required to



prevent damage or displacement to new work and existing facilities.

E. Protection and Removal of Utility Lines

1. Existing utility lines that are shown on the plans or the locations of which are made known to the Contractor prior to excavation and that are to be retained, as well as utility lines constructed during excavation operations, shall be protected from damage during all site work operations, and if damaged shall be repaired by the Contractor at no expense to AAFES. In the event that the Contractor damages existing utility lines that are not shown on the plans, or the locations of which have not been known to the Contractor, report of such damage shall be made immediately to the Contracting Officer. When utility lines that are to be removed are encountered within the area of operations, the Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer in ample time for the necessary measures to be taken to prevent interruption of the service.

2. The contractor shall be required to hand excavate adjacent to active utilities. Any damages to existing utilities shall be repaired by the Contractor at no cost to as identified in specification Section 01 00 00 – Requirements of JBSA- Fort Sam Houston.

3.3 REMOVAL / DEMOLITION

A. Remove asphalt paving, concrete paving, curbs, and curb and gutter in their entirety as indicated on the drawings. Neatly saw cut edges at right angle to surface.

B. Remove existing utilities, utility piping, utility poles and all structures in their entirety as indicated on the drawings.

C. Remove existing fence, including pickets, line posts, and concrete foundations in their entirety as indicated on the drawings.

D. Keep work sprinkled with water if necessary to control dust. Contractor shall provide hoses and water main or hydrant connections for this purpose. Contractor shall obtain permits and pay for water usage as required by JBSA – Fort Sam Houston.

E. Backfill excavated, open pits and holes caused as a result of demolition in accordance with Section 31 21 00 Earth Moving.

3.4 SEWER AND WATER SERVICE DISCONNECTIONS

A. Sewer Service Disconnection: Licensed plumber shall disconnect sewer services and plug in conformance with local code, and governing Municipality shall inspect and approve prior to demolition or excavation.

B. Water Service Disconnection: Licensed plumber shall disconnect water services and stubs for buildings or properties within demolition work in conformance with local codes and governing Municipality shall inspect and approve prior to demolition or excavation.

C. Sanitary and Storm Sewers shall be securely plugged with bulkhead concrete to prevent entry of water and debris into the active system. Sewers shall be



bulkheaded at a pipe joint or saw cut vertical joint if a pipe joint is not present at the termination point indicated on the drawings.

D. Water service(s) shall be located at the connection to the water main. Contractor shall close the valve and sawcut the water service line. Contractor shall verify the valve is tightly closed without any apparent leaks. Contracting officer shall verify valve is closed tightly prior to placement of backfill. Contractor is responsible for notifying Contracting Officer a min. of 3 days before water service abandonment and inspection.

3.5 CLEARING

A. Clearing shall consist of the felling, trimming, and cutting of trees into sections and the satisfactory disposal of the trees and other vegetation designated for removal, including downed timber, snags, brush, and rubbish occurring within the areas to be cleared. Clearing shall also include the removal and disposal of structures that obtrude, encroach upon, or otherwise obstruct the work. Trees, stumps, roots, brush, and other vegetation in areas to be cleared shall be cut off flush with or below the original ground surface, except such trees and vegetation as may be indicated or directed to be left standing. Any application of any herbicide or pesticide must be pre-approved by the Environmental Division of Base Civil Engineering (BCE) prior to the application.

3.6 GRUBBING

A. Grubbing shall consist of the removal and disposal of stumps, roots larger than 3 inches in diameter, and matted roots from the designated grubbing areas, which are all areas to be improved. Material to be grubbed, together with logs and other organic or metallic debris not suitable for foundation purposes, shall be removed to a depth of not less than 24 inches below the original surface level of the ground in areas indicated to be grubbed and in areas indicated as construction areas under this contract. Depressions made by grubbing shall be filled with suitable material and compacted to make the surface conform with the original adjacent surface of the ground.

3.7 DRAINAGE / DEWATERING

A. See specification Section 01 55 00 – Temporary Facilities, Barriers and Controls for requirements.

3.8 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

A. If in the performance of the work the Contractor encounters any abnormal materials such as, but not limited to drums, tanks, stained earth, unexploded munitions, or unusual odors during site clearing operations, the work shall be temporarily discontinued, equipment left in place, the area cordoned off and the proper authorities notified, including Base, the Exchange Contracting Officer, AE and PM. The area is considered to contain hazardous or toxic material. Work may be resumed only after a determination has been made by the proper authorities and unsafe materials removed and the area declared safe.

3.9 REPLACEMENT OF DAMAGED AREAS

A. Contractor shall repair or replace at no additional cost to the AAFES any damage



resulting from, or incidental to, construction.

1. Replacement or repair of seeded areas, sod, bituminous pavement and concrete pavement, structures, shrubbery, trees, drives, walks, and/or fences damaged by construction work, or work incidental thereto, shall be performed by the Contractor as soon as is practical.

2. Replacement shall include existing trees and shrubs not scheduled for removal, that do not show definite signs of life and/or satisfactory growth during the growing period following construction.

B. Where removals leave holes and damage surfaces exposed in the finished work, patch and repair these holes and damaged surfaces to match adjacent finished surfaces.

3.10 DISPOSAL

A. Removing From Construction Site:

1. All concrete, asphalt pavement, excavated materials, below grade utilities and structures, and demolition debris not required for construction shall be removed in accordance with the provisions of specifications Section 01 00 00 – Requirements of JBSA- Fort Sam Houston.

2. The General Contractor shall be responsible for contacting the Contracting Officer and the JBSA- Fort Sam Houston BCE prior to the start of excavation and disposal of materials.

3. Immediately remove demolished material from site unless approved demolition procedure and schedule submitted in accordance with this section provides otherwise.

4. Relics, antiques, and similar objects remain the property of JBSA – Fort Sam Houston.

5. Burning or burying shall not be permitted.

3.11 QUALITY CONTROL

A. The Contractor shall establish and maintain quality control for operations under this section to ensure compliance with contract requirements and maintain records of his quality control for all materials, equipment, and construction operations, including but not limited to the following:

1. Clear areas flush or below original ground surface. 2. Disposal of cleared and grubbed materials.

B. A copy of these records and Contractor tests, as well as the records of corrective action taken, shall be furnished to JBSA- Fort Sam Houston BCE as directed by the Contracting Officer.

END 31 10 00

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK Section 31 20 00 EARTHWORK

EARTHWORK 31 20 00-1

1. PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work of this Section includes the following:

1. Soil Materials 2. Excavating for building foundations, slabs-on-grade, paving, curbs and gutters,

landscaping and site utilities. 3. Removal of overburden 4. Fill under slabs-on-grade and paving. 5. Consolidation and compaction. 6. Fill for over-excavation. 7. Backfilling and compaction of building and site structures. 8. Excavating, and compacting trenches for utilities from 5 feet outside building to

tie to existing utilities. 9. Landscape Grading

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 01 00 00 - Requirements of JBSA- Sam Houston 2. Section 01 10 10 – Unit Prices 3. Section 01 35 56 - Storm Water Pollution Prevention Measures 4. Section 01 45 16 Quality Control 5. Section 01 45 29 Testing Laboratory Services 6. Section 31 10 00 – Site Clearing 7. Section 31 23 23 – Utility Backfill Materials 8. Section 31 23 33 – Excavation Backfill and Compaction for Utilities

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill – Soil or crushed stone used to fill the space between the excavation and the exterior of a structure or around the foundation walls to provide a means for water to drain away from the foundation.

B. Fill – Soil, crushed stone or overburden material used to raise an existing grade or a man-made deposit.

C. Utility – Any buried pipe, duct, conduit or cable.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)

1. AASHTO T 180 - Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 10-lb Rammer and an 18-in. Drop.

B. ASTM International

1. ASTM D 1556 - Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method.

2. ASTM D 1557 - Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort 56,000 ft-lbf/ft.

3. ASTM D 2167 - Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method.

4. ASTM D2487 - Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes. 5. ASTM D 2922 - Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place

by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).


6. ASTM D 3017 - Test Methods for Moisture Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures.

C. State of Texas, Department of Transportation (TX DOT)

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. All submittal shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals.

B. Samples:

1. Submit 10 pound samples of existing soil and each type of fill to field office. All sample containers shall be identified with the name of the material source.

2. Provide copies of all material testing reports completed for the project within 48 hours of completing the individual test. Along with each individual test result, provide a running spreadsheet of all individual test results.


A. Specification Section 01 45 16 - Quality Control and specification Section 01 45 29 - Testing Laboratory Services: Testing and analysis of soil material.

B. Testing and Analysis of Subsoil Material: Perform in accordance with ASTM D1557 and ASTM D2487.

C. Testing and Analysis of Topsoil Material: Composition testing as specified herein.

D. If tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest.

E. Provide materials of each type from same source throughout the Work.

2. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. Source: Materials classified below as Backfill and Fill Material, and Select Material shall be obtained from source outside of JBSA- Sam Houston. For additional requirements, refer to specification Section 01 00 00 – Requirements of JBSA- Sam Houston.

B. Soil Materials: Free of debris, roots, wood, scrap material, vegetation, refuse, soft unsound particles, and deleterious, or objectionable materials. Unless specified otherwise, the maximum particle shall be one-half the lift thickness or 3", whichever is smaller, in any dimension at the intended location.

C. Common Fill: Approved, unclassified soil material with the characteristics required to compact to the soil density specified for the intended location. In-situ sandy clay fill may be re-compacted as common fill, provided it is free of any organic or other deleterious material.

D. Aggregate Base: Aggregate base shall be from a regional facility. Aggregate base shall consist of materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered with 500 miles of the Project site. Furnish aggregate that conforms to TxDOT Standard Specifications Item 247, Type A, Grades 1 or 2.

E. Select Fill: Select Fill shall be crushed stone or gravel aggregate that shall conform to one of the following specifications:


1. Imported Crushed Limestone Base. Imported crushed limestone base shall conform to TxDOT 2004 Standard Specifications for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges, Item 247, Flexible Base, Type A or B, Grades 1 or 2

2. Granular Pit Run Materials. Granular Pit Run Materials shall be GC, SC and combination soils (clayey gravels) as classified according to the Unified Soil Classification System (USCS). Granular Pit Run Materials shall have a maximum liquid limit not exceeding 40, a plasticity index between 7 and 15, and a maximum particle size not exceeding 4-inches. If Granular Pit Run Materials are used as select fill, grain size analyses and Atterburg limits must be performed by the Contractor during placement at the rate of one test each per 5,000 cubic yards of material.

3. Low PI Materials. Low PI materials shall consist of CL clay as classified according to the USCS. Low PI materials shall shall have a maximum liquid limit not exceeding 40, a plasticity index between 7 and 15, and a maximum particle size not exceeding 4-inches. If Low PI materials are used as select fill, grain size analyses and Atterburg limits must be performed by the Contractor during placement at the rate of one test each per 5,000 cubic yards of material.

F. Lime Treated Subgrade: Lime Treated Subgrade shall conform to TxDOT Item No. 260 “Lime Treatment – Road Mixed”. Acceptable forms of lime shall be

1. Type A Hydrated Lime 2. Type B Commercial Lime Slurry 3. Type C Quicklime, Grade ‘DS’ or ‘S’. 4. Contractor shall select prior to construction, the grade of lime to be used and

shall notifiy the Contracting Officer in writing prior to changing from one grade to another. Lime shall be placed in slurry form only.

5. Lime shall be TxDOT DMS-6350 “Lime and Lime Slurry.” a. Mix Design shall be in accordance with TxDOT Tex -121-E.

G. Existing Soil Material: See specification Section 02 31 00 - Subsurface Investigation & Geotechnical Report for additional information.

2.2 TOPSOIL MATERIALS

A. Existing Soil: Modify existing soil to conform to the requirements specified in paragraph entitled "Composition."

B. On-Site Topsoil: Reuse surface soil stripped and stockpiled on site if requirements specified for topsoil in paragraph entitled "Composition" are met.

C. Off-Site Topsoil: Conform to requirements specified in paragraph entitled "Composition." Additional topsoil shall be furnished by the contractor.

D. Composition: Containing from 5 to 20 percent organic matter, reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, brush, weeds, and other litter and free of roots, stumps, stones larger than 2 inches in any dimension, and other extraneous or toxic matter harmful to plant growth. On-site soil may be used, if it is determined acceptable by the Contracting Officer. Other components shall be within the following percentages:

Silt 25-50 Clay 10-30 Sand 20-35 pH 5 to 7.6


Soluble Salts 600 ppm maximum

2.3 UNSUITABLE MATERIALS

A. In-Situ soil or other material which can be identified as having insufficient strength characteristics or stability to carry intended loads without excessive consolidation or loss of stability. Also backfill material which contains refuse, frozen material, large rocks, debris, soluble particles, and other material which could damage the pipe or cause the backfill not to compact.

B. Vegetation, debris, decayed vegetable matter, sod, mulch, and rubbish underneath paved areas or concrete slabs.

3. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations.

B. Protect plant life, lawns, and other features remaining as a portion of final landscaping.

C. Protect bench marks, survey control points, existing structures, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. Prevent displacement or loose soil from falling into excavation; maintain soil stability.

B. Newly graded areas shall be protected from traffic, erosion, and any settlement or washing away that may occur from any cause, prior to acceptance. Damaged areas shall be repaired and grades re-established to the required elevations and slopes at no additional cost to AAFES until such time that newly planted vegetation has stabilized the slopes.

C. Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundation from freezing. Care shall be taken to prevent excessive drying or wetting of exposed soils.

3.3 SUB-GRADE PREPARATION

A. Preparation

1. Areas to receive fil or support pavements shall be stripped of all vegetation and organic topsoil.

B. Proof Rolling

1. Proof rolling shall be done on an exposed subgrade free of surface water (wet conditions resulting from rainfall) which would promote degradation of an otherwise acceptable subgrade. After stripping, excavation and scarifying, proof roll the existing subgrade of the pavement with a loaded tandem-axle dump truck or similar heavy rubber tired vehicle with minimum axial load of nine (9) tons. Operate the roller in a systematic manner to ensure the number of passes overall areas, and at speeds between 2 1/2 to 3 1/2 miles per hour).

2. Proof rolling shall be performed under the observation of a geotechnical engineer and the Contracting Officer. Notify the Contracting Officer a minimum of three (3) days prior to proof rolling. Upon approval of the sub-grade by the geotechnical engineer, the Contractor may commence placement of base


course. 3. If the geotechnical engineer does not approve the sub-grade, the contractor

shall immediately notify the Contracting Officer of the unsatisfactory condition for further direction.

C. Moisture Conditioning

1. After completion of proof rolling operations, and just prior to pavement or flexible base placement, the exposed subgrade shall be moisture conditioned by scarifying to a minimum depth of 6-inches and recompacted to a minimum of 95 of the maximum density as determined from TxDOT Tex-114-E. The moisture content of the subgrade shall be maintained within the range of optimum moisture content to 3 percentage points above optimum until permanently covered.

D. Lime Treatment

1. General a. When lime is furnished in trucks, the weight of lime shall be determined

on certified scales and delivered to the job site with exit ports sealed at the plant.

2. Dosage a. On-site soil shall be treated with 4% lime by dry unit weight. Imported

materials shall have laboratory testing performed, prior to importing the soil, to determine the percentage of lime required and concentration of soluble sulfates. Fill samples for imported material shall be submitted for approval a minimum of 14 days prior to importing the material on-site.

3. Preparation of Subgrade or Existing Base a. The completed course shall be uniformly treated, free from loose or

segregated areas, of uniform density and moisture content, well bound for its full depth and shall have a smooth surface.

b. Prior to treating existing material, it shall be shaped to conform to the typical sections, as shown on the plans.

c. Before pulverizing or scarifying an existing material, when directed by the Contracting Officer, the Contractor shall proof roll the area in accordance with TxDOT Item 216, “Proof Rolling.”

d. Soft spots shall be corrected as directed by the Contracting Officer. When the Contractor elects to use a cutting and pulverizing machine that will process the material to the plan depth, the Contractor will not be required to excavate to the secondary grade or windrow the material. This method will be permitted only if a machine is provided which will insure that the material is cut uniformly to the proper depth and which has cutters that will plane the secondary grade to a uniform surface over the entire width of the cut. The machine shall provide a visible indication of the depth of cut at all times.

e. In lieu of using the cutting and pulverizing machine, the Contractor shall excavate and windrow the material to expose the secondary grade to the typical sections, lines and grades as shown on the plans or as established by the Contracting Officer.

4. Pulverization a. The existing pavement or base material shall be pulverized or scarified so

that 100 % shall pass the 2-½ inch sieve. 5. Application


a. The percentage by weight or pounds per square yard of lime to be added will be as shown on the plans and may be varied by the Contracting Officer if conditions warrant. Lime shall be spread only on that area where the mixing operations can be completed during the same working day.

b. Unless otherwise approved by the Contracting Officer, the lime operation shall not be started when the air temperature is below 40ºF and falling, but may be started when the air temperature is above 35ºF and rising. The temperature will be taken in the shade and away from artificial heat. Lime shall not be placed when weather conditions in the opinion of the Contracting Officer are unsuitable.

c. The application and mixing of lime with the material shall be accomplished by the methods herein described as “Slurry Placing.” “Dry Placing” is not allowed. 1.) Type A Hydrated Lime shall be mixed with water to form a slurry

with a solids content approved by the Contracting Officer. 2.) Type B Commercial Lime Slurry shall be delivered to the project in

slurry form at or above the minimum dry solids content approved by the Contracting Officer. The distribution of lime at the rate(s) shown on the plans or approved by the Contracting Officer shall be attained by successive passes over a measured section of roadway until the proper lime content has been secured.

3.) When Type C Quicklime is applied as slurry, the amount of dry quicklime shall be 80 percent of the amount shown on the plans. The slurry shall contain at least the minimum dry solids content approved by the Contracting Officer. The residue from the slurrying procedure shall be spread uniformly over the length of the roadway currently being processed unless otherwise approved by the Contracting Officer. This residue is primarily inert material with little stabilizing value, but may contain a small amount of quicklime particles that slake slowly. A concentration of these particles could cause the compacted stabilized material to swell during slaking.

4.) Slurry shall be of such consistency that it can be applied uniformly without difficulty. When the distributor truck is not equipped with an agitator, the Contractor shall have a standby pump available on the project for agitating the lime and water as required by the Contracting Officer in case of undue delays in dispersing the slurry.

6. Mixing a. Begin Mixing within 6 hours of lime application. During the interval

between application and mixing, hydrated lime that has been exposed to the open air for a period of six (6) hours or more or to excessive loss due to washing or blowing will not be accepted for payment.

b. Initial Mixing. 1.) The material and lime shall be thoroughly mixed. The material and

lime shall be brought to the proper moisture content and left to mellow for 1 to 4 days. When pebble grade quicklime is used, allow the mixture to mellow for 2 to 4 days as approved by the Contracting Officer.


a) During the mellowing period, the material shall be kept moist as directed by the Inspector.

b) When shown on the plans or approved by the Contracting Officer, the pulverization requirement may be waived when the material contains a substantial quantity of aggregate.

c. Final Mixing 1.) After the required mellowing time, the material shall be uniformly

mixed by approved methods. If the soil binder-lime mixture contains clods, they shall be reduced in size by the use of approved pulverization methods.

2.) Following mixing, a sample of the material shall be obtained for pulverization testing. All non-slaking aggregates retained on the ¾ inch sieve will be removed from the sample. The remainder of the material shall meet the following pulverization requirement when tested by TXDOT Test Method Tex-101-E, Part III: a) Minimum passing 1 ¾” sieve 100 b) Minimum passing ¾” sieve 85 c) Minimum passing No. 4 sieve 60

7. Compaction. a. Prior to compaction, the material shall be aerated or sprinkled as

necessary to provide the optimum moisture. Compaction of the mixture shall begin immediately after final mixing and in no case more than 24 hours after final mixing.

b. Compaction shall continue until the entire depth of the mixture is uniformly compacted. Throughout this entire operation, the shape of the course shall be maintained by blading, and the surface upon completion shall be smooth and in conformity with the typical sections, lines and grades as shown on the plans or as established by the Contracting Officer. 1.) Ordinary Compaction. Roll with approved compaction equipment,

as directed. Correct irregularities, depressions, and weak spots immediately by scarifying the areas affected, adding or removing treated material as required, reshaping, and recompacting.

2.) Density Control. Each course shall be sprinkled as required and compacted to the extent necessary to provide not less than 95 percent of the optimum density. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, the Contracting Officer will determine roadway density of completed sections in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-115-E. The Contracting Officer may accept the section if no more than 1 of the 5 most recent density tests is below the specified density and the failing test is no more than 3 pcf below the specified density.

3.) When the material fails to meet the density requirements, or should the material lose the required stability, density or finish before the next course is placed, or the project is accepted, it shall be reworked as specified below.

8. Reworking a Section. a. When a section is reworked within 72 hours after completion of

compaction, the Contractor shall rework the section to provide the required compaction. When a section is reworked more than 72 hours


after completion of compaction, the Contractor shall add 25 percent of the specified rate of lime. Reworking shall include loosening, road mixing as approved by the Contracting Officer, compacting, and finishing. When a section is reworked, a new optimum density will be determined from the reworked material in accordance with TXDOT Test Method Tex-121-E, part II and shall compact in-place to a minimum of 95% of this density.

9. Finishing. a. Immediately after completing compaction, clip, skin, or tight-blade the

surface of the lime treated material with a maintainer or subgrade trimmer to a depth of approximately ¼-inch. Remove loosened material and dispose of it at an approved location. Roll the clipped surface immediately with a pneumatic-tire roller until a smooth surface is attained. Add small increments of water as needed during rolling. Shape and maintain the course and surface in conformity with the typical sections, lines and grades shown on the plans or as directed. Finish grade of constructed subgrade in accordance with the following grade tolerances” 1.) Staged Construction. Grade to within 0.1-foot in the cross-section

and 0.1-foot in 16-feet measured longitudinally. 2.) Turnkey Construction. Grade to within ½-inch in the cross-section

and ½-inch in 16-feet measured longitudinally. 3.) Do not surface patch.

10. Curing. a. After the final layer or course of the lime treated material has been

compacted, it shall be brought to the required lines and grades in accordance with the typical sections. The completed section shall then be finished by rolling with a pneumatic tire or other suitable roller. The completed section shall be moist cured or prevented from drying by addition of an asphalt material at the rate of 0.05 to 0.20 gallons per square yard. Curing shall continue for 2 to 5 days before further courses are added or traffic is permitted, unless otherwise approved by the Contracting Officer.

b. Lime treated material may be covered by other courses, the day following finishing, when approved by the Contracting Officer. When the plans provide for the treated material to be covered by other courses of material, the next course shall be applied within 14 calendar days after final compaction is completed, unless otherwise approved by the Contracting Officer.

11. Measurement: When Lime is furnished in trucks, the weight of lime will be determined on certified scales, or the Contractor must provide a set of standard platform scales at a location approved by the Engineer. Scales must conform to the requirements of TxDOT Standard Specification Item 520, “Weighing and Measuring Equipment.” a. Hydrated Lime.

1.) Dry. Lime will be measured by the ton (Dry Weight). 2.) Slurry. Lime slurry will be measured by the ton (dry weight) of the

hydrated lime used to prepare the slurry at the site. 3.) Commercial Lime Slurry. Lime slurry will be measured by the ton

(dry weight) as calculated from the minimum percent dry solids content of the slurry, multiplied by the weight of the slurry in tons delivered.


b. Quicklime.

1.) Dry. Lime will be measured by the ton (dry weight) of the

quicklime. 2.) Slurry. Lime slurry will be measured by the ton (dry weight) of the

quicklime used to prepare the slurry multiplied by a conversion factor of 1.28 to give the quantity of equivalent hydrated lime, which will be the basis of the payment

12. PAYMENT: Work performed and materials furnished as prescribed by this item

and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for as follows: “Lime” will be paid for at the unit price bid per ton of 2,000 pounds for “Lime” of the type specified, not to exceed 1% of the calculated quantity (based on delivered weight), which price shall be full compensation for furnishing all lime. “Lime Treatment for Subgrade” will be paid for at the contract unit price bid per square yard, which price shall be full compensation for all correction of secondary subgrade, for loosening, mixing, pulverizing, spreading, drying, application of lime, water content of the slurry, shaping and maintaining, for all sprinkling and rolling, for all manipulations required, for all hauling and freight involved, for all tools, equipment, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work.

13. BID ITEM:

a. TxDOT Item 108.1 - Lime Treated Subgrade - (inches compacted depth) -

per square yard b. TxDOT Item 108.2 - Lime - per ton

3.4 EXCAVATING

A. Underpin adjacent structures which may be damaged by excavating work.

B. Excavate existing soils to accommodate building foundations, slabs-on-grade, paving and site structures, and construction operations, and detention basins.

C. Excavate sufficiently outside the finished lines of walls to allow for placement and removal of forms where required.

D. Slope banks with machine to angle of repose or less until shored.

E. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of existing soil.

F. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations.

G. Grade top perimeter of excavating to prevent surface water from draining into excavation.

H. In the area under foundations, buildings, or as indicated on the drawings, undocumented fill material shall be removed to expose competent naturally deposited soils. Contractor shall refer to the Geotechnical Report. Level off bottom of all excavations for foundations to exact depth. All foundations must be placed on


undisturbed earth or compacted fill, unless otherwise directed by the Contracting Officer. Areas of over excavation under foundations, buildings, or as indicated on the drawings shall be brought to correct level using Common Fill. Notify the Contracting Officer of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected Work in area until notified to resume work.

I. Any existing drainage or utility lines which may be uncovered and/or broken or destroyed shall be repaired and protected at the contractor’s expense to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer.

3.5 STOCKPILING

A. Stockpile excavated material in area designated on site.

1. Stockpile in sufficient quantities to meet Project schedule and requirements. 2. Separate differing materials with dividers or stockpile apart to prevent mixing. 3. Prevent intermixing of soil types or contamination.

B. Direct surface water away from stockpile site to prevent erosion or deterioration of materials.

C. Remove stockpile, leave area in a clean and neat condition. Grade site surface to prevent free standing surface water.

3.6 DRAINAGE/DEWATERING

A. Dispose of surface water which may accumulate in open excavations, unfinished fills, or other low areas. Surface dewatering shall include rerouting of any storm water runoff or natural drainage if necessary.

B. Groundwater flowing toward or into excavations shall be controlled to prevent sloughing or excavation slopes and walls, boils, uplift and heave in the excavation and to eliminate interference with orderly progress of construction.

C. Rework by the contractor due to insufficient drainage / dewatering techniques during construction shall be performed at no additional expense to AAFES.

D. Perform Dewatering in accordance with Texas EPA rules and regulations.

3.7 UTILITY TRENCHING

A. Excavation:

1. Trenches shall be of the necessary width for proper laying of pipe, cables, or ducts.

2. The banks of trenches shall be as nearly vertical as practicable. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of existing soil.

3. During excavation, material suitable for backfilling shall be piled in an orderly manner a sufficient distance from the banks of the trench to avoid overloading and to prevent slides or cave-ins. All excavated materials not required or suitable for backfill shall be piled as necessary to prevent surface water from flowing into trenches or other excavations, and any water accumulating therein shall be removed by pumping or by other approved methods.

4. The bottom of the trenches shall be accurately graded to provide uniform bearing and support for each section of the pipe on undisturbed soil at every point along its entire length, except for the portions of pipe sections where it is necessary to excavate for bedding bell holes and for the proper sealing of pipe


joints, and as hereinafter specified. 5. Bell holes and depressions for joints shall be dug after the trench bottom has

been graded, and in order that the pipe rest on the prepared bottom for as nearly its full length as practicable. Bell holes and depressions shall be only of such length, depth, and width as required for properly making the particular type of joint.

6. Stone and rubble shall be removed as necessary to avoid point bearing. 7. Except as hereinafter specified for wet or otherwise unstable material,

overdepths shall be backfilled with materials specified for backfilling the lower portion of trenches.

8. Whenever wet or otherwise unstable material that is incapable of properly supporting the pipe is encountered in the bottom of the trench, such material shall be over excavated to a depth to allow for construction of a stable pipe bedding. The trench shall be backfilled to the proper grade with suitable approved materials.

3.8 LANDSCAPE GRADING

A. Examination

1. Verify building and trench backfilling have been inspected. 2. Verity substrate base has been contoured and compacted

B. Substrate Preparation

1. Eliminate uneven areas and low spots. 2. Remove debris, roots, branches, stones, in excess of ½ inch in size. 3. Scarify surface to a depth of 6-inches (150mm) where topsoil is scheduled.

Scarify in areas where equipment used for hauling and spreading topsoil has compacted topsoil.

C. Placing Topsoil

1. Place topsoil in areas where seeding and planting is required to thickness as scheduled.

2. Place topsoil during dry weather 3. Fine grade topsoil to eliminate rough or low areas. Maintain profiles and

contour of subgrade. 4. Remove roots, weed, rocks, and foreign material while spreading. 5. Manually spread topsoil close to existing plant life and building to prevent

damage. 6. Lightly compact placed topsoil. 7. Surplus imported subsoil and topsoil shall be removed from JBSA- Sam

Houston. 8. Leave stockpile area and site clean and raked, ready to receive landscaping. 9. Tolerance of topsoil shall be plus or minus ½ inch. 10. Compacted topsoil shall be of the following thicknesses:

a. Lawn areas: 4-inches b. Landscape beds: 8-inches c. Parking Lot Islands: 12-inches

3.9 FILL & COMPACTION

A. Compact subgrade to the density requirements specified herein. Compaction shall be accomplished with soil having a moisture content within 2% of optimum moisture


content.

B. Under and Within 5 Feet of Building Foundations

1. Subgrade Conditioning: Moisture condition top 6-inches by scarifying a minimum depth of 6-inches and compact to 95 percent of maximum density determined by TxDOT Tex-114-E. The moisture content of the subgrade shall be maintained within the range of optimum moisture content to 3 percentage points above the optimum until permanently covered.

2. Select Fill: From 24-inches below foundation to bottom of foundation. Place in 8-inch lifts and compact to 95 percent of maximum density determined by TxDOT Tex-113-E, Compaction Test. The moisture content of the subgrade shall be maintained within the range of 2 percentage points below to 2 percentage points above the optimum moisture content until final compaction for imported crushed limestone base or granular pit run materials. For Low PI materials, the moisture content shall be maintained within the range of optimum to plus 3 percentage points above the optimum until permanently covered or final compaction.

C. Within Building Foundation Slab/Stoop Tie Down Area

1. Select Fill: Place in 8-inch lifts and compact to 95 percent of maximum density determined by TxDOT Tex-113-E, Compaction Test. The moisture content of the subgrade shall be maintained within the range of 2 percentage points below to 2 percentage points above the optimum moisture content until final compaction for imported crushed limestone base or granular pit run materials. For Low PI materials, the moisture content shall be maintained within the range of optimum to plus 3 percentage points above the optimum until permanently covered or final compaction.

D. Under Sidewalks and Rigid Pavement

1. Subgrade Conditioning: Moisture condition top 6-inches by scarifying a minimum depth of 6-inches and compact to 95 percent of maximum density determined by TxDOT Tex-114-E. The moisture content of the subgrade shall be maintained within the range of optimum moisture content to 3 percentage points above the optimum until permanently covered.

2. Select Fill: To bottom of sidewalk and rigid pavement. Place in 8-inch lifts and compact to 95 percent of maximum density determined by TxDOT Tex-113-E, Compaction Test. The moisture content of the subgrade shall be maintained within the range of 2 percentage points below to 2 percentage points above the optimum moisture content until final compaction for imported crushed limestone base or granular pit run materials. For Low PI materials, the moisture content shall be maintained within the range of optimum to plus 3 percentage points above the optimum until permanently covered or final compaction.

E. Under Flexible Pavement

1. Subgrade: Common fill to Lime Stabilized Subgrade. Place in lifts of not more than 8-inches and compact to 95 percent of maximum density determined by TxDOT Tex-114-E. The moisture content of the subgrade shall be maintained within the range of optimum moisture content to 3 percentage points above the optimum until permanently covered.

2. Subgrade Conditioning: Moisture condition top 6-inches by scarifying a


minimum depth of 6-inches and compact to 95 percent of maximum density determined by TxDOT Tex-114-E. The moisture content of the subgrade shall be maintained within the range of optimum moisture content to 3 percentage points above the optimum until permanently covered.

3. Lime Stabilized Fill: To aggregate base. Place in lifts of not more than 8-inches and compact to 95 percent of maximum density determined by TxDOT Tex-114-E. The moisture content of the subgrade shall be maintained within the range of optimum moisture content to 3 percentage points above the optimum until permanently covered.

4. Aggregate Base: Aggregate Fill to bottom of flexible pavement. Place in lift of not more than 8-inchess and compact to 95 percent of maximum density determined by TxDOT Tex-114-E. The moisture content of the subgrade shall be maintained within the range of optimum moisture content to 2 percentage points above the optimum as determined by Tex-113-E.

F. Below Grade Site Restoration Areas, Fill Under Grass and Landscaped Areas:

1. Fill Type: Common Fill, to bottom of topsoil, each 8 inch lift, compacted to 90 percent of the maximum dry density as determined by the ASTM D-1557 method of compaction.

3.10 FINISHED EXCAVATION AND FILLS

A. All areas covered by the project, including excavated and filled sections and adjacent transition areas, shall be uniformly smooth graded. The finished surface shall be reasonably smooth, compacted, and free from irregular surface changes. The degree of finish shall be that ordinary obtainable from blade-grader operations, except as otherwise specified. Surface shall be finished not more than 0.10 foot above or below the established grade.

3.11 DISPOSAL

A. All excess excavated material shall be removed from the site and disposed of at a location outside JBSA- Sam Houston at the Contractor's expense.

B. Trucks hauling excavated material shall not be loaded beyond their rated load capacity.


A. The testing services shall be supervised by a Professional Engineer, registered in the State of Texas.

B. Soil Compaction Testing:

1. AAFES shall employ and pay for the services of a qualified geotechnical engineering consultant for advice on all earthwork techniques involved in the work. Contractor shall inform the Contracting Officer of conditions requiring a variation to the Contract Documents and consult with the Contracting Officer regarding disposition of earthwork variations.

2. AAFES will employ an independent testing agency to perform tests on structural fill for compaction. Tests shall be provided by a laboratory approved and paid for by the Contractor. The Contractor shall provide a 50-pound sample of each material, from each source, to the testing agency five days prior to start of earthwork. Do not place any fill material until laboratory tests


confirm material suitable as structural fill. 3. Laboratory Test on soil materials for compaction: ASTM D 1557. 4. Laboratory test on structural fill for compaction: ASTM D 1557. 5. Contractor shall notify the testing agency and geotechnical engineering

consultant sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for their assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests.

6. Testing Agency and geotechnical engineer shall prepare written reports of services performed. Testing Agency shall provide three (3) copies of testing reports to the Contracting Officer no later than 10 calendar days from the date testing occurs or test results are obtained.

7. Tests: a. Perform tests in areas where compacted fill densities are specified. b. Perform tests on sub-grade areas prior to backfilling, and at each layer of

compacted fill for every 5000 square feet, or less, of filled area, for areas other than back fill at foundation walls.

c. Perform tests at undisturbed bearing area and at each layer of compacted fill in bearing area not to exceed 50 feet o.c. at each individual footing.

d. Perform tests at each layer of compacted backfill at foundation walls; perform tests at locations not to exceed 50 feet o.c.

e. Perform tests remote from each other and in areas representative of the entire subgrade.

f. Perform tests at each layer of compacted fill in utility trenches not to exceed 50 feet o.c.

8. The testing laboratory shall promptly notify Contracting Officer and Contractor of irregularities or deficiencies of work which are observed during performance of services. If in the opinion of the Contracting Officer additional tests are required beyond those specified and their results indicate compaction less than the percentage density specified, the contractor shall bear the expense of such additional tests ordered.

C. Provide for visual inspection of bearing surfaces.

3.13 TOLERANCES

A. Perform all earthworks to a finished tolerance within plus or minus five hundredths of a foot (0.05').

END OF 31 20 00

DIVISION 31 – Earthwork SECTION 31 21 00 LANDSCAPE GRADING

Landscape Grading 31 21 00 - 1


A. Final grade topsoil for finish landscaping. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 01 45 29 - Testing Laboratory Services

B. Section 31 20 00 - Earth Moving

C. Section 31 23 23 – Utility Backfill Materials

D. Section 32 92 00 Turf & Grasses PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL

A. Topsoil: Provide Topsoil as specified in Specification Section 31 20 00 Earth Moving.


A. Verify that building and trench backfilling have been inspected.

B. Verify that substrate base has been contoured and compacted. 3.02 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION

A. Eliminate uneven areas and low spots.

B. Remove debris, roots, branches, stones, in excess of ½ inch in size.

C. Scarify surface to depth of 6 inches (150 mm) where topsoil is scheduled. Scarify in areas where equipment used for hauling and spreading topsoil has compacted subsoil.

3.03 PLACING TOPSOIL

A. Place topsoil in areas where seeding and planting is required to thickness as scheduled.

B. Place topsoil during dry weather.

DIVISION 31 – Earthwork SECTION 31 21 00 LANDSCAPE GRADING

Landscape Grading 31 21 00 - 2

C. Fine grade topsoil to eliminate rough or low areas. Maintain profiles and contour of subgrade.

D. Remove roots, weeds, rocks, and foreign material while spreading.

E. Manually spread topsoil close to existing plant life and building to prevent

damage.

F. Lightly compact placed topsoil.

G. Surplus imported subsoil and topsoil shall be removed from Government Property.

H. Leave stockpile area and site clean and raked, ready to receive landscaping.

3.04 TOLERANCES

A. Top of Topsoil: Plus or minus ½ inch.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect landscaping and other features remaining as final work.

B. Protect existing structures, fences, sidewalks, utilities, paving, and curbs. 3.06 SCHEDULES

A. Compacted topsoil thickness at the following areas:

1. Lawn: 4 inches.

END OF SECTION

Division 31 – Earthwork

Section 31 23 23 – Utility Backfill Materials

Utility Backfill Materials 31 23 23 - 1

PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Material Classifications B. Utility Backfill Materials:

1. Concrete sand 2. Gem sand 3. Pea gravel 4. Crushed stone 5. Crushed concrete 6. Bank run sand 7. Select backfill 8. Random backfill

C. Material Handling and Quality Control Requirements.

1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Unsuitable Material:

1. Materials classified as ML, CL-ML, MH, PT, OH, and OL according to

ASTM D2487. 2. Materials that cannot be compacted to required density due to gradation,

plasticity, or moisture content. 3. Materials containing large clods, aggregates, or stones greater than 4

inches in any dimension; debris, vegetation, or waste; or any other deleterious materials.

4. Materials contaminated with hydrocarbons or other chemical

contaminants. B. Suitable Material:

1. Materials meeting specification requirements. 2. Unsuitable materials meeting specification requirements for suitable soils

after treatment with lime or cement. C. Foundation Backfill Materials: Natural soil or manufactured aggregate meeting

Class I requirements and geotextile filter fabrics as required, to control drainage and material separation. Foundation backfill material is placed and compacted as




backfill where needed to provide stable support for structure foundation base. Foundation backfill materials may include concrete fill and seal slabs.

D. Foundation Base: Crushed stone aggregate with filter fabric (if required by the

project). Substitutions may be approved by the Contracting Officer on a case by case basis.

E. Backfill Material: Classified soil material meeting specified quality requirements

for designated application as embedment or trench zone backfill. F. Embedment Material: Material as specified herein and as shown on construction

details; unless otherwise approved in advance by the Contracting Officer. Bedding materials shall be placed under controlled conditions within embedment zone extending vertically upward from top of foundation to an elevation 12 inches above top of pipe, and including pipe bedding, haunching and initial backfill.

G. Trench Zone Backfill: Classified soil material meeting specified quality

requirements and placed under controlled conditions in trench zone from top of embedment zone to base course in paved areas or to surface grading material in unpaved areas.

H. Foundation: Either suitable soil of trench bottom or material placed as backfill of

over excavation for removal and replacement of unsuitable or otherwise unstable soils.

I. Source: Source selected by Contractor for supply of embedment or trench zone

backfill material. Selected source may be project excavation, off-site borrow pits, commercial borrow pits, or sand and aggregate production or manufacturing plants.

J. Refer to Section 31 23 33 Excavation Backfill and Compaction for Utilities

Section for other definitions regarding utility installation by trench construction. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Conform to requirements of Section 01 33 00 – Shop Drawings, Product Data &

Submittals. B. Submit description of source, material classification and product description,

production method, and application of backfill materials.

C. Submit test results for samples of off-site backfill materials. Comply with Paragraph 2.03, Material Testing.

D. Before stockpiling materials, submit copy of approval from landowner for

stockpiling backfill material on private property. E. Provide delivery ticket which includes source location for each delivery of

material that is obtained from off site sources or is being paid as specific bid item.




1.04 TESTS

A. Perform tests of sources for backfill material in accordance with Paragraph

2.03B. B. Verification tests of backfill materials may be performed by the Contracting

Officer in accordance with Paragraph 3.03. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL CLASSIFICATIONS

A. Classify materials for backfill for purpose of quality control in accordance with

Unified Soil Classification Symbols as defined in ASTM D2487. Material use and application is defined in utility installation specifications and Drawings either by class, as described in Paragraph 2.01 B, or by product descriptions, as given in Paragraph 2.02.

B. Class Designations Based on Laboratory Testing:

1. Class I: Well-graded gravels and sands, gravel-sand mixtures, crushed

well-graded rock, little or no fines (GW, SW): a. Plasticity index: non-plastic. b. Gradation: D60/D10 - greater than 4 percent; amount passing No. 200

sieve - less than or equal to 5 percent. 2. Class II: Poorly graded gravels and sands, silty gravels and sands, little to

moderate fines (GM, GP, SP, SM): a. Plasticity index: non-plastic to 4. b. Gradations:

(1) Gradation (GP, SP): amount passing No. 200 sieve - less than 5

percent. (2) Gradation (GM, SM): amount passing No. 200 sieve - between 12

percent and 50 percent. (3) Borderline gradations with dual classifications (e.g., SP-SM):

amount passing No. 200 sieve - between 5 percent and 12 percent.

3. Class III: Clayey gravels and sands, poorly graded mixtures of gravel,

sand, silt, and clay (GC, SC, and dual classifications, e.g., SP-SC):




a. Plasticity index: greater than 7. b. Gradation: amount passing No. 200 sieve - between 12 percent and

50 percent. 4. Class IVA: Lean clays (CL).

a. Plasticity Indexes:

(1) Plasticity index: greater than 7, and above A line. (2) Borderline plasticity with dual classifications (CL-ML): PI between

4 and 7. b. Liquid limit: less than 50. c. Gradation: amount passing No. 200 sieve - greater than 50 percent. d. Inorganic.

5. Class IVB: Fat clays (CH)

a. Plasticity index: above A line. b. Liquid limit: 50 or greater. c. Gradation: amount passing No. 200 sieve - greater than 50 percent. d. Inorganic.

6. Use soils with dual class designation according to ASTM D2487, and which are not defined above, according to more restrictive class.

2.02 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS

A. Soils classified as silt (ML), silty clay (CL-ML with PI of 4 to 7), elastic silt (MH),

organic clay and organic silt (OL, OH), and organic matter (PT) are not acceptable as backfill materials. These soils may be used for site grading and restoration in unimproved areas as approved by the Contracting Officer. Soils in Class IV B, fat clay (CH) may be used as backfill materials where allowed, provided applicable Specification requirements specifically within Section 31 23 33 Excavation Backfill and Compaction for Utilities are satisfied.

B. Provide backfill material that is free of stones greater than 6 inches, free of roots, waste, debris, trash, organic material, unstable material, non-soil matter, hydrocarbon or other contamination, conforming to following limits for deleterious materials:




1. Clay lumps: Less than 0.5 percent for Class I, and less than 2.0 percent for Class II, when tested in accordance with ASTM C142.

2. Lightweight pieces: Less than 5 percent when tested in accordance with

ASTM C123. 3. Organic impurities: No color darker than standard color when tested in

accordance with ASTM C40. C. Manufactured materials, such as crushed concrete, may be substituted for

natural soil or rock products where indicated in product specification, and approved by the Contracting Officer, provided that physical property criteria are determined to be satisfactory by testing.

D. Bank Run Sand: Durable bank run sand classified as SP, SW, or SM by Unified

Soil Classification System (ASTM D2487) meeting following requirements: 1. Less than 15 percent passing number 200 sieve when tested in

accordance with ASTM D1140. Amount of clay lumps or balls may not exceed 2 percent.

2. Material passing number 40 sieve shall meet the following requirements

when tested in accordance with ASTM D4318: Plasticity index: not exceeding 7.

E. Concrete Sand: Natural sand, manufactured sand, or combination of natural and

manufactured sand conforming to requirements of ASTM C33 and graded within following limits when tested in accordance with ASTM C136:

Sieve Percent Passing

3/8" 100 No. 4 95 to 100 No. 8 80 to 100

No. 16 50 to 85 No. 30 25 to 60 No. 50 10 to 30 No. 100 2 to 10




F. Gem Sand: Sand conforming to requirements of ASTM C33 for course aggregates specified for number 8 size and graded within the following limits when tested in accordance with ASTM C136:


3/8" 95 to 100

No. 4 60 to 80

No. 8 15 to 40 G. Pea Gravel: Durable particles composed of small, smooth, rounded stones or

pebbles and graded within the following limits when tested in accordance with ASTM C136:


1/2" 100

3/8" 85 to 100

No. 4 10 to 30

No. 8 0 to10

No. 16 0 to 5 H. Crushed Aggregates: Crushed aggregates consist of durable particles obtained

from an approved source and meeting the following requirements: 1. Materials of one product delivered for same construction activity from

single source, unless otherwise approved by Contracting Officer. 2. Non-plastic fines. 3. Los Angeles abrasion test wear not exceeding 45 percent when tested in

accordance with ASTM C131. 4. Crushed aggregate shall conform to TxDOT Standard Specifications Item

247 Type A Grade 1. 5. Crushed stone: Produced from oversize plant processed stone or gravel,

sized by crushing to predominantly angular particles from naturally occurring single source. Uncrushed gravel is not acceptable materials for embedment where crushed stone is shown on applicable utility embedment drawing details.

6. Crushed Concrete: Crushed concrete is an acceptable substitute for

crushed stone as utility backfill. Gradation and quality control test requirements are same as crushed stone. Provide crushed concrete produced from normal weight concrete of uniform quality; containing particles of aggregate and cement material, free from other substances




such as asphalt, reinforcing steel fragments, soil, waste gypsum (calcium sulfate), or debris.

I. Select Backfill: Class III clayey gravel or sand or Class IV lean clay with plasticity

index between 7 and 20 or clayey soils treated with lime to meet plasticity criteria.

J. Random Backfill: Any suitable soil or mixture of soils within Classes I, II, III and

IV; or fat clay (CH) where allowed, provided applicable Specification requirements specifically within Excavation Backfill and Compaction Section are satisfied.

2.03 MATERIAL TESTING

A. Source Qualification. Perform testing to confirm test results provided by suppliers

for selection of material sources and products not from the project site. Test samples of processed materials from current production representing material to be delivered. Use tests to verify that materials meet Specification requirements. Repeat qualification test procedures each time source characteristics change or there is planned change in source location or supplier. Include the following qualification tests, as applicable: 1. Gradation: Report complete sieve analyses regardless of specified control

sieves from largest particle through No. 200 sieve. 2. Plasticity of material passing No. 40 sieve 3. Los Angeles abrasion wear of material retained on No. 4 sieve 4. Clay lumps 5. Lightweight pieces 6. Organic impurities

B. Production Testing: At the Contracting Officer’s discretion, Contractor shall

provide reports to the Contracting Officer from an independent testing laboratory that backfill materials to be placed in Work meet applicable specification requirements.

C. Assist the Contracting Officer in obtaining material samples for verification testing

at source or at production plant. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 SOURCES




A. Use of existing material in trench excavations is acceptable, provided applicable Specification requirements listed within Excavation Backfill and Compaction Section are satisfied.

B. Identify off-site sources for backfill materials at least 14 days ahead of intended

use so that the Contracting Officer may obtain samples for verification testing. C. Materials may be subjected to inspection or additional verification testing after

delivery. Materials which do not meet requirements of Specifications will be rejected. Do not use material which, after approval, has become unsuitable for use due to segregation, mixing with other materials, or by contamination. Once material is approved by the Contracting Officer, expense for sampling and testing required to change to different material will be at the expense of the Contractor.

D. Bank run sand, select backfill, and random backfill, if available in project

excavation, may be obtained by selective excavation and acceptance testing. Obtain additional quantities of these materials and other materials required to complete work from off-site sources.

E. Contracting Officer does not represent or guarantee that any soil found in

excavation work will be suitable and acceptable as backfill material. 3.02 MATERIAL HANDLING

A. When backfill material is obtained from either commercial or non-commercial

borrow pit, open pit to expose vertical faces of various strata for identification and selection of approved material to be used. Excavate selected material by vertical cuts extending through exposed strata to achieve uniformity in product.

B. Establish temporary stockpile locations for practical material handling and control

in advance of final placement. Obtain approval from landowner for storage of backfill material on adjacent private property.

C. When stockpiling backfill material near project site, use appropriate covers to

eliminate blowing of materials into adjacent areas and prevent runoff containing sediments from entering drainage system.

D. Place stockpiles in layers to avoid segregation of processed materials. Load

material by making successive vertical cuts through entire depth of stockpile. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Quality Control

1. The Contracting Officer may sample and test backfill at: a. Sources including borrow pits, production plants and Contractor's

designated off-site stockpiles.




b. On-site stockpiles c. Materials placed in Work

2. The Contracting Officer may re-sample material at any stage of work or

location if changes in characteristics are apparent. B. Production Verification Testing: If requested, an independent testing laboratory

will provide verification testing on backfill materials, as directed by the Contracting Officer. Samples may be taken at source or at production plant, as applicable.

END OF SECTION 31 23 23


Section 31 23 33 – Excavation Backfill and Compaction For Utilities

Excavation Backfill and Compaction For Utilities 31 23 33 - 1


A. Trench excavation, backfill, and compaction shall include, but not necessarily be

limited to, the excavation, backfill, and compaction of trenches for water mains, and sanitary sewers, shown on the Drawings, and in accordance with the Standard Specifications and Details.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Pipe Foundation: Suitable and stable native soils that are exposed at trench

subgrade after excavation to depth of bottom of bedding as shown on Drawings, or foundation backfill material placed and compacted in over-excavations.

B. Embedment Material/Pipe Bedding: Portion of trench backfill that extends

vertically from top of foundation up to level line at bottom of pipe, and horizontally from one trench sidewall to opposite sidewall.

C. Haunching: Material placed on either side of pipe from top of bedding up to

springline of pipe and horizontally from one trench sidewall to opposite sidewall.

D. Initial Backfill: Portion of trench backfill that extends vertically from springline of pipe (top of haunching) up to level line 12-inches above top of pipe, and horizontally from one trench sidewall to opposite sidewall.

E. Pipe Embedment Zone: Portion of trench backfill that consists of bedding,

haunching and initial backfill. F. Trench Zone: Portion of trench backfill that extends vertically from top of pipe

embedment up to pavement subgrade or up to final grade when not beneath pavement.

G. Unsuitable Material: Unsuitable soil materials are the following:

1. Materials that are classified as ML, CL-ML, MH, PT, OH, and OL

according to ASTM D2487. 2. Materials that cannot be compacted to required density due to gradation,

plasticity, or moisture content. 3. Materials that contain large clods, aggregates, stones greater than 4-

inches in any dimension, debris, vegetation, waste or any other deleterious materials.

4. Materials that are contaminated with hydrocarbons or other chemical

contaminants.




H. Suitable Material: Suitable soil materials are those meeting specification requirements. Materials mixed with lime, fly ash, or cement that can be compacted to required density and meeting requirements for suitable materials may be considered suitable materials, unless otherwise indicated.

I. Backfill: Suitable material meeting specified quality requirements placed and

compacted under controlled conditions. J. Ground Water Control Systems: Installations external to trench, such as well

points, eductors, or deep wells. Ground water control includes dewatering to lower ground water, intercepting seepage which would otherwise emerge from side or bottom of trench excavation, and depressurization to prevent failure or heaving of excavation bottom.

K. Surface Water Control: Diversion and drainage of surface water runoff and rain

water away from trench excavation. Rain water and surface water accidentally entering trench shall be controlled and removed as part of excavation drainage.

L. Excavation Drainage: Removal of surface and seepage water in trench by sump

pumping and using drainage layer, as defined in ASTM D2321, placed on foundation beneath pipe bedding or thickened bedding layer of Class I material.

M. Trench Conditions are defined with regard to stability of trench bottom and trench

walls of pipe embedment zone. Maintain trench conditions that provide for effective placement and compaction of embedment material directly on or against undisturbed soils or foundation backfill, except where structural trench support is necessary.

1. Dry Stable Trench: Stable and substantially dry trench conditions exist in pipe embedment zone as result of typically dry soils or achieved by ground water control (dewatering or depressurization) for trenches extending below ground water level.

2. Stable Trench with Seepage: Stable trench in which ground water

seepage is controlled by excavation drainage. a. Stable Trench with Seepage in Clayey Soils: Excavation drainage

is provided in lieu of or to supplement ground water control systems to control seepage and provide stable trench subgrade in predominately clayey soils prior to bedding placement.

b. Stable Wet Trench in Sandy Soils: Excavation drainage is

provided in embedment zone in combination with ground water control in predominately sandy or silty soils.

3. Unstable Trench: Unstable trench conditions exist in pipe embedment

zone if ground water inflow or high water content causes soil




disturbances, such as sloughing, sliding, boiling, heaving or loss of density.

N. Sub-trench: Sub-trench is special case of benched excavation. Sub-trench

excavation below trench shields or shoring installations may be used to allow placement and compaction of foundation or embedment materials directly against undisturbed soils. Depth of sub-trench depends upon trench stability and safety as determined by the Contractor.

O. Trench Dam: Placement of low permeability material in pipe embedment zone or

foundation to prohibit ground water flow along trench. P. Over-excavation and Backfill: Excavation of subgrade soils with unsatisfactory

bearing capacity or composed of otherwise unsuitable materials below top of foundation as shown on Drawings, and backfilled with foundation backfill material.

Q. Foundation Backfill Materials: Natural soil or manufactured aggregate of

controlled gradation, and geotextile filter fabrics as required, to control drainage and material separation. Foundation backfill material is placed and compacted as backfill to provide stable support for bedding. Foundation backfill materials may include concrete seal slabs.

R. Trench Safety Systems: Includes both protective systems and shoring systems. S. Trench Shield (Trench Box): Portable worker safety structure moved along trench

as work proceeds, used as protective system and designed to withstand forces imposed on it by cave in, thereby protecting persons within trench. Trench shields may be stacked if so designed or placed in series depending on depth and length of excavation to be protected.

T. Shoring System: Structure that supports sides of an excavation to maintain

stable soil conditions and prevent cave-ins, or to prevent movement of ground affecting adjacent installations or improvements.

U. Special Shoring: Shoring system meeting special shoring as specified in

Paragraph 1.06, Special Shoring Design Requirements, for locations identified on Drawings.

1.03 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule work so that pipe embedment can be completed on same day that

acceptable foundation has been achieved for each section of pipe installation, manhole, or other structures.

B. The Contractor shall not excavate more trench in any day than can be completed

(facility installed and trench backfilled) in the same day, unless by written permission of the Contracting Officer. The Contracting Officer shall be empowered at any time to require the




backfilling of open trenches over completed pipe lines if, in their judgment, such action is necessary.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Conform to requirements of Section 01 33 00 –Shop Drawings Product Data &

Submittals. B. Submit planned typical method of excavation, backfill placement and compaction

including:

1. Trench widths 2. Procedures for foundation and pipe zone bedding placement, and trench

backfill compaction. 3. Procedures for assuring compaction against undisturbed soil when pre-

manufactured trench safety systems are proposed.

C. Submit backfill material sources and product quality information in accordance with requirements of Section 31 23 23 – Utility Backfill Materials.

D. Submit trench excavation safety program. Identify by name who will be OSHA

competent person for excavations. If special shoring system is to be used, include designs for special shoring meeting requirements defined in Paragraph 1.06, Special Shoring Design Requirements contained herein.

E. Submit record of location of utilities as installed, referenced to survey control

points. Include locations of utilities encountered or rerouted. Give stations, horizontal dimensions, elevations, inverts, and gradients.

1.05 TESTS

A. Geotechnical testing and analysis of backfill materials for soil classification and

compaction testing during construction shall be provided by the Contractor, at the Contractor’s expense, and performed by an independent, State-certified, testing company approved by the Contracting Officer. The results of all failing tests shall be communicated to the Contracting Officer immediately. Written results of all tests performed, shall be presented to the Contracting Officer in a timely manner. When test results indicate that the density is less than the percent specified, tractor shall excavate and re-compact the areas that have failed at no expense to AAFES.

B. Perform backfill material source qualification testing in accordance with

requirements of Section 31 23 23 – Utility Backfill Materials. C. The Contractor will arrange for all in-place moisture/density testing on the project.




D. Frequency :

Compaction testing shall be performed on random lifts a minimum of every 300 LF unpaved areas and 100 LF in paved areas unless otherwise approved by the Contracting Officer. The Contracting Officer reserves the right to require re-tests if the initial compaction test fails.

1. If ground water is present, at the discretion of the Contracting Officer,

compaction testing shall be increased to every 100 LF in unpaved areas. 2. A minimum of one (1) compaction test per lift shall be performed for all

backfill operations with less linear footage than specified in 1.05 D.

3. The testing agency shall determine at the time of testing the location of each compaction test within the specified testing length.

4. As an alternative to the compaction testing frequency specified, the

Contract shall have the option to demonstrate aceptable compaction at the start of the project.

a. At the start of the trenching operation, the Contractor shall

demonstrate to the Contracting Officer through the results reported by the accepted testing agency that the compaction density specified can be attained by the compaction equipment and methods the Contractor intends to use.

b. Once the method and equipment has been approved, no

substitutions will be permitted without the Contracting Officer’s approval.

c. Additional demonstration of the suitability of the compaction

equipment and methods will be required whenever there is a significant change in material characteristics or change in compaction equipment or method.

d. Should testing determine that the required density is not being

met, or the material is outside the specified moisture range, the Contractor shall, without additional compensation, reexcavate, rework, and/or recompact the particular layer or section until the required density and/or moisture is attained.

E. Compaction

1. The Contractor shall, in unimproved areas outside the public rights-of-way, compact each trench backfill layer in such a manner as to obtain a dense backfill free of voids and not susceptible to undue settlement or depression. Trench backfill extending to not less than 1-foot in depth above the top of pipe shall be compacted to at least 90% of maximum




density at a moisture content within 5% of the optimum in accordance with ASTM D1556.

2. Trench backfill within all rights-of-way of improved or paved areas shall

be compacted to at least 95% of maximum density at a moisture content within 5%, or local requirements which ever is more stringent, of the optimum moisture in accordance with ASTM D1556. The final 1-foot of trench backfill to pavement subgrade shall be compacted to at least 95% of maximum density at a moisture content within 5% of the optimum in accordance with ASTM D1556.

1.06 SPECIAL SHORING DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Have special shoring designed or selected by Contractor's Professional Engineer

registered in the State the project is being completed to provide support for sides of excavations, including soils and hydrostatic ground water pressures as applicable, and to prevent ground movements affecting adjacent installations or improvements such as structures, pavements and utilities. Special shoring may be a premanufactured system selected by Contractor's Professional Engineer to meet project site requirements based on manufacturer's standard design.

B. The requirement for special shoring shall be determined by the Contracting

Officer for all excavations within 10-feet of a JBSA- Fort Sam Houston owned asset.

PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT

A. Perform excavation with hydraulic excavator or other equipment suitable for

achieving requirements of this Section. B. Heavy compaction equipment shall not be used until adequate cover is attained

in order to prevent damage to pipes, conduits, or ducts. C. Use trench shields or other protective systems or shoring systems, including

special shoring systems as referenced in Paragraph 1.06, which are designed and operated in accordance with all Local, State, and Federal (including OSHA) standards and regulations.

2.02 MATERIAL CLASSIFICATIONS

A. Embedment and Trench Zone Backfill Materials: Conform to classifications and

product descriptions of Section – Utility Backfill Materials. B. Concrete Encasement: Concrete used for encasement or caps shall have a

minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi.




C. Concrete Backfill: Also known as flowable fill. Flowable fill must be “excavatable” as defined by the National Ready Mixed Association as having a compressive strength not exceeding 150 psi.

D. Concrete for Trench Dams: Concrete backfill or 3 sack premixed (bag) concrete.

PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 STANDARD PRACTICE

A. Install flexible pipe, including "semi-rigid" pipe, to conform to standard practice

described in ASTM D2321, and as described in this Section. Where an apparent conflict occurs between standard practice and requirements of this Section, this Section governs.

B. Install rigid pipe to conform to standard practice described in ASTM C12, and as

described in this Section. Where an apparent conflict occurs between standard practice and requirements of this Section, this Section governs.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Maintain barricades and warning lights for streets and intersections affected by

Work, and that are considered hazardous to traffic movements as specified in the approved traffic control plan for the project.

B. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to obtained all required permits for excavation

to include a Traffic Control Plan approved by the local governing authority. C. Perform work to conform to applicable safety standards and regulations, as

outlined in current OHSA , State and local regulations D. Immediately notify agency or company owning any existing utility line which is

damaged, broken, or disturbed. Obtain approval from the Contracting Officer and agency for any repairs or relocations, either temporary or permanent.

E. Remove existing pavements and structures, including sidewalks and driveways,

to conform to local (local, State DOT, DPW, etc.) requirements F. Install and operate necessary dewatering and surface-water control measures.

Provide stable trench to allow installation in accordance with Specifications. G. Maintain permanent benchmarks, monuments, and other reference points.

Unless otherwise directed in writing, at the expense of the Contractor a Licensed Surveyor shall replace those which are damaged or destroyed in accordance with the requirements of the Contracting Officer and local or State requirements.




3.03 CRITICAL LOCATION INVESTIGATION A. Horizontal and vertical location of various underground lines shown on Drawings,

including but not limited to water lines, gas lines, storm sewers, sanitary sewers, telecommunication lines, electric lines or power ducts, pipelines, concrete and debris, are based on best information available but are only approximate locations.

B. The Contractor is responsible for coordinating all utility locates within the Limits

of Disturbance per the standard procedures for the project location (One call system, DPW, Utility Company Coordination, etc.)

C. The Contractor is responsible for verifying the location of existing utilities in manner that complies with all local, State and Federal regulations. Use extreme caution and care when uncovering these lines.

D. Notify Contracting Officer in writing immediately upon identification of obstruction. E. Notify involved utility companies of date and time that investigation excavation

will occur and request that their respective utility lines be marked in field. Comply with utility or pipeline company requirements that their representative be present during excavation. Provide the Contracting Officer written 48 hours’ notice prior to field excavation or related work.

3.04 PROTECTION

A. Protect trees, shrubs, lawns, existing structures, and other permanent objects

outside of grading limits and within grading limits as designated on Drawings. B. Protect and support above-grade and below-grade utilities which are to remain. C. Restore damaged permanent facilities to a condition equal to or better than pre-

construction conditions unless replacement or abandonment of facilities is indicated on Drawings.

D. Take measures to minimize erosion of trenches. Do not allow water to pond in

trenches. Where slides, washouts, settlements, or areas with loss of density or pavement failures or potholes occur, repair, recompact, and pave those areas at no additional cost.

E. Protection of Property and Structures: The Contractor shall be responsible for all

damage and assume all expense for direct or indirect injury caused by his work, to above ground facilities or below ground facilities shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, sustain in place and protect from direct or indirect injury all existing facilities in the vicinity of the excavation, whether above or below the ground, or that may appear in the trench. The Contractor shall be responsible for the implementation of protective measures associated with the presence or proximity of pipes, poles, tracks, walls, buildings, property markers,




and other structures and property of every kind and description in or over his trenches or in the vicinity of his work whether above or below the surface of the ground.

. 3.05 EXCAVATION

A. Except as otherwise specified or shown on Drawings, install underground utilities

in open cut trenches with vertical sides. B. Perform excavation work so that pipe, conduit, and ducts can be installed to

depths and alignments shown on Drawings. Avoid disturbing surrounding ground and existing facilities and improvements.

C. Trenches shall be wide enough to allow for compaction equipment.

D. Use sufficient trench width or benches above embedment zone for installation of

well point headers or manifolds and pumps where depth of trench makes it uneconomical or impractical to pump from surface elevation. Provide sufficient space between shoring cross braces to permit equipment operations and handling of forms, pipe, embedment and backfill, and other materials.

E. Upon discovery of unknown utilities, badly deteriorated utilities not designated for

removal, or concealed conditions notify Contracting Officer immediately F. Trench Support:

1. The Contractor shall support the sides and ends of all excavations

wherever necessary with braces, sheeting, shoring or stringers, trench boxes, or other acceptable excavation support systems. All timbering shall be installed by persons skilled in such work and shall be so arranged that it may be withdrawn as backfilling proceeds, without injury to the utility or structure constructed or to any roadbed or adjacent structure or property.

2. All work shall be performed in accordance with the latest OSHA

requirements. 3. All timbering in excavations, trench boxes, or excavation support systems

shall be withdrawn as the backfilling is being done, except where and to such extent as the Contracting Officer shall order in writing that said timbering or excavation support system be left in place or where the Contracting Officer permits the trench support to be left in place at the Contractor's expense and upon his request. The Contractor shall cut off any sheeting left in place 2 feet below finished grade and shall remove the material cut off without compensation therefore.




4. The support of the trench shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.

5. Removal or Moving of trench shoring shall be performed so that pipe, and

backfill materials, after placement and compaction, are not damaged nor disturbed, nor degree of compaction reduced. Re-compact after shoring is moved if soil is disturbed.

6. The Contractor shall coordinate and provide safe access at all times to all

inspecting and testing activities for the Contracting Officer. 3.06 HANDLING EXCAVATED MATERIALS

A. Use only excavated materials, which are suitable as defined in this Section and

conforming to Section – Utility Backfill Materials. Place material suitable for backfilling in stockpiles per the most current OSHA standards.

B. When required, provide additional backfill material conforming to requirements of

Section – Utility Backfill Materials. C. Stockpile locations shall be pre-approved by the Contracting Officer and the local

governing authority.

D. All excavated material not used as backfill the same day as excavated shall be removed from the site and/or stockpiled in an area pre-approved by the Contracting Officer or DPW.

3.07 TRENCH FOUNDATION

A. The Contractor shall, before any pipe or appurtenance is installed, fill all

unauthorized depressions or irregularities in the bottom of the trench or tunnel with firmly compacted embankment or other approved material.

B. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to adequately control water that may be

present in the excavation. He shall provide for the disposal of water removed from excavations in such a manner not to cause damage to public or private property or to any portion of the Work completed or in progress or cause any impediment to the use of any area by the public. Nor shall the Contractor discharge any flushing or ground water or any material of any nature into existing sanitary sewer system during construction of the facilities. All water shall be discharged through an approved sediment control device.

C. Notify the Contracting Officer immediately when unsatisfactory material is

encountered on trench bottom. With Contracting Officer approval, up to 12 -inches of additional undercut may be permitted to achieve suitable trench bottom. If the additional undercut does not result in a satisfactory trench bottom, the Contractor shall obtain a bedding design prepared by a Geotechnical Engineer licensed in the State in which the project is being constructed.




D. Perform over excavation, if directed by the Contracting Officer, in accordance

with Paragraph 3.07.C above. Removal of material maybe required. Even though Contractor has not determined material to be unsuitable.

E. Trench dams shall be installed as determined by the Contracting Officer when

ground water is encountered. 3.08 PIPE EMBEDMENT, PLACEMENT, AND COMPACTION

A. The following material shall be used for the pipe embedment zone (bedding,

haunching, and initial backfill) based on project location.

Location

Water Main & Sanitary Force Main

Gravity Sewer

DIP PVC HDPE

JBSA SAM HOUSTON

Crushed Aggregate

(TxDOT Item 247 Type A Grade 1)

Crushed Aggregate

(TxDOT Item 247 Type A

Grade 1)

Crushed Aggregate

(TxDOT Item 247 Type A

Grade 1)

Crushed Aggregate (TxDOT

Item 247 Type A Grade 1)

B. Remove loose, sloughing, caving, or otherwise unsuitable soil from bottoms and

sidewalls of trenches immediately prior to placement of embedment materials. C. Place embedment including bedding, haunching, and initial backfill as shown on

Drawings. D. For pipe installation, manually spread embedment materials around pipe to

provide uniform bearing and side support when compacted. Protect flexible pipe from damage during placing of pipe zone bedding material. Perform placement and compaction directly against undisturbed soils in trench sidewalls, or against sheeting which is to remain in place.

E. Do not place trench shields or shoring within height of embedment zone unless

means to maintain density of compacted embedment material are used. If moveable supports are used in embedment zone, lift supports incrementally to allow placement and compaction of material against undisturbed soil.

F. Place geotextile to prevent particle migration from in-situ soil into open-graded

(Class I) embedment materials or drainage layers. G. Do not damage coatings or wrappings of pipes during backfilling and compacting

operations. When embedding coated or wrapped pipes, do not use crushed stone or other sharp, angular aggregates.




H. Place haunching material around pipe and compact per the pipe manufacture’s recommendation to provide uniform bearing and side support. The haunching shall be installed in a manner that prevents the pipe from moving.

I. Place electrical conduit, if used, directly on foundation without bedding. J. The method of compaction of the embedment zone material shall comply with the

pipe manufacture’s recommendation. Water tamping is not allowed.

3.09 TRENCH ZONE BACKFILL PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION A. Place backfill for pipe or conduits and restore surface as soon as practicable.

Leave only minimum length of trench open as necessary for construction.

B. For water and sewer lines under existing pavement, use an aggregate base backfill up to the pavement base or sub grade. Aggregate base shall meet the specifications of and be installed per the Department of Transportation regulations for the State in which the project is located.

C. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, for trench excavations not under

pavement, random backfill of suitable material may be used in trench zone. 1. Clay Soils may be used as trench zone backfill outside paved areas. 2. Place in maximum 8-inch thick lift. 3. Compact per Paragraph 1.05 of this specification section. 4. Moisture content as necessary to achieve density.

D. For electric conduits, remove form work used for construction of conduits before

placing trench zone backfill. 3.10 MANHOLES, JUNCTION BOXES AND OTHER PIPELINE STRUCTURES

A. Manholes, junction boxes and other pipeline structures shall have bedding

consisting of a minimum of 1’ compacted Crushed Aggregate (TxDOT Item 247 Type A Grade 1). The compacted crushed aggregate shall be installed horizontally out from the base to the limits of the excavation (minimum 1’), and extend up to a minimum of 1’ above the pipe or base, which ever is greater (does not include the upper connection of a drop inlet). The stone shall be installed to a uniform depth around the entire perimeter of the structure. The crushed aggregate shall be compacted to 95% of maximum dry density. The remainder of the backfill shall be installed per section 3.09 Trench Zone Backfill Placement and Compaction to include paved and unpaved area requirements.

3.11 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS MATERIAL




A. Dispose of excess materials in accordance with requirements of the contract documents, State and local requirements.


DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK Section 31 31 16 – TERMITE CONTROL

TERMITE CONTROL 31 31 16-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:

1. Contractor Provide:

a. Soil treatment of Building elements for termite control. b. Certification of EPA compliance. c. Testing services certificate of application rates. d. Warranty.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Specified elsewhere:

1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Division 2 – Site Work. 3. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete.


A. In addition to requirements of these specifications:

1. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for work. 2. Follow manufacturer’s recommendations for preparation of substrate and

application.

B. Engage a professional pest control operator, licensed in accordance with regulations of governing authorities for application of soil treatment solution.

C. Use only termiticides that bear a Federal registration number of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.

1. formulate and apply termiticides and termiticide devices according to the EPA registered label.

D. Obtain termite control products from single manufacturer.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and application instructions.

B. Certification:

1. Provide written certification that products used comply with U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Regulations for Termiticides.

2. Provide written certification of applicator/installer qualifications.

C. Testing Service: Provide and pay for services of an independent testing laboratory to certify termiticide application rates and submit observation data as follows:

1. Date and time of application. 2. Moisture content of soil before application. 3. Termiticide manufacturer and brand name. 4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used. 5. Dilutions, methods, volumes used and rates of application.


6. Areas of application. 7. Water source for application.

1.5 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Restrictions: Do not apply soil treatment solution until excavating, filling and grading operations are completed, except as otherwise required in construction operations.

B. To insure penetration, do not apply soil treatment to frozen or excessively wet soils or during inclement weather.

C. Fully comply with handling and application instructions of the soil toxicant manufacturer.

1.6 SPECIFIC PRODUCT WARRANTY

A. Furnish written warranty certifying that applied soil termiticide treatment will prevent infestation of subterranean termites.

1. If subterranean termite activity is discovered during warranty period, Contractor will re-treat soil.

2. Repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation.

B. Warranty shall be for a period of 5 years from date of Substantial Completion, signed by Applicator and Contractor.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL TREATMENT SOLUTION

A. Use an emulsible concentrate termiticide for dilution with water, specially formulated to prevent infestation by termites that is EPA registered and complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Fuel oil will not be permitted as a dilutent. 2. Provide a solution consisting of one of following chemical elements and

concentrations:

a. TalstarOne: 0.6 percent in water emulsion, FMC Corporation, Philadelphia, PA 19103.

b. Premise 75: 0.5 percent in water emulsion, Bayer Corporation, Kansas City, MO 64120.

c. Termidor SC: 0.6 percent in water emulsion, BASF Corporation, Research Triangle Park, NC 27709.

B. Other solutions may be used as recommended by Applicator if also acceptable to the Contracting Officer or designated representative and approved for intended application by jurisdictional authorities.

C. Use only soil treatment solutions that are not injurious to planting.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Surface Preparation: Remove foreign matter that could decrease effectiveness of treatment on areas to be treated.


1. Loosen, rake and level soil to be treated, except previously compacted areas under slabs and foundations.

2. Toxicants may be applied before placement of compacted fill under slabs, if recommended by toxicant manufacturer.

B. Under new slab-on-grade structures, treat soil before concrete slabs are placed, using the following rates of application:

1. Apply 2 gallons of chemical solution per 10 lineal feet to soil in critical areas under existing and new slab-on-grade construction, including:

a. Entire perimeter inside of foundation walls. b. Along both sides of interior partition walls. c. Around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating slab. d. Around interior wall footings.

2. Under new slab areas:

a. Apply 1-1/2 gallons of chemical solution per 10 square feet to areas where fill is washed gravel or other coarse absorbent material.

b. Apply 1 gallon of chemical solution per 10 square feet as an overall treatment under slab areas where fill is soil or unwashed gravel.

3. Apply 2 gallons of chemical solution per 10 lineal feet of trench for each foot of depth from grade to footing along outside edge of building.

a. Dig a trench 6" to 8" wide along outside of foundation to a depth of not less than 12".

b. Punch holes in backfill to top of footing at not more than 12" o.c. and apply chemical solution.

c. Mix chemical solution with the soil as it is being replaced in trench.

C. At hollow masonry foundations or grade beams, treat voids at rate of 2 gallons per 10 lineal feet, poured directly into the hollow spaces.

D. At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be penetrated, apply at rate of 2 gallons per 10 lineal feet of penetration.

E. Post signs in areas of application to warn workers that soil termiticide treatment has been applied and remove signs when areas are covered by other construction.

F. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, or other construction activities following application.

END 31 31 16.

DIVISION 32 – SITE WORK

SECTION 32 01 00 – PAVEMENT REPAIR AND RESTORATION

Pavement Repair and Restoration 32 01 00 - 1

1. PART 1 GENERAL


A. Repairing and resurfacing streets, highways, driveways, and other pavements that have been removed, cut, broken, or otherwise damaged during construction.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor shall submit material certifications, along with supporting data, from the paving materials suppliers stating that the materials conform to State and/or local DPW paving specifications.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Subgrade:

1. Provide backfill material as required by Specification Section 31 23 33 – Excavation and Backfill for Utilities.

2. Provide material for stabilization as required.

B. Base: Provide base material as required by State and/or local DPW paving

specifications.

C. Pavement: Provide paving materials as required by State and/or local DPW standards.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Notify the Contracting Officer prior to commencement of excavation in pavement for which a Dig Permit has been obtained. Follow directions contained in the permit.

B. Where directed by the Contracting Officer, Contractor shall saw cut pavement 18-inches wider than width of trench needed to install utilities unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

C. Protect edges of existing pavement to remain from damage during removals, utility placement, backfill, and paving operations. For concrete pavement, protect undisturbed subgrade that is to remain to support replacement slab.

D. Dowel in existing concrete pavement where no reinforcement is found or is broken due to construction activities. Unless otherwise directed by the Contracting Officer, provide No. 6 bars 24-inches long, drilled and embedded 8-inches into center of existing slab with epoxy grout. Space dowels to match new pavement reinforcement spacing.




E. Provide transitional paving and earthwork as required to tie proposed pavement to existing pavement when unable to dowel new pavement into existing pavement.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Temporary paving, or other appropriate material, must be maintained until replaced by permanent paving.

B. All paving removed or damaged by construction operations shall be replaced in kind and/or repaired as specified herein.

C. All pavement work shall meet the requirements of the State and/or local DPW for replacement of paving over all excavated and disturbed areas of the improved surface.

D. Parking Areas, Service Drives, and Driveways: Replace with material equal to or better than existing or as indicated on Drawings. Conform to applicable requirements of sections referenced in Paragraph 2.01, Materials.

E. Street Pavements and Curbs, Sidewalks, Curbs and Gutters: Replace subgrade, base, and surface course with like materials or as indicated on Drawings. Curbs and curbs and gutters shall match existing. Conform to requirements of sections referenced in Paragraph 2.01, Materials. All joints between existing curb or sidewalk and replacement work shall be saw cut at right angles and neatly trimmed. Provide ½-inch thick pre-molded expansion joint material between old and new joints.

F. At joints between existing pavements and repaving work, the edges of existing pavements shall be cut back parallel with the trench at right angles, neatly trimmed, and approved by the Contracting Officer. An application of asphalt cement shall be provided at all locations where new pavement joins existing pavement.

G. For concrete pavement, install size and length of reinforcing steel and pavement thickness indicated on Drawings. Place types and spacing of joints to match existing or as indicated on Drawings.

H. Where existing pavement consists of concrete pavement with asphaltic surfacing, resurface with minimum 2-inch depth asphaltic pavement.

I. Repair State highway and county crossings in accordance with applicable permit or county requirements as appropriate and within 1 week after utility work is installed.

3.03 WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL

A. Dispose of waste materials off site, in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents, State and local regulations.

3.04 PROTECTION

A. Maintain pavement in good condition until completion of Work.

B. Replace pavement damaged by Contractor's operations at no cost to AAFES.

3.05 TESTING

A. Obtain a minimum of one 6” diameter core sample for each 500 linear feet of permanent paving for test of depth of bituminous material courses.




B. Take core samples at locations as directed by the Contracting Officer after final compaction rolling.

C. Paving areas shown to be deficient by more than ¼” from the specified depth in any one sample, or uniformly more than 1/8” in three or more samples, shall be removed and replaced to the correct depth at the Contractor’s expense.

D. Refill and compact test holes with material acceptable to, and under the direction of the Contracting Officer.


DIVISION 32 – SITE WORK SECTION 32 12 16 – HOT MIX ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT

HOT MIX ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 32 12 16 - 1

1. GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. The work under this section shall consist of providing all work, materials, labor, equipment, and supervision necessary to provide and construct the paving and surfacing as provided for in these specifications and on the drawings. Included are the following topics:

B. Applicable provisions of Division 1 govern work under this Section. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

1. Section 31 10 00 Site Clearing 2. Section 31 20 00 Earth Moving 3. Section 31 21 00 Landscape Grading

1.2 REFERENCES

A. State of Texas, Department of Transportation (TX DOT)

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. All submittals shall be made in accordance with Section 01 33 00 Shop Drawings, Product Data, & Submittals.

B. Mix Design


A. Except as modified herein or as indicated, work and materials shall be performed in accordance with the TX DOT.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 RECYCLED PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS

A. Reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) may be used in asphalt pavement applications and shall be limited to a maximum of 20% RAP for surface and wearing courses and 30% for courses below the surface or wearting course.

B. RAP shall be salvaged, pulverized, broken or crushed asphalt pavement. The RAP to used int eh mix shall be crushed or broken to the extent that 100% will pass the two inch sieve. The RAP shall not be contaminated by dirt or other objectionable materials. Unless shown otherwise, RAP shall have a decantation of 5% or less and plasticity index of eight (8) or less when tested in accordance with TxDOT Tex-406-A, Part I, and Tex-106-E respectively. When RAP is used, the asphalt content and gradation for mixture design shall be determined.

2.2 HOT MIX ASPHALT PAVEMENT

A. The asphaltic concrete surface course shall conform to TxDOT Standard



Specifications, Item 340, Type D. Asphaltic material for the paving mixture shall be asphaltic cement, viscosity grade AC-20, or performance grade PG64-22. Utilize the same material type throughout the paving operation unless noted elsewhere on the drawings.

2.3 PRIME COAT

A. The prime coat shall be cut-back asphalt, grade MC-30, conforming to the requirements of TxDOT, Standard Specifications, Item 300, Asphalts, Oils, Emulsions.

2.4 TACK COAT

A. The tack coat shall be cut-back asphalt, grade RC-250, or emulsified asphalt, grade SS-1, conforming to the requirements of TxDOT, Standard Specification, Item 300, Asphalts, Oils, Emulsions.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Before commencing the placement of base course, the previously constructed subgrade, as specified in Section 31 20 00 Earth Moving, shall be inspected for surface tolerances and shall be cleaned of all foreign substances.

3.2 HOT MIX ASPHALT (HMA) PAVEMENT

A. Complete all work under this section to TxDOT Standard Specifications, Item 340. Provide HMA layer thicknesses as shown on the drawings. The asphaltic concrete shall be compacted to a minimum of 92 percent of the maximum theoretical specific gravity (Rice) of the mixture determined according to Text Method Tex-227-F. Pavement specimens, which shall be either cores or sections of asphaltic pavement, will be tested according to Test Method Tex-207-F. The nuclear-density gauge or other methods which correlate satisfactorily with results obtained from project roadway specimens may be used when approved by the Engineer. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, the Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the required roadway specimens at their expense and in a manner and at locations selected by the Engineer.

B. Prime coat shall be applied to the surface of the crushed limestone base coarse. Tack coat should be applied to all surfaces that contact new asphalt pavement. See additional requirements for prime coats in the appropriate Unified Facilities Code (FC) Standard Specification for Asphaltic Concrete Materials.

3.3 REHEATING JOINTS

A. Prior to placing HMA pavement adjacent to a section of HMA pavement that was placed during a previous phase; reheat the abutting edge of the previously placed and compacted layer just prior to placing the new HMA pavement layer.

B. Provide a self-contained heating unit that heats by convection only. Do not use forced air to enhance the flame. Provide a fireproof barrier between the flame and



the heater’s fuel source. The heater must produce a uniform distribution of heat within the heat box. Provide automatic controls to regulate the heater output and shutoff the heater when the paver stops or the heater control system loses power. Mount the heater on the paver inside the paver’s automatic leveling device.

C. Evenly reheat at least an 8 inch wide strip of the previously compacted layer in the adjacent lane. Reheat the joint to within 60 degrees F of the mix temperature at the paver auger. Joint temperature is to be measured immediately behind the heater.

D. The Contracting Officer may modify the required joint reheat temperatures to adjust for weather, wind, and other field conditions. Coordinate the heater output and paver speed to achieve the required joint reheat temperature without visible smoke emission.

3.4 PAVEMENT REPAIRS

A. Sawcut all pavement surfaces to neat and straight lines at the limits of removal by a two-step method. Limit the initial pavement removal to the immediate area of the proposed work. Full depth sawcutting is not required for this phase of removal. After the work is completed, make a full depth sawcut to neat and straight lines outside the widest point of pavement disruption. Sawcut the lines of the repair parallel to existing joints, or parallel to or perpendicular to pavement edges so as to form a neat patch. Carefully remove all remaining pavement within the sawcut area to the lines of the sawcut. Do not disturb the existing base materials between the area disturbed by the work and the sawcut line by the sawcutting, pavement removal, or pavement replacement processes.

B. Remove all walks, curbs, and other jointed paving by sawcutting at the nearest joint beyond the limits of removal.

C. Adjust all inlets, manholes, catch basins, valve boxes, and other such castings to match new finished grade as incidental work.

END 32 12 16.13

DIVISION 32 – SITE WORK SECTION 32 13 13 – CONCRETE PAVING

SITE CONCRETE WORK 32 13 13 - 1

1. GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work of this section includes the following:

1. Concrete Pavement 2. Curbs 3. Sidewalks 4. Jointing Materials

B. Related Sections

1. Section 01 45 16 Quality Control 2. Section 01 45 29 Testing Laboratory Services 3. Section 03 30 00 - Cast in Place Concrete 4. Section 31 20 00 – Earth Moving

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute (ACI)

1. ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete. 2. ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.

B. ASTM International

1. ASTM A 185 - Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement 2. ASTM A 615 - Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete

Reinforcement, Grade 60 3. ASTM C 33 - Concrete Aggregate 4. ASTM C 94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete 5. ASTM C 143 - Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete 6. ASTM C 150 - Portland Cement 7. ASTM C 171 - Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete 8. ASTM C 172 -Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete 9. ASTM C 173 - Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric

Method 10. ASTM C 309 - Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete 11. ASTM D 422 - Particle-Size Analysis of Soils 12. ASTM D 1752 - Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers

for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction

C. Federal Specifications (FS)

1. FS SS-S-1401 - (Rev. C) Sealants, Joint, Non-Jet-Fuel-Resistant, Hot-Applied, for Portland Cement and Asphalt Concrete pavements.

D. State of Texas, Department of Transportation (TX DOT)


A. Paving: Designed for parking, light duty commercial vehicles, and movement of trucks up to 60,000 lbs.

1.4 SUBMITTALS



A. All submittals shall be made in accordance with Section 01 33 00 Shop Drawings, Product Data, & Submittals.

B. Concrete Mix Design


A. Except as modified herein or as indicated, work and materials shall be performed in accordance with the TX DOT.

1.6 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Weather Limitations

1. Do not place concrete when base surface temperature is less than 40°F, or surface is wet or frozen.

2. Except by specific written authorization of the Contracting Officer, concrete shall not be placed when the temperature is below 40° F and falling but may be placed when the temperature is above 35° F and rising. The temperature shall be taken in the shade and away from artificial heat.

3. When the temperature of the air is above 85° F, an approved retarding agent will be required in concrete. The maximum temperature of all regular concrete placed shall not exceed 95° F, unless otherwise specified.

4. When the temperature is being placed in cold weather, the Contractor shall have available sufficient supply of an approved covering material to immediately protect concrete if the air temperature falls to 30° F or below, before concrete has been placed for 4 hours. Protection shall remain in place during the period the temperature continues below 32° F or for a period of not more than 5 days. Neither salt nor other chemicals shall be added to prevent freezing. The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality and strength of concrete under cold weather conditions. Concrete shall not be placed before sunrise and shall not be placed later than will permit finishing during sufficient natural light.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE:

A. See Section 31 20 00 – Earth Moving, for aggregate base course material requirements.

2.2 FORMWORK

A. Form Materials: Conform to section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.

B. Forms shall be of steel, except that wood forms may be used on curves having a radius of 150 feet or less, and for fillets.

C. Forms shall be equal in depth to the edge thickness of the slab as shown on the drawings.



D. Forms shall be in one piece for the full depth required except where the drawings require several different slab thicknesses; forms may be built-up with metal or wood to provide an increase in depth of not more than 26 percent.

1. Steel forms shall be furnished in sections not less than 10 feet in length, except that on curves having a radius of 150 feet or less, the length of the sections shall be 5 feet unless the sections are flexible or curved to the proper radius. Each 10-foot length of form shall be provided with at least three form braces and pin sockets so spaced that the form will be rigidly braced throughout its length. Lock joints between form sections shall be free from play or movement. Forms shall be free of warps, bends, or kinks. The top surface of a form shall not vary more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet from a true line. The face of the form shall not vary more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet from a true plane. Forms with battered top surfaces or distorted faces or bases shall be removed from the project.

2. Wood forms for curves and fillets shall be made of well-seasoned, surfaced plank or plywood, straight, and free from warp or bend. Wood forms shall be adequate in strength and rigidly braced.

2.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Check all materials upon delivery to assure that the proper type, grade, color, and certification have been received.

B. Protect all materials from damage due to jobsite conditions and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Damaged materials shall not be incorporated into the work.

2.4 REINFORCEMENT

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products:

1. Materials/products shall contain the maximum amount of recycled content allowed that retains material integrity and product safety in order to meet the finished installation requirements. a. If achievable given these requirements, provide products with an average

recycled content so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent.

B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615; 60 ksi yield grade; deformed billet steel bars; unfinished finish.

C. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: Plain type, ASTM A185; in flat sheets; unfinished.

D. Dowels: ASTM A615; 60 ksi yield grade, plain steel, unfinished finish.

2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Materials: Use the following cementitious materials of the same type, brand, and source throughout the Project

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I, gray. a. Temperature of cement shall not be over 140 degrees F when delivered

to the batching plant.



2. Fly ash: ASTM C 618 Class C, denoted by TxDOT designations Type and B conforming to the requirements of TxDOT Department Material Specifications DMS-4610, “Fly Ash”. a. Content may replace to 30 to 35 percent of a mix design’s Portland

cement content by absolute volume.

B. Aggregates:

1. Coarse Aggregate a. Coarse aggregate shall consist of durable particles of gravel, crushed

blast furnace slag, and/or crushed stone of reasonable uniform quality throughout, free from injurious amounts of salt, alkali, vegetable matter or other objectionable material, either free or as an adherent coating on the aggregate. It shall not contain more than 0.25 percent by weight of clay lumps nor more than 1.0 percent by weight of shale nor more than 5.0 percent by weight of laminated and/or friable particles when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-413-A.

b. Coarse aggregate shall have a wear of not more than 45 percent when tested in accordance with Tex Test Method Tex-410-A and when tested by standard laboratory methods shall meet the following grading requirements:

Retained on 1-3/4 inch (43.75 mm) sieve 0% Retained on 1-1/2 inch (37.5 mm) sieve 0 – 5% Retained on 3/4 inch (19.0 mm) sieve 30 – 65% Retained on 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) sieve 70 – 90% Retained on No. 4 inch (4.75 mm) sieve 95 – 100%

Loss by Decantation TxDOT Test Method Tex-406-A , 1.0% Maximum

c. Curb and gutter coarse aggregate shall meet the following grading requirements

Retained on 1-1/2 inch (37.5 mm) sieve 0% Retained on 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) sieve 5 – 30% Retained on No. 4 inch (4.75 mm) sieve 75 – 100%

2. Fine Aggregate

a. Fine aggregate shall be free from injurious amounts of salt, alkali, vegetable matter or other objectionable material. When subjected to the color test for organic impurities, TxDOT Test Method Tex 408-A, the fine aggregate shall not show a color darker than standard.

b. The fine aggregate shall have an acid insoluble residue of at least 60% by weight when tested in accordance with Tex 612-J. The fine aggregate shall meet the following grading requirements:

Retained on 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) sieve 0% Retained on No. 4 (4.75 mm) sieve 0 – 5% Retained on No. 8 (2.36 mm) sieve 0 – 205% Retained on No 16 (1.185 mm) sieve 15 – 30% Retained on No. 30 inch (0.600 mm) sieve 35 – 75% Retained on No. 50 inch (0.300 mm) sieve 70 – 90% Retained on No. 100 inch (0.150 mm) sieve 90 – 100% Retained on No. 200 inch (0.075 mm) sieve 97 – 100%

c. Fine aggregate shall be subjected to the Sand Equivalent Test, TxDOT



Test Method 203-F. The sand equivalent shall not be less than 80.

C. Air Entraining Admixture:

1. The admixture shall be free of chlorides with formulation being adjusted to provide the recommended percentage of free air.

D. Admixtures

1. Admixtures conforming to TxDOT DMS-4640, “Chemical Admixtures for Concrete” may be used when approved by Contracting Officer to minimize segregation, improve workability, reduce the amount of mixing water and to provide normal hot weather provisions. The use of admixtures shall not alter the approved mix design, except for water content.

E. Water

1. Water for use in concrete and for curing shall be free from oils, acids, organic matter or other deleterious substances. Water sources from municipal supplies approved by the State Health Department will not require testing. Contractor shall sample and test water from other sources and submit test results to the Contracting Officer for approval 10 days prior to proposed use.

F. Curing Materials:

1. The use of covering material that contains or becomes contaminated with sugar in any form, tannic acid or any other substance detrimental to Portland Cement concrete will not be permitted. a. Polyethylene Sheeting shall be white, opaque, free of visible defects,

uniform in appearance, and shall be not less than 0.004 inch thick. Polyethylene sheeting shall conform to the water retention requirements of ASTM C171.

b. Waterproof paper shall conform to ASTM C171. The top side of the waterproof paper shall be white.

2.6 JOINT FILLER

A. For expansion joints.

1. Shall conform to TX DOT “Construction and Materials Specification”, Latest edition, for the type specified on the plans or in the Contract.

B. Sealant, Joint, Non Fuel Resistant, Hot Applied

2.7 CONCRETE MIX DESIGNS:

A. General:

1. For additional requirements see paragraph herein entitled “Inspection and Testing”.

2. Laboratory test reports shall be identified with project location and submitted to the Contracting Officer for approval.

3. The contractor shall be responsible to coordinate testing procedures with the laboratory and be responsible for incorporating into the paving concrete of the minimum strengths specified.

B. Concrete Mix Design:



1. The concrete mix shall be designed to produce a concrete with the following requirements: Item Test Value Entrained Air Tex-416-A 3-6% Water-Cement Ratio gal/sack, max 6.25 Sacks cement, min 94 lbs. each 6/cy Coarse Agg. Factor 0.65-0.85 Compressive Strength, 7 days, psi Tex-418-A 4000 Compressive Strength, 28 day, psi Tex-418-A 4500 Max Cement Mix Temp °F 95 Retarder: Regular Concrete Increase in time over 360S, max minutes 60

2. When ice is used to lower the concrete temperature during hot weather, the addition of ice shall not exceed 50 percent of the total mix weight.

2.8 SHEAR CONNECTORS

A. Shear connectors shall be 1/2-inch (12 mm) diameter thermoset isopthalic polyester resin-pultruded fiberglass reinforcement rods or equivalent to provide connection between vertically and horizontally adjacent units. Strength of shear connectors between vertical adjacent units shall be applicable over a design temperature of 10 degrees F to + 100 degrees F (-10 to 40 degrees C).

B. Shear connectors shall be capable of holding the geogrid in the proper design position during grid pre-tensioning and backfilling.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Before commencing the placement of base course, the previously constructed subgrade, as specified in Section 31 20 00 Earth Moving, shall be inspected for surface tolerances and shall be cleaned of all foreign substances.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF BASE COURSE

A. See Section 31 20 00 for base course installation requirements.

B. No work shall proceed on pavement course until the base has been satisfactorily installed and inspected.

3.3 FORM SETTING

A. The forms shall be set in firm soil cut true to grade so that each form section when placed will be firmly in contact with the underlying layer for its entire length and base width.

B. The form sections shall be staked into position and tightly locked together.

C. The length of pins and quantity provided in each section shall be sufficient to hold the



form at the correct line and grade.

D. When tested by a 10 foot straightedge the top of the form shall conform to the requirements specified for the finished surface of the concrete, and the longitudinal axis of the upstanding leg shall not vary more than 1/4 inch from the straightedge.

E. Conformity to the alignment and grade elevations shown on the drawings shall be checked, and necessary corrections shall be made immediately prior to placing the concrete.

F. The forms shall be cleaned and coated with non-staining form oil before being set in place.

3.4 PLACING CONCRETE

A. Place concrete in accordance with TX DOT.

B. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, and formed joints are not disturbed during concrete placement.

C. Items to be embedded in the concrete shall be positioned accurately before placing concrete and held securely in position.

D. No concrete shall be placed until preparatory work (forms, reinforcement, subgrade, etc) has been approved by the project inspector. Each time the contractor intends to place concrete he shall notify the inspector and obtain approval. The contractor shall notify the inspector at least 24 hours before the intended time for placement.

E. Prior to placement of concrete the forms and subgrade shall be free of debris, ice, snow, extraneous oil, or other harmful substances or coatings. Any oil on the reinforcing steel or other surfaces required to be bonded to the concrete shall be removed. Rock surfaces shall be cleaned by wire brush scrubbing, as necessary, and shall be wetted immediately prior to placement of concrete. Placement of concrete on mud, dried earth, uncompacted fill or frozen subgrade will not be permitted.

F. Concrete placed in hot, dry, or windy conditions, shall have the subgrade lightly dampened with water in advance of concrete placement.

G. Place concrete continuously over the full width of the panel and between predetermined construction joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur.

H. Concrete shall be distributed so that when consolidated and finished, the grade, surface elevation, and dimensions at all points are as required.

I. All edges that will be exposed to view when the structure is completed shall be given a 3/4 inch chamfer unless the edge is indicated to be rounded by a finishing tool. Chamfers shall be made by placing suitable forming strips inside the forms.

J. Concrete shall be deposited in the forms as closely as possible to its final position. Concrete shall not be dropped from higher than 2 feet above the surface where it is being deposited. Chutes, pipes or "elephant trunks" will be used where required to



distribute the concrete and to avoid dropping the concrete. Concrete shall be thoroughly distributed and worked into corners and around reinforcement as required to prevent formation of voids in the concrete.

K. Concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated by vibrating, rodding, or tamping. Mechanical vibrators shall be used wherever possible. Vibration shall not be applied directly to the reinforcing steel or to the forms.

L. Bars or heavy tools shall not be used against the concrete in removing the forms. Any concrete damaged in form removal shall be repaired promptly by the contractor at no cost to AAFES.

M. After removal of forms, formed surfaces shall be patched as follows: Remove loose material, cut back unsound concrete, and voids fill holes with a stiff Portland cement mortar mix. Make patching mortar using some white cement with the regular cement and sand. Mix patching mortar to match surrounding concrete.

N. Unless noted otherwise, the concrete may be placed by using forms or by use of a slip form paver. Any concrete not placed as herein prescribed within 30 minutes after mixing shall be rejected and disposed of except as provide otherwise herein. If in the opinion of the Contracting Officer, the temperature, wind, and/or humidity conditions are such that the quality of concrete will not be adversely affected, the specified placing time may be extended by a maximum of 45 minutes. Concrete with high range water reducing admixture shall not be placed after the slump has dropped by 3 inches or more.

3.5 JOINTS

A. Joints shall conform to the details indicated and shall be perpendicular to the finished grade of the pavement.

B. Transverse expansion and contraction joints shall be straight and continuous from edge of the pavement.

C. Expansion Joints shall be formed of preformed filler material. The filler shall be securely held in position by means of approved metal supports which shall remain in the pavement. A removable metal channel cap bar shall be used to hold the parts of the joint in proper position and protect the filler from damage during concreting operations. The cap bar shall be removable without damage to the pavement to provide a space for sealing of the joint. Adjacent sections of filler shall be fitted tightly together and the filler shall extend across the full width of the paving lane in order to prevent entrance of concrete into the expansion space. Expansion joints shall be formed about structures and features that project through, into, and against the pavement, using joint filler of the type, thickness, and width indicated, and installed in such a manner as to form a complete, uniform separation between the structure and pavement.

D. Construction Joints: Provide if an emergency stop occurs. Remove the concrete back to indicated location of expansion joint and install dowelled construction joint as shown.



E. Sealing Joints: Joints shall be sealed immediately following curing of the concrete or as soon thereafter as weather conditions permit, as directed. Crimping or sawing of filler-type joints shall be accomplished immediately before sealing of the joints.

F. Grooving and Sealing Cracks: Random cracks, except those specifically excluded by the Contracting Officer, that occur in the pavement during construction shall be grooved and sealed. The top of the crack shall be grooved to a depth of 3/4 inch and to a width not less than 3/8 inch or more than 5/8 inch by means of an approved mechanical grooving machine. The grooving tool shall be capable of following closely the path of the crack and of widening the top of the crack to the required section without damaging the concrete. Loose material shall be removed and the groove shall be completely sealed with an approved type of joint sealing material.

3.6 FINISHING

A. Formed Surfaces: Fins and loose material shall be removed. Unsound concrete and voids shall be cut back to solid concrete, reamed, brushed-coated with cement grout, and filled solid with a stiff portland-cement-sand mortar mix. Patchwork shall finish flush with adjoining concrete surfaces and, where exposed, shall match adjoining surfaces in texture and color. Patchwork shall be cured for 72 hours. White Portland cement shall be used as needed to attain color match.

B. A finish coat of mortar shall be applied on the exposed surfaces of the monolithic curbs. The mortar shall be composed of 1 part of Portland Cement and 2 parts of fine aggregate. A mortar coat will not be required for extruded curbs.

C. Unformed Surfaces: Surfaces shall be finished to a true plane with no deviation exceeding 5/16 inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge. Surfaces shall be pitched to drains. Surfaces shall be screeded and floated to the required level with no coarse aggregate visible before finishing as specified below.

1. Monolithic Finish: Monolithic finish shall be given to slabs unless otherwise specified. After the surface moisture has disappeared, floated-surfaces shall be steel-troweled to a smooth, even, dense finish free from blemish including trowel marks.

2. Nonslip Finish: Nonslip finish shall be given to stair treads, landings, exterior building entrances, vestibules, and sidewalks so indicated by brooming with a fiber-bristle brush in a direction transverse to that of main traffic.

3.7 PATCHING

A. Patch to match material, color and texture of surrounding area.

B. Replace defective work if patching is not acceptable to Contracting Officer.

3.8 CURING AND PROTECTION

A. Curing:

1. Immediately after the finishing operations, the exposed concrete surface shall be cured.

2. Immediately after finishing the concrete, the exposed surfaces shall be coated with a membrane-forming curing compound. The compound shall be applied in 2 coats by hand-operated pressure sprayers at a coverage of approximately



200 square feet per gallon for each coat. The second coat shall be applied in a direction approximately at right angles to the direction of application of the first coat. The compound shall form a uniform continuous, coherent film that will not check, crack, or peel and shall be free from pinholes or other imperfections. Concrete surfaces that are subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after the curing compound has been applied shall be repaved by the method and at the coverage specified above at no additional cost to the Government. Concrete surfaces to which membrane-curing compounds have been applied shall be adequately protected for seven days from pedestrian and vehicular traffic and from any other action which might disrupt the continuity of the membrane.

B. Backfilling: After curing, debris shall be removed, and the area adjoining the sidewalk shall be backfilled, graded, and compacted to conform to the surrounding area in accordance with the lines and grades indicated.

C. Protection: The completed sidewalk shall be protected from damage until accepted. The Contractor shall repair damaged concrete and clean concrete discolored during construction. Sidewalk that is damaged shall be removed and reconstructed for the entire length between regularly scheduled joints. Refinishing the damaged portion will not be acceptable. Removed damaged portions shall be disposed of as directed by the Contracting Officer.

3.9 CONCRETE INSPECTION AND TESTING

A. Contractor will employ and pay for concrete testing services as follow:

1. Perform concrete inspection and tests as listed in “Methods and sampling and Testing”, ASTM C94 latest edition, ACI 301, Chapter 16.

2. Slump, air content, density, temperature, and strength of the fresh concrete shall be tested at least once for every 5000 ft2 of pavement and at least once per day

END 32 13 13


SECTION 32 13 73 – CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS

Concrete Paving Joint Sealants 32 13 73 - 1

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. The Section includes the following:

1. Expansion and contraction joints within Portland cement concrete pavement. 2. Joints between Portland cement concrete and asphalt pavement.


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions.

B. Related Sections including the following:

1. Section 31 13 13 Concrete Paving for constructing joints in concrete paving.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with the provisions of Section 01 33 00.

1. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. 2. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of joint sealants certifying that

the products furnished comply with requirements and are suitable for the use indicated.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in installing joint sealants similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in joint-sealant installations with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer.


A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multi-component materials.

B. Store and handle materials to comply with manufacturer’s written instructions to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer.

2. When joint substrates are wet.

B. Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than that allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application




indicated.

C. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2.2 JOINT SEALANTS

A. Joint Sealer shall be TxDOT Class 2. Joint sealant shall be placed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommended procedures. The joint sealant shall have the following properties:

Color Gray

Flow, MIL-2-8802D, Sec 4.8.4, max 0.2

Working time, minutes 10

Tack Free time at 77° F +/- 2 F, MIL-2-8802D

Sec 4.8.7, minutes 60

Cure time at 77° F, days 7-14

Full Adhesion, days 14-21

As Cured – after 7 days at 77° F and 40% Relative Humidity

Elongation, minimum percent 1200

Durometer Hardness, Shore A, ASTM D 2240, min. 15

Joint movement capability, percent +100/-50

Tensile Strength, max. elongation,percent 100

Peal Strength, psi 25

2.3 JOINT-SEALANT BACKER MATERIALS

A. General: Provide joint-sealant backer materials that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by joint sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

2.4 PRIMERS




A. Primers: Product recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint sealant manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended in writing by joint sealant manufacturer, based on pre-construction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer’s written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoin surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer’s written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install backer materials of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position require to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of backer materials. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear backer materials. 3. Remove absorbent backer materials that have become wet before sealant

application and replace them with dry materials.

D. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths

that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

E. Tooling of Non-sag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to




form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by joint sealant manufacturer

and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.

F. For placement in vertical joints either of the following procedures may be used.

1. An amount of mixed material may be set aside until partial curing has taken place and carefully trowelled into the joint with a suitable tool.

2. The portion of the joint in roadway shall be poured and cured. The vertical curb faces shall then be taped or formed and the material poured into the vertical joint from the top.

G. Provide joint configuration to comply with joint sealant manufacturer’s written instructions, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Provide recessed joint configuration for silicone sealants of recess depth and at locations indicated.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work.






SECTION 32 17 23 – PAVEMENT MARKINGS

Pavement Markings 32 17 23 - 1

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Traffic line paint and thermoplastic material for traffic striping and marking.

B. Application of traffic striping and control markings.


A. Concrete paving is specified in Section 32 13 13 – Concrete Paving

B. All other painting is specified under Division 9.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. State of Texas Department of Transportation Standard Specifications, most recent edition.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Section 01 33 23 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Submittals.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings and diagrams indicating stripe width of divider stripes and parking stalls; configuration and dimensions of directional arrows, style, and size of letters for indicated designations; configuration and dimensions of international handicapped symbol; and any other traffic control markings on pavement.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Paint and Thermoplastic Material: Provide paint and thermoplastic material conforming to the requirements of TXDOT Standard Specifications, colors as indicated on the Drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Apply no paint or thermoplastic material until pavement has cured for at least 3 days or for the number of days as recommended by the manufacturer, whichever is longer. Ensure that pavement has cured sufficiently to carry application equipment without damage.

B. Provide traffic striping and control markings on pavement, parking stalls, and curbs in accordance with the layout configurations, and dimensions indicated on the Drawings and approved shop drawings.

C. Application equipment and procedures shall conform to the applicable requirements of the TX DOT Standard Specifications. Keep paint thoroughly mixed throughout application.

D. Traffic control markings and parking stalls shall be applied with the use of substantial cutout patterns and templates, or with striping equipment that applies straight, uniform width, sharp lines. Coverage shall be thorough and complete in accordance


SECTION 32 17 23 – PAVEMENT MARKINGS

Pavement Markings 32 17 23 - 2

with the paint and thermoplastic manufacturer’s instructions.

1. Provide three coats for painted striping and pavement markings. Application rate per coat shall match that specified in the TX DOT Standard Specifications.

2. Apply thermoplastic material at a minimum thickness of 0.125 inch or at the manufacturer’s recommended minimum thickness, whichever is greater.

E. Traffic control markings and parking stalls shall be sharp and accurate, straight where required without fuzziness at edges of lines.

F. Accessible parking stalls shall include the International Symbol for Accessibility.

G. At completion, the Contractor shall check the work thoroughly and shall touch up traffic control markings and parking stalls that are not distinct or thorough in coverage, or are not uniform in color.

3.2 TOLERANCES AND APPEARANCE

A. In addition to the tolerances and appearance requirements specified in the TX DOT Standard Specifications, edges shall be uniform with local variations not exceeding 1/8 inch per foot and surfaces shall be smooth and uniform.

B. Letter sizes and patterns shall be as indicated on the Drawings with variations of not more than plus or minus 15 percent in dimension.


DIVISION 32 – SITEWORK Section 32 31 00 – FENCES & GATES

FENCES & GATES 32 31 00 -1

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:

1. Contractor provide:

a. Aluminum posts. b. Aluminum gates, hinges and cane bolts. c. Fittings and accessories to complete fence enclosures.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. 3. Section 04 20 00 – Unit Masonry. 4. Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications. 5. Section 32 13 13 – Concrete Paving. 6. Section 32 13 73 – Concrete Paving Joint Sealants.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 2. ASTM B221 - Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles,

and Tubes. 3. ASTM D822 - Filtered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc Exposures of Paint and Related

Coatings. 4. ASTM D2794 - Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid

Deformation (Impact). 5. ASTM D3363 - Test Method for Film Hardness by Pencil Test.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: All products covered under this Section shall be produced by a single manufacturer unless otherwise specified.

B. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed fences and gates similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Source Limitations for Fences and Gates: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, and variety of component for fences and gates from one source with resources to provide fences and gates of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit in accord with 01 33 00:

B. Product Data: Material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for the following:


1. Fence and gate posts, rails and fittings. 2. Gates, hardware and attachments.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Show locations of gate, posts, rails, hardware, and accessories. 2. Indicate materials, dimensions, sizes, weights, and finishes of components. 3. Include plans, elevations, sections, gate swing and other required installation and

operational clearances, and details of post anchorage, attachment and bracing.

D. Samples: Provide 12 inch long samples of each component.


A. General: Deliver and store in accord with Section 01 66 00.

B. Packaged Materials:

1. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use.

2. Comply with requirement of ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed packages.


A. Coordinate sequencing and scheduling of work with other supporting, adjacent, contiguous or otherwise related material trades.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's standard warranty.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with the following provide products as manufactured by Ametco Manufacturing Corporation, 4326 Hamann Parkway, Willoughby, Ohio 44096.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Extruded aluminum: ASTM B221, Alloy 6063, Temper T-6.

B. Sheet aluminum: ASTM B209, Alloy 6063, Temper T-6.

C. Grout: Non-shrink type, pre-mixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, and water-reducing and plasticizing additives.

2.3 FENCE SYSTEM

A. Type: Ornamental fencing system consisting of vertical, fixed louver, modular fence panels fabricated with extruded aluminum framing bars and supported by extruded aluminum fence posts.

1. Style: Saturn Aluminum Fixed Louver Fencing as manufactured by Ametco Manufacturing Corporation.

B. Fence Panel:


1. Fixed louver blades: Extruded tubular aluminum louver blades spaced at 4 inches to provide 100 percent direct visual screening.

a. Size: 1/2 by 4 inches. b. Material thickness: 0.09 inch.

2. Framing bars: Extruded aluminum flat bars welded to ends of louvers. 3. Panel height: As indicated on drawings. 4. Panel width: As indicated on drawings.

C. Posts:

1. Type: 5-inch square extruded tubular aluminum sections with solid aluminum caps. 2. Length: As indicated on drawings.

2.4 GATES

A. Type: Hinged swinging single and double gate as indicated on drawings.

1. Construction: Welded frame fabricated from 2-inch square extruded aluminum tubing with aluminum fixed louver panels to match fencing material.

a. Size: As indicated on drawings. b. Hardware:

1.) Hinges: Heavy duty, brass bearing.

a) Provide 2 hinges for each leaf up to 6 feet high and 1 additional hinge for each additional 24 inches in height or fraction thereof.

2.) Latch: 3/4 inch diameter slide bolt to accommodate padlock. 3.) For double gates provide padlockable, 5/8 inch diameter center cane

bolt assembly and strike.

2.5 FACTORY FINISH

A. Large gate panels shall be coated with 2-part polyurethane coating.

B. Polyurethane coating: 1.0 mil dry film thickness of coating of test panel cured 30 minutes at 180 degrees F and aged 14 days shall resist the following test conditions without failure:

1. 5 percent salt spray for 500 hours. 2. 100 percent relative humidity for 1000 hours. 3. Water immersion for 100 hours. 4. 20 double rubs with cloth saturated with either lacquer thinner, acetone, MEK,

gasoline, or xylene. 5. Exposure to lubricating oils, hydraulic fluids, and cutting oils. 6. 16 cycles of 24 hours at 100 percent humidity, 24 hours at 10 degrees F, and 24

hours at 77 degrees F. 7. Hardness: H to 2H. 8. Flexibility: 1/8 inch conical mandrel.

C. Color: Silver.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for earthwork, pavement work, and other conditions affecting performance.


B. Prior to fabrication, field verify required dimensions.

C. Do not begin installation before final grading is completed, unless otherwise permitted by Contracting Officer or designated representative.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install fencing in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and approved shop drawings.

B. Install fence posts plumb and level.

C. Do not install bent, bowed, or otherwise damaged panels.

1. Remove damaged components from site and replace.

D. Secure fence panels with standard stainless steel bolts to fence posts after posts have been set in footings.

E. Gates:

1. Install gates and adjust hardware for smooth operation. 2. Provide concrete center foundation depth and drop rod retainers at center of

double swinging gate openings.

F. Touch-up damaged finish with paint supplied by manufacturer and matching original coating.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Gate: Adjust gate to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free from binding, warp, excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire operational range.

B. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding.

C. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts.

END 32 31 00

DIVISION 32 – SITEWORK Section 32 33 13 – SITE BICYCLE RACKS

SITE BICYCLE RACKS 32 33 13-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:

1. Contractor Provide:

a. Bicycle bollard products and accessories. b. Coordination of work with trades.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 01 – General Requirements. 2. Section 31 20 00 – Earthwork. 3. Section 32 13 13 – Site Concrete Work.


A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless.

B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A513 Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon and Alloy Steel Mechanical Tubing.

C. Steel Bar: ASTM A36 Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.

D. Hot-Dipped Galvanized Finish: ASTM A123 Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dipped-Galvanized) Coating on Iron and Steel Products.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. In accord with 01 33 00:

1. Shop Drawings detailing layout of work and anchoring methods. 2. Manufacturer's technical data illustrating physical characteristics including shape,

dimensions, bicycle parking capacity and finish. 3. Samples of manufacturer’s standard finish colors for selection by Contracting

Officer or designated representative and as approved by JBSA-Sam Houston representative.

B. Submit manufacturer’s written recommendations on methods for repairing damage to finish.

1.5 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Coordinate for delivery of products in a timely manner so as not to delay work.

B. Coordinate installation of products with Site Paving operations.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS


A. Madrax, Inc. 2210 Pinehurst Drive Middelton, WI 53562 800-448-7931

B. Columbia Cascade 1975 S. W. Fifth Avenue

Portland, OR 97201-5293 503-223-1157

C. Creative Pipe, Inc. 2629 Manhattan Avenue, # 289 Hermosa Beach, CA 90254-2447 310-376-9536

2.2 GENERAL

A. Provide manufacturers standard 36-inch high, decorative bollard type bicycle parking stand.

B. Bollards shall be provided with extended end designed to be permanently embedded into 12 inch diameter, concrete filled post holes using standard anchorages as furnished by manufacturer.

C. Each Bollard shall be equipped with two round attachment bars for chaining bicycles in finish to match bollard.

D. Tops shall be manufacturer’s standard domed type in material and finish to match bollard.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate bollard from ASTM A53, 8 inch I.D. (8 ½ inch O.D. x 0.237 inch thick wall), schedule 40, galvanized steel pipe.

B. Attachment bars shall be constructed from ASTM A36, 1 inch O.D., galvanized steel round bars.

C. All components shall be hot-dipped galvanized and finished with a polyester powder coating in color from manufacturer’s standard finishes as selected by Contracting Officer or designated representative and as approved by JBSA-Sam Houston DPW and their IDG criteria.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Check areas to receive bicycle bollards for conditions that would affect quality and execution of work.

B. Confirm that site and building construction has progressed to a point in which the installation will not interfere or be damaged by other construction operations.

C. Contractor schedule delivery of bicycle bollard materials so that construction activities will not be delayed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Handle and install bicycle bollards in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and installation instructions.

B. Excavate and fill postholes with minimum 2000 p.s.i. concrete, embed and anchor bollards per written installation instructions and as indicated.

C. Set bicycle bollards secured, level, plumb and true to line, in correct relationship to adjacent construction as indicated.

3.3 CLEAN UP

A. Remove all excess materials and debris resulting from work and dispose of legally, leaving work areas in a clean, safe condition.

B. Inspect installation for defective materials and workmanship and promptly repair or replace any defective items with new, acceptable materials.

C. Clean bicycle bollards and protect until final acceptance by Contracting Officer.

END 32 33 13


SECTION 32 92 00 – TURF & GRASSES

Turf & Grasses 32 92 00 - 1


A. Seeding, optional Hydroseeding, mulching, and fertilizing.

B. Maintenance. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 31 20 00 - Earth Moving

B. Section 31 23 33 – Excavation Backfill and Compaction for Utilities.

C. Section 31 21 00 - Landscape Grading. 1.03 REFERENCES

A. FS O-F-241 - Fertilizers, Mixed, Commercial. 1.04 DEFINITIONS

A. Weeds: Include Dandelion, Jimsonweed, Quackgrass, Horsetail, Morning Glory, Rush Grass, Mustard, Lambsquarter, Chickweed, Cress, Crabgrass, Canadian Thistle, Nutgrass, Poison Oak, Blackberry, Tansy Ragwort, Bermuda Grass, Johnson Grass, Poison Ivy, Nut Sedge, Nimble Will, Bindweed, Bent Grass, Wild Garlic, Perennial Sorrel, and Brome Grass.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Specification Section 01 77 00 – Project Closeout.

B. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions, recommended cutting methods and maximum grass height, types, application frequency, and recommended coverage of fertilizer.

C. Product Data: Submit seed vendors' certified statement for grass seed mixture

required, stating botanical and common names, percentage by weight, and percentages of purity, germination, and weed seed for each grass seed species.

D. Certificate of Compliance: See Regulatory requirements.


A. Provide seed mixture in containers showing percentage of seed mix, year of production, net weight, date of packaging, and location of packaging.





A. Comply with regulatory agencies for fertilizer and herbicide composition.

B. Provide certificate of compliance from Contracting Officer indicating approval of seed mixture.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Transport, handle, store, and protect products in accordance with Specification Section 01 65 00 – Material and Equipment, and Section 01 66 00 – Storage and Protection.

B. Deliver grass seed mixture in sealed containers. Seed that is wet or moldy or

that has been otherwise damaged in transit or storage will not be acceptable.

C. Deliver fertilizer in waterproof bags showing weight, chemical analysis, and name of manufacturer.

1.09 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Provide lawn maintenance including, but not limited to watering, cutting, weeding, fertilizing, re-seeding areas that are not taking hold for all seeded areas for three hundred and sixty (360) days after the Date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SEED MIXTURE

A. Seed Mixture: Provide fresh, clean, new-crop seed complying with tolerance for purity and germination established by U.S. Department of Agriculture Rules and Regulations under the Federal Seed Act.

B. Seed mix required as follows: 100% 429 TifWay Bermuda grass – Cynodon transvallenisis x C. dactylon

2.02 SOIL MATERIALS

A. Topsoil: As specified in Specification SECTION31 20 00 – Earth Moving.




2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Mulching Material: Wood cellulose fiber, free of growth or germination inhibiting ingredients.

B. Fertilizer: FS O-F-241, recommended for grass, with fifty percent of the elements

derived from organic sources; of proportion necessary to eliminate any deficiencies of topsoil, as indicated in analysis to the following proportions: Nitrogen 12 percent, phosphoric acid 12 percent, soluble potash 12 percent.

C. Water: Clean, fresh, potable, and free of substances or matter which could inhibit vigorous growth of grass.

1. Water will be provided to the Landscape Contractor at the building hose

bibbs.

2. The Landscape Contractor shall furnish all equipment and hose as required to properly water the seeded areas.

D. Herbicide: Teflan or approved equal.

A. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that prepared topsoil base is ready to receive the work of this Specification Section.

3.02 PREPARATION OF SUBSOIL

A. Prepare subsoil as per Specification Section 31 21 00 Landscape Grading. 3.03 PLACING TOPSOIL

A. Place topsoil as per Specification Section 31 21 00 Landscape Grading. 3.04 FERTILIZING

A. Apply fertilizer at a rate of 30 pounds per 1,000 square feet.

B. Apply after smooth raking of topsoil and prior to roller compaction.

C. Do not apply fertilizer at same time or with same machine as will be used to apply seed.




D. Mix thoroughly into upper 2 inches of topsoil.

E. Lightly water to aid the dissipation of fertilizer. 3.05 SEEDING

A. Apply seed at a rate of 6 lbs per 1000 sq ft evenly in two intersecting directions. Rake in lightly.

B. Do not seed areas in excess of that which can be mulched on same day.

C. Planting Season: As established by the Contracting Officer.

D. Do not sow immediately following rain, when ground is too dry, or during windy

periods.

E. Roll seeded area with roller not exceeding 112 lbs.

F. Immediately following seeding and compacting, apply mulch to a thickness of 1/8 inches. Maintain mulch clear of shrubs and trees.

G. Apply water with a fine spray immediately after each area has been mulched.

Saturate the depth of the topsoil. 3.06 OPTIONAL HYDROSEEDING

A. Apply seeded slurry with a hydraulic seeder at a rate of 6 lbs per 1000 sq ft evenly in two intersecting directions.

B. Do not hydroseed areas in excess of that which can be mulched on the same

day.

C. Immediately following seeding, apply mulch to a thickness of 1/8 inches. Maintain mulch clear of shrubs and trees.

D. Apply water with a fine spray immediately after each area has been mulched.

Saturate to the depth of the topsoil.

3.07 SEED PROTECTION

A. Identify seeded areas with stakes and string around area periphery. Set string height to 36 inches. Space stakes at 60 inches.

3.08 MAINTENANCE




A. Mow grass at regular intervals to maintain at a maximum height of 2-1/2 inches. Do not cut more than 1/3 of grass blade at any one mowing.

B. Neatly trim edges and hand clip where necessary.

C. Immediately remove clippings from Government Property after mowing and

trimming.

D. Water to prevent grass and soil from drying out.

E. Roll surface to remove minor depressions or irregularities.

F. Control growth of weeds. Apply herbicides in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remedy damage resulting from improper use of herbicides.

G. Immediately reseed areas which show bare spots.

H. Protect seeded areas with warning signs during maintenance period.

3.9 SCHEDULE

A. All project disturbed areas not scheduled to receive impervious materials, or plant bed areas, as shown on drawings, shall receive grass seed in accordance with this Specification Section. Verify extent of work with the Contracting Officer.



SECTION 32 93 00 – PLANTS

Plants 32 93 00 - 1


A. Preparation of subsoil and topsoil.

B. Topsoil bedding.

C. New trees.

D. Mulch and fertilizer.

E. Maintenance. F. Tree Pruning.


A. Section 31 20 00 – Earth Moving.

B. Section31 21 00 – Landscape Grading.

C. Section 31 23 33 – Excavation Backfill and Compaction for Utilities.

D. Section 32 92 00 – Turf & Grasses.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ANSI Z60.1 - American Standard for Nursery Stock.

B. NAA (National Arborist Association) - Pruning Standards for Shade Trees.

1.04 DEFINITIONS

A. Weeds: Include Dandelion, Jimsonweed, Quackgrass, Horsetail, Morning Glory, Rush Grass, Mustard, Lambsquarter, Chickweed, Cress, Crabgrass, Canadian Thistle, Nutgrass, Poison Oak, Blackberry, Tansy Ragwort, Bermuda Grass, Johnson Grass, Poison Ivy, Nut Sedge, Nimble Will, Bindweed, Bent Grass, Wild Garlic, Perennial Sorrel, and Brome Grass.

B. Plants: Living trees, plants, and ground cover specified in this Section.



Plants 32 93 00 - 2

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 30 00 – Shop Drawing, Product Data & Submittals.

B. Certificate of Inspection of Plant Material by State or Federal Authorities.

C. Maintenance Data: Include pruning and trimming method; types, application frequency, and recommended coverage of fertilizer for all installed plants.

D. Submit list of plant material sources.

E. Submit one 2 lb bagged sample of gravel mulch for approval by Contracting

Officer.


A. Nursery Qualifications: Company specializing. in growing and cultivating the plants with minimum five years experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing and planting the

plants with minimum three years experience and approved by nursery.

C. Tree Pruner Qualifications: Company specializing in pruning trees with proof of Arborist Certification.

D. Tree Pruning: NAA - Pruning Standards for Shade Trees.

E. Maintenance Services: Performed by qualified installer.

F. Plant Materials: Nursery grown trees and shrubs grown in a recognized nursery

in accordance with good horticultural practice with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide only healthy, vigorous stock, free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement.

1.07 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Do not make substitutions of tree and shrub materials. If required landscape material is not obtainable, submit proof of non-availability to Contracting Officer and a proposal for use of equivalent material.

1.08 INSPECTION

A. The Contracting Officer may inspect trees and shrubs either at the place of growth or at site before planting for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, size and quality. Contracting Officer retains the right to inspect trees and shrubs further for size and condition of balls and root systems, insects,



Plants 32 93 00 - 3

injuries, and latent defects and to reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove rejected trees or shrubs immediately from project site and replace with new material.


A. Comply with regulatory agencies for fertilizer and herbicide composition.

B. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of plants, fertilizer and herbicide mixture.

C. Plant Materials: Certified by federal or state department of agriculture Described

by ASTM Z60.1; free of disease or hazardous insects. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01 66 00.

B. Deliver fertilizer in waterproof bags showing weight, chemical analysis, name of

manufacturer, and certification of conformance to State regulations.

C. Protect and maintain plant materials until planted.

D. Deliver plant life materials immediately prior to placement. Do not deliver more plant material than can be planted in one day. Keep plants moist.

E. Label at least one tree of each variety with a securely attached waterproof tag

bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. Where formal arrangements or consecutive order of trees are shown, select stock for uniform height and spread.

F. Prune, thin out, and shape trees and shrubs in accordance with standard

horticultural practice. Prune trees to retain required height and spread. Unless otherwise directed by the Contracting Officer, do not cut tree leaders, and remove only injured or dead branches from trees.

1.11 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not install plant materials when ambient temperatures may drop below 35 degrees F (2 degrees C) or rise above 90 degrees F (32 degrees C); where soil is frozen or muddy.

B. Do not install plant life when wind velocity exceeds 30 mph (48 k/hr).



Plants 32 93 00 - 4

1.12 WARRANTY

A. Provide one-year warranty.

B. Warranty: Include coverage for one continuous growing season after all plant materials are installed; replace dead or unhealthy plants, or plants dead beyond normal pruning limits.

C. Replacements: Plants of same size and species as specified, planted in the next

growing season, with a new warranty commencing on date of replacement. 1.13 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Maintain plant life for three hundred and sixty (360) days after Date of Substantial Completion.

B. Maintain plant life immediately after placement until plants are well established

and exhibit a vigorous growing condition. Continue maintenance until termination of warranty period.

C. Maintenance to include:

1. Cultivation and weeding plant beds and tree mulch rings. 2. Applying herbicides for weed control in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions. Remedy damage resulting from use of herbicides. 3. Remedy damage from use of insecticides. 4. Water sufficient to saturate root system. 5. Pruning, including removal of dead or broken branches. 6. Disease control. 7. Replacement of hardwood mulch.

D. Inspect plant life at a minimum of once per week. Perform maintenance

promptly.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 TREES, PLANTS, AND GROUND COVER

A. Trees, Plants, and Ground Cover: Species and size identifiable in plant schedule, grown in climatic conditions similar to those in locality of the Work.

2.02 SIZE

A. Provide trees of the sizes indicated in plant list and in accordance with dimensional relationship requirements of ANSI Z60.1 for kind and shape of trees required. Trees of larger size than specified may be used if approved by the Contracting Officer. Size of roots or balls shall be increased proportionately.



Plants 32 93 00 - 5

2.03 MEASUREMENTS

A. Measure trees with branches and trunks or canes in their normal position. Do not prune to obtain required sizes. Take caliper measurements 6 inches above ground for trees up to 4 inches caliper size, and 12 inches above ground for larger sizes.

2.04 SOIL MATERIALS

A. Provide topsoil that is fertile, friable, naturally loamy, surface soil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, brush, weeds, and other litter and free of roots, stumps, stones larger than 2 inches in any dimension, and other extraneous or toxic matter harmful to plant growth. On-site soil may be used, if it is determined acceptable by the Contracting Officer.

B. If on-site is not suitable, obtain topsoil from local sources or from areas having

similar soil characteristics to that found at site of work. Obtain topsoil from naturally well-drained sites where topsoil is at least 4 inches deep; do not obtain from bogs or marshes.

2.05 SOIL AMENDMENT MATERIALS

A. Fertilizer: Containing fifty percent of the elements derived from organic sources; of proportion, necessary to eliminate any deficiencies of topsoil to the following proportions: Nitrogen 11 percent, phosphoric acid 8 percent, soluble potash 4 percent.

B. Peat Moss: Shredded, loose, sphagnum moss; free of lumps, roots, inorganic

material or acidic materials; minimum of 85 percent organic material measured by oven dry weight, pH range of 4 to 5; moisture content of 30 percent.

C. Bone Meal: Raw, finely ground, commercial grade, minimum of 3 percent

nitrogen and 20 percent phosphorous.

D. Lime: Ground limestone, dolomite type, minimum 95 percent carbonates.

E. Water: Clean, fresh, and free of substances or matter which could inhibit vigorous growth of plants.

1. Water will be provided by the contractor at the nearest available source in

the vicinity of the project. Contractor to furnish hose and other equipment.

F. Woven Weed Barrier: Material - Polypropylene 1. Color - Black with Gold Stripe every 12 inches.

2. Permeability - 12 gal/sqft/min

3. Tensile Strength (lbs) - Warp - 100 / Fill – 60



Plants 32 93 00 - 6

4. Elongation (%) - Warp 23 / Fill 17

5. Trapezoid Tear - 70 lbs.

6. Burst Strength - 85 psi

7. UV Exposure - 73% after 2500 hours

2.06 MULCH MATERIALS

A. Mulching Material: Mulch shall be fine grade of shredded hardwood bark, 'Paygro' or an approved equal. Mulch shall be free of foreign matter and wood particles over 6" in length or 2" in width.

B. Decorative Gravel: [to be determined] 2.07 ACCESSORIES

A. Anti-desiccant: Emulsion type, film-forming agent designed to permit transpiration, but retard excessive loss, of moisture from plants. Deliver in manufacturer’s fully identified containers and mix in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.


A. Verify that prepared subsoil is ready to receive work; coordinate with lawn work; install plant materials after lawn grading, but prior to seed or sod work. If planting of trees occurs after lawn work, protect lawn areas and promptly repair damage to lawns resulting from planting operations.

B. Saturate soil with water to test drainage.

3.02 PREPARATION OF SUBSOIL

A. Prepare subsoil as per Specification Section 31 20 00.

B. Dig pits and beds 6 inches larger than plant root system.

3.03 PLACING TOPSOIL

A. Place topsoil as per Specification Section 31 20 00.



Plants 32 93 00 - 7

3.04 FERTILIZING

A. Apply fertilizer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Apply after initial raking of topsoil.

C. Mix thoroughly into upper 2 inches of topsoil.

D. Lightly water to aid the dissipation of fertilizer. 3.05 PLANTING

A. Place plants for best appearance for review and final orientation by Contracting Officer.

B. Space plants in beds as shown on drawings. C. Set plants in pits or beds, partly filled with prepared plant mix, at a minimum

depth of 6 inches under each plant. Remove all twine, containers, bags and roping from base of trunks. Remove top 1/3 of the wire from root balls having wire baskets. Remove all rot-proof burlap.

D. Saturate soil with water when the pit or bed is half full of topsoil and again when

full. 3.06 TREE PRUNING

A. Prune trees to NAA Class 1 - Fine Pruning. B. Remove and replace excessively pruned or malformed stock resulting from

improper pruning. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Section 01 42 10 - Quality Control: Field inspection and testing.

B. Plants will be rejected if a ball of earth surrounding roots has been disturbed or damaged prior to or during planting.

3.08 MAINTENANCE

A. Neatly trim plants where necessary removing dead or broken branches. Do not sheer plants into smooth, regular shapes.

B. Immediately remove clippings after trimming.



Plants 32 93 00 - 8

C. Water to prevent soil from drying out. 1. Water will be provided to the Landscape Contractor at the building hose

bibbs. 2. The Landscape Contractor shall furnish equipment and hose as needed.

D. Control growth of weeds. Apply herbicides in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.

E. Apply pesticides in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 3.09 SCHEDULE - PLANT LIST

A. See schedule on Landscape Plan. 3.10 SITE RESTORATION

A. Daily: At the end of each day, the grounds shall be cleaned of all landscape contractor- related refuse and debris.

B. Upon completion: All paved surfaces affected by planting operations will be swept and hosed off. All plant beds shall be free of weeds.


Division 33 – Utilties

Section 33 01 10 – Pressure and Leakage Tests

Pressure and Leakage Tests 33 01 10 - 1

PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Test all piping, valves, and appurtenances installed under this Contract. Testing shall be performed concurrent with installation. Do not install more than 1,000 feet of pipe without being tested, unless approved by the Contracting Officer.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Prepare and submit schedules and procedures to the Contracting Officer for testing of all parts of the water main installed in accordance with this Contract. Submit the schedule at least seven days prior to any testing.

PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT

A. Furnish the pump, pipe connections, and all necessary apparatus for the pressure and leakage tests including gauges and metering devices. The Contracting Officer reserves the option to furnish the gauges and metering devices for the tests. Excavate, backfill, and furnish all necessary assistance for conducting the tests.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL

A. Leakage Tests must be in accordance with ASTM C969 and C1244. Leakage test are required for all gravity lines. Perform hydrostatic pressure tests in accordance with AWWA C600, Section 5.2 - Hydrostatic Testing after the pipe or section of pipe has been laid, thrust blocking cured (min. 5 days), and the trench is completely or partially backfilled. Where practical, testing shall be performed fully isolated from the active distribution system.

B. Contractor may, at his option, completely backfill the trench or partially backfill

the trench over the center portion of each pipe section to be tested. However, the Contracting Officer may direct the Contractor to completely backfill the trench if local traffic or safety conditions require.

C. For system operating pressures of 200 psi or less, perform the hydrostatic test at

a pressure of no less than 100 psi above the normal operating pressure without exceeding the rating of the pipe and appurtenances. For system operating pressures in excess of 200 psi, perform the hydrostatic test at a pressure that is 1.5 times the normal operating pressure, but no more than the design rating of the pipe and appurtenances.




D. Valves shall not be operated in either direction at a differential pressure exceeding the rated valve working pressure. A test pressure greater than the rated valve working pressure can result in trapped test pressure between the gates of a double-disc gate valve. For tests exceeding the rated valve working pressure, the test setup should include a provision, independent of the valve, to reduce the line pressure to the rated valve working pressure on completion of the test. The valve can then be opened enough to equalize the trapped pressure with the line pressure, or the valve can be fully opened if desired.

E. The test pressure shall not exceed the rated working pressure or differential

pressure of the valves when the pressure boundary of the test section includes closed, resilient-seated gate valves or butterfly valves.

F. Contractor shall attach a tapping sleeve and valve assembly to the main, and

pressure test the assembly prior to making the tap. The required test pressure shall be determined in the same manner as for pipe. The test is acceptable if there is no pressure drop in 15 minutes at test pressure.

3.02 FILLING AND TESTING

A. Slowly fill each segregated section of pipeline with water ensuring that all air is expelled. Extreme care must be taken to ensure that all air is expelled during the filling of pipe. The line shall stand full of water for at least twenty-four hours prior to testing to allow all air to escape. If necessary, tap the main at points of highest elevation to expel air as the pipe is filled. Remove the corporation stops and plug the taps after successfully filling the pipeline and expelling all air as approved by the Contracting Officer.

B. Apply the specified test pressure, measured at the point of lowest elevation,

using a suitable pump connected to the pipe in a manner satisfactory to the Contracting Officer. If the elevation of the high point of the pipeline being tested is such that the pressure during testing will be below 85% of the required test pressure, the Contracting Officer will require a separate test to be performed on this section of pipeline. In lieu of a separate test, the test pressure measured at the lowest elevation may be increased, within the pressure rating of the pipeline material, such that the resulting pressure at the highest point exceeds 85% of the required test pressure. The test will be conducted for at least two (2) hours at the required test pressure ± 5 psi.

C. Conduct a leakage test concurrently with the pressure test. Leakage is defined

as the volume of water that must be supplied into the newly laid pipeline to maintain pressure within ± 5 psi of the test pressure after it is filled and purged of air. Measure the volume of water using a calibrated container or meter.

D. No pipeline installation will be accepted by the Contracting Officer if the leakage

is greater than that shown in the following table:




Allowable Leakage per 1000 ft. of Pipeline*---gph __________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________ *If the pipeline under test contains sections of various diameters, the allowable leakage will be the sum of the computed leakage for each size.

The table has been generated from the formula: 000,148

* PDSL =

Where: L is the allowable leakage in gallons per hour,

S is the length of pipe in feet, D is the nominal pipe diameter in inches, and P is the average test pressure in psig.

E. Should any test disclose damaged or defective materials or leakage greater than that permitted, the Contractor shall, at the Contractor’s expense, locate and repair and/or replace the damaged or defective materials. Materials used for repair must be approved by the Contracting Officer and meet the relevant specifications. Repeat the tests until the leakage is within the permitted allowance and is satisfactory to the Contracting Officer.


Division 33 – Utilities

Section 33 01 15 – Disinfecting Pipelines

Disinfecting Pipelines 33 01 15 - 1

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Flush and disinfect all pipelines installed under this Contract as indicated in the Drawings. This would include furnishing the necessary labor, tools, transportation, and other equipment for the operation of valves, hydrants, and blowoffs during chlorination. Install, and if directed by the Contracting Officer, remove all chlorination taps required for disinfection. Disinfection will be performed under the supervision of the Contracting Officer.

1.03 PROTECTION

A. Chlorine disinfection and dechlorination shall be under the direct supervision of someone familiar with the physiological, chemical, and physical properties of the form of chlorine used. They shall be trained and equipped to handle any emergency that may arise. All personnel involved shall observe appropriate safety practices to protect working personnel and the public.

B. The forwards of AWWA Standards B300 and B301 contain information and

additional reference material regarding the safe handling of hypochlorites and liquid chlorine. The Contractor shall familiarize himself with this information prior to performing any disinfection work.

1.04 SUBMITTAL

A. Conform to the requirements of Section 01 33 00 – Shop Drawings, Product

Data, & Submittals

1.05 RELATED WORK

A. Observe the precautions described in Section 33 11 00 – Piping – General

Provisions to avoid contamination during installation of the pipeline.

1.06 REFERENCES

A. Refer to current AWWA Standard C651 for Disinfecting Water Mains.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Furnish liquid chlorine and/or calcium hypochlorite and injection equipment as needed to disinfect all pipelines and appurtenances.




B. Liquid chlorine contains 100% available chlorine and is packaged in steel containers, usually of 100 lb, 150 lb, or 1 ton net chlorine weight. Liquid chlorine shall be furnished in accordance with AWWA B301.

C. Calcium hypochlorite is available in granular form or in approximately 5-g tablets,

and contains approximately 65% available chlorine by weight. The material should be stored in a cool, dry, and dark environment to minimize its deterioration. Do not use calcium hypochlorite intend for swimming pool disinfection, as this material (containing trichloroisocyanuric acid) has been sequestered and is extremely difficult to eliminate from the pipe after the desired contact time had been achieved.

D. Calcium hypochlorite must conform to AWWA B300.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. All pipelines shall be pressure and leak tested, flushed, and cleaned of debris and dirt prior to application of the disinfectant. Flushing shall continue until the volume in the newly installed main has turned over at least one time unless the Contracting Officer determines that conditions do not permit the required volume to be safely discharged to waste.

3.02 APPLICATION OF DISINFECTANT

A. Methods to be used for disinfection are those detailed in ANSI/AWWA C651

Disinfecting Water Mains.

3.03 WATER MAINS

Three methods of chlorination are described below. The third method, using tablets of hypochlorite, is only permitted by expressed approval of the Contracting Officer and under no circumstance allowed for projects of 2000 feet or more. Otherwise, information in the forward of AWWA Standard C651 will be helpful in determining the best method to be used.

A. Continuous Feed Method

1. Set-up

a. The continuous feed method consists of completely filling the main to

remove all air pockets, flushing the completed main to remove particulates, and then refilling the main with chlorinated potable water. The potable water shall be chlorinated, so that after a 24-hour holding period in the main, there will be a free chlorine residual of not less than 10 mg/L in collected samples.




b. Chlorine can be applied in advance of preliminary flushing by swabbing joints with bleach or placing calcium hypochlorite granules in the pipe in areas where contamination is suspected. In any such case, the Contractor shall make sure and take appropriate action to make sure that the flushed water is dechlorinated.

c. Preliminary flushing - Prior to being chlorinated, fill the main to eliminate

air pockets and flush to remove particulates. The flushing velocity in the main shall be not less than 2.5 ft/sec unless the Contracting Officer determines that conditions do not permit the required flow to be discharged to waste. Table 1 below shows the rates of flow required to produce a velocity of 2.5 ft/sec in pipes of various sizes.

NOTE: Flushing is no substitute for preventive measures during construction.

Certain contaminants such as caked deposits resist flushing at any feasible velocity.

TABLE 1 Required Flow and Openings to Flush Pipelines

(40 psi Residual Pressure in Water Main)*

Pipe Diameter (inches)

Flow Required to Produce 2.5 ft/sec

velocity in main (gpm)

Size of Tap, (inches) Number of 2½-inch Hydrant

Outlets to Use

1 1-1/2 2 Number of taps on

Pipe † 4 100 1 - - 1 6 200 - 1 - 1 8 400 - 2 1 1 10 600 - 3 2 1 12 900 - - 2 2 16 1600 - - 4 2

*With a 40 psi pressure in the main with the hydrant flowing to atmosphere, a 2½-inch hydrant outlet will discharge approximately 1,000 gpm and a 4½-inch hydrant outlet will discharge approximately 2,500 gpm. † Number of taps on pipe based on discharging through 5 feet of galvanized iron pipe with one 90° elbow.

d. In mains of 24-inches or larger diameter, an acceptable alternative to flushing is to broom-sweep the main, carefully removing all sweepings prior to chlorinating the main.

2. Chlorinating the Main




a. Flow water from the existing distribution system or other approved source

of supply at a constant, measured rate into the newly laid water main. In the absence of a meter, approximate the rate by placing a Pitot gauge in the discharge or measuring the time to fill a container of known volume.

b. At a point not more than 10 feet downstream from the beginning of the new

main, dose the water entering the new main with chlorine fed at a constant rate such that the water will have not less than 25 mg/L free chlorine. Measure the chlorine concentration at regular intervals to ensure that this concentration is provided. Measure chlorine in accordance with the procedures described in the current edition of the AWWA Manual M12 or of Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater.

c. Table 2 below gives the amount of chlorine required for each 100 feet of

pipe of various diameters. Solutions of 1 percent chlorine may be prepared with calcium hypochlorite. The solution requires 1 pound of calcium hypochlorite in 8 gallons of water.

TABLE 2

Chlorine Required to produce 25 mg/L Concentration in 100 feet of Pipe by Diameter

Pipe Diameter

(inches) 100% Chlorine

(lb) 1% Chlorine Solution

(gallons)

4 0.013 0.16 6 0.030 0.36 8 0.054 0.65

10 0.085 1.02 12 0.120 1.44 16 0.217 2.60

d. During the application of chlorine, position valves so that the strong chlorine solution in the main being treated will not flow into water mains in active service. Do not stop the chlorine application until the entire main is filled with heavily chlorinated water. Keep the chlorinated water in the main for at least 24 hours. During this time, operate all valves and hydrants in the section treated in order to disinfect the appurtenances. At the end of this 24-hour period, the treated water in all portions of the main shall have a residual of not less than 10 mg/L free chlorine.

e. Hypochlorite solution may be applied to the water main with a gasoline or

electrically powered chemical feed pump designed for feeding chlorine solutions. Feed lines shall be of such material and strength as to safely withstand the corrosion caused by the concentrated chlorine solutions and the maximum pressures that may be created by the pumps. Check all connections for tightness before the solution is applied to the main.




f. If gaseous chlorine in solution is permitted by the Contracting Officer and proposed by the Contractor, the preferred equipment for the gas application employs a feed vacuum-operated chlorinator to mix the chlorine gas, in combination with a booster pump for injecting the chlorine gas solution water into the main to be disinfected. Direct feed chlorinators cannot be used. (A direct feed chlorinator is one which operates solely from the pressure in the chlorine cylinder.)

B. Slug Method

1. Set-up

a. The slug method consists of placing calcium hypochlorite granules in the main during construction; completely filling the main to eliminate all air pockets, flushing the main to remove particulates, and slowly flowing a slug of water containing 100 mg/L of free chlorine through the main so that all parts of the main and its appurtenances will be exposed to the highly chlorinated water for a period of not less than 3 hours.

2. Chlorinating the main.

a. At the option of the Contracting Officer, place calcium hypochlorite

granules in the main during construction. The purpose of this procedure is to provide a strong chlorine concentration in the first flow of flushing water especially to fill annular spaces in pipe joints. Flush the main to eliminate air and remove particulates to include management of dechlorination and discharged water.

b. At a point not more than 10 feet downstream from the beginning of the new

main, dose the water entering the new main with chlorine fed at a constant rate such that the water will have not less than 100 mg/L free chlorine. Measure the chlorine concentration at regular intervals to ensure that this concentration is provided. Measure chlorine in accordance with the procedures described in the current edition of the AWWA Manual M12 or of Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater. The chlorine shall be applied continuously and for a sufficient period to develop a solid column or "slug" of chlorinated water that will, as it moves through the main, expose all interior surfaces to a concentration of approximately 100 mg/L for at least 3 hours.

c. The free chlorine residual shall be measured in the slug as it moves

through the main. If at any time it drops below 50 mg/L, stop the flow, relocate the chlorination equipment to the head of the slug, and as flow is resumed, apply chlorine to restore the free chlorine in the slug to not less than 100 mg/L.

d. As the chlorinated water flows past fittings and valves, operate related

valves and hydrants so as to disinfect appurtenances and pipe branches.




C. Tablet Method

1. Set-up

a. The tablet method consists of adhering calcium hypochlorite tablets in the

water main as it is being installed and then filling the main with potable water when installation is completed. This method may be used only if the pipes and appurtenances are kept clean and dry during construction and with permission by the Contracting Officer for short main installations.

2. Chlorinating the Main

a. Placing of Calcium Hypochlorite Tablets -. During construction, 5-g calcium

hypochlorite tablets shall be placed in each section of pipe. Also, one such tablet shall be placed in each hydrant, hydrant branch, and other appurtenance. The number of 5-g tablets required for each pipe section shall be 0.0012 d²L rounded to the next higher integer, where d is the inside pipe diameter, in inches, and L is the length of the pipe section, in feet. Table 3 below shows the number of tablets required for commonly used sizes of pipe. The tablets shall be attached by a food-grade NSF approved adhesive. There shall be no adhesive on the tablet except on the broadside attached to the surface of the pipe and no adhesive applied or spilled on the pipe surface. Excess adhesive must be removed immediately using mechanical means or an NSF-approved adhesive solvent. Attach all the tablets inside and at the top of the main, with approximately equal numbers of tablets at each end of a given pipe length. If the tablets are attached before the pipe section is placed in the trench, their position shall be marked on the section so it can be readily determined that the pipe is installed with the tablets at the top.




TABLE 3

Number of 5-g Calcium Hypochlorite Tablets required for dose of 25 mg/L

b. Filling and Contact - When installation has been completed, the main shall be filled with water at a rate such that water within the main will flow at a velocity no greater than 1 ft/sec. Precautions shall be taken to ensure that air pockets are eliminated. This water shall remain in the pipe for at least 24 hours. If the water temperature is less than 41°F (5°C), the water shall remain in the pipe for at least 48 hours.

3.04 DISPOSAL OF HEAVILY CHLORINATED WATER

A. Do not keep heavily chlorinated water in contact with pipe for more than 48 hours

after the applicable retention period. In order to prevent damage to the pipe lining or corrosion damage to the pipe itself, flush the heavily chlorinated water from the main fittings, valves, and branches until chlorine measurements show that the concentration in the water leaving the main is no higher than that generally prevailing in the distribution system or is acceptable for domestic use. Take all steps necessary to dechlorinate water where required per Paragraph 3.04B and 3.04C below. Contact the local sewer department to arrange for disposal of the heavily chlorinated water to the sanitary sewer if applicable or permissible.

B. Neutralize the chlorine residual of the water being disposed of by treating with

one of the chemicals listed in Table 4 below. Select an alternative disposal site if a sanitary sewer system is unavailable for disposal of the chlorinated water.

C. The proposed alternative disposal site shall be inspected and approved by the

Contracting Officer. Apply a reducing agent to the chlorinated water to be wasted to completely neutralize the chlorine residual remaining in the water. (See Table 4 for neutralizing chemicals. Do not overdose neutralizing chemicals as this may result in adverse environmental impacts. Only dose the amount

Length of Pipe Section, ft

Pipe Diameter

13 or less 18 20 30 40

inches

Number of 5-g Calcium Hypochlorite Tablets

6

1 1 1 2 2

8

1 2 2 3 4

12

3 4 4 6 7

16

4 6 7 10 13




required to neutralize the amount of chlorine present). Contact Federal, State and local regulatory agencies, where necessary, to determine special provisions for the disposal of heavily chlorinated water.

TABLE 4

Pounds of chemicals required to neutralize various residual chlorine concentrations in 100,000 gallons of water

Residual Chlorine

Concentration mg/L

Sulfur Dioxide (SO2)

lb

Sodium Bisulfite

(NaHSO3) lb

Sodium Sulfite

(Na2SO3) lb

Sodium Thiosulfate (Na2S2O3 · 5H2O)

lb

Ascorbic Acid

(C6O8H6) lb

1 0.8 1.2 1.4 1.2 2.1

2 1.7 2.5 2.9 2.4 4.2 10 8.3 12.5 14.6 12.0 20.9

50 41.7 62.6 73.0 60.0 104.0

D. Test for chlorine residual throughout the disposal process to be sure that the

chlorine is neutralized.

E. Submit a plan of disposal of flushed water to the Contracting Officer for approval

3.05 BACTERIOLOGICAL TESTING

A. After final flushing and before the water main is placed in service, the first of two consecutive sets of acceptable samples can be collected from the new main. The second set of samples must be taken at least 24 hours after the first set of samples. The main should not be flushed between collection of the first and second set of samples except to clear the sample site to collect the second sample. At least one set of samples shall be collected from every 1,200 feet, of the new water main, plus one set from the end of the line and at least one set from each branch when possible or as required by regulatory requirements.

B. Samples shall be collected by a person knowledgeable in collecting samples for

bacteriological sampling or arrange for the Contracting Officer to collect the sample. Coordinate with the Contracting Officer and submit samples to the Contracting Officer for testing of bacteriological (chemical and physical) quality. Testing will be in accordance with Standard Methods of the Examination of Water and Wastewater. Samples shall show the absence of coliform organisms; and the presence of a chlorine residual. Samples shall also be tested for turbidity, pH, and standard heterotrophic plate count (HPC). HPC levels must be consistent with levels normally found in the distribution system to which the new main is connected.

C. Bacteriological tests must show complete absence of coliforms and acceptable

HPCs. If tests show the presence of coliform or unacceptable HPCs, perform additional flushing and disinfection of the pipeline until acceptable tests are obtained, all at no cost to AAFES. The Contractor will not be charged for the additional testing performed by AAFES.




3.06 RETESTING AND TESTING SOURCE WATER

A. At the time of initial flushing the main to remove material and test for air pockets,

Contractor may request the Contracting Officer to continue flushing until the desired chlorine residual is met at the discharge point. Notification must be provided in advance and the Contractor shall be prepared to test for chlorine at intervals of no more than five minutes as the water clears. This will provide the Contractor with some assurance that the source water is chlorinated.

B. If the subsequent tests for bacteriological contamination conducted by the

Contractor fail, the Contractor may request the Contracting Officer to continue flush from the source water into the new pipe system until a chlorine residual is found at the discharge point. Notification must be provided in advance and the Contractor shall be prepared to test for chlorine at intervals of no more than five minutes as the water clears. The operation of all existing system valves shall be by the Contracting Officer at the Contractor’s expense and the discharge point must be opened prior to opening existing valves to avoid contamination. This will provide the Contractor with some assurance that the source water is chlorinated for subsequent tests.

3.07 DISINFECTION PROCEDUCE FOR CUT INTO OR REPAIR MAIN

A. The following procedures apply primarily when existing mains are wholly or

partially dewatered. Leaks or breaks that are repaired with clamping devices while the mains remain full of pressurized water may present little danger of contamination and therefore may not require disinfection.

1. Trench Treatment – When an existing main is opened either by accident or

by design, the excavation will likely be wet and may be badly contaminated from nearby sewers. Liberal quantities of hypochlorite applied to open trench areas will lessen the danger from this pollution. Tablets could have the advantage in this situation, as they dissolve slowly and continue to release hypochlorite as water is pumped from the excavation.

2. Swabbing With Hypochlorite Solution – The interior of the pipe and fittings

(particularly couplings and sleeve) used in making the repair shall be swabbed or sprayed with 1% hypochlorite solution before they are installed.

3. Flushing – Thorough flushing is the most practical means of removing

contamination introduced during repairs. If valve and hydrant location permit, flushing toward the work location from both directions is recommended. Flushing shall be started as soon as the repairs are completed and shall be continued until discolored water is eliminated.

4. Slug Chlorination – Where practical, in addition to flushing, the section of the

main in which the break is located shall be isolated, all service connections shut off, and the section flushed and chlorinated as described in Paragraph 3.03B above (Slug Method). The dose may be increased to as much as 300 mg/L and the contact time reduced to as little as 15 minutes. After




chlorination, flushing shall be resumed and continued until discolored water is eliminated and the chlorine concentration in the water exiting the main is no higher than the prevailing water in the distribution system or that which is acceptable for domestic use.

5. Bacteriological Samples – Bacteriological samples following procedures in

Paragraph 3.05 above shall be taken after repairs are completed to provide a record for determining the procedure’s effectiveness. If the direction of flow is unknown, then samples shall be taken on each side of the main break. If positive bacteriological samples are recorded, then the situation shall be evaluated by the Contracting Officer to determine corrective action. Daily sampling shall be continued until two consecutive negative samples are recorded.



Section 33 01 30 – Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers

Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers 33 01 30 - 1

1. PART 1: GENERAL


A. Gravity flow sanitary sewers are required to have straight alignment and uniform grade between manholes.

B. Flexible pipe, including "semi-rigid" pipe, is required to show no more than 5 percent deflection. Test pipe no sooner than 30 days after backfilling and compacting of line segment but prior to final acceptance using standard mandrel to verify that installed pipe is within specified deflection tolerances.

C. All new sanitary sewers shall be Mandrel Tested. If the Mandrel Test is failed, the pipe shall also be televised in accordance with the requirements outlined in this Specification.

D. Maximum allowable leakage for Infiltration or Exfiltration

1. The total exfiltration, as determined by hydrostatic head test, shall not exceed 50 gallons per inch diameter per mile of pipe per 24 hours at minimum test head of 2 feet above crown of pipe at upstream manhole or 2 feet above groundwater elevation, whichever is greater.

2. When pipes are installed more than 2 feet below groundwater level, use infiltration test in lieu of exfiltration test. Total infiltration shall not exceed 50 gallons per inch diameter per mile of pipe per 24 hours. Groundwater elevation must be at least 2 feet above crown of pipe at upstream manhole.

3. Refer to Table 1 at the end of this section, for water test allowable leakage in sewers. Perform leakage testing to verify that leakage criteria are met.

E. Perform air testing in accordance with requirements of this Specification and the any State or local environmental agency requirements.

1. Refer to Table 2 at the end of this section, for time allowed for pressure loss from 3.5 psig to 2.5 psig;

2. Refer to Table 3 at the end of this section, for minimum testing times for low pressure air test; and

3. Refer to Table 4 at the end of this section, for vacuum test time table.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Conform to requirements of Section 01 33 00 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals.

B. Test Plan: Test plan shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer for review two weeks prior to testing. Test plan shall include testing procedures, methods, equipment, and tentative schedule. Contractor shall obtain advance written approval for deviations from Drawings and Specifications.

C. Test Reports: Submit test reports for each test on each segment of sanitary sewer.

D. Video television records shall be provided on DVD medium.




1.3 GRAVITY SANITARY SEWER QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Repair, correct, and retest manholes or sections of pipe which fail to meet specified requirements when tested.

B. Provide testing reports and video of television inspection as directed by the Contracting Officer.

C. Upon completion of video televising reviews by the Contracting Officer, Contractor will be notified regarding final acceptance of sewer segment.

1.4 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Contractor shall perform testing as work progresses. Schedule testing so that no more than 1000 linear feet of installed sewer remains untested at one time.

B. Coordinate testing schedules with the Contracting Officer. Perform testing under observation of the Contracting Officer.

1.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION

A. Quality Assurance: Submit one example video DVD of previous sewer inspection work that shows operational and structural defects in sewers, complete with audio commentary and inspection log(s).

1. Video and inspection logs will be reviewed to determine if quality of CCTV image is acceptable, and if defects were properly identified and documented.

2. Modify equipment and/or inspection procedures to achieve report material of acceptable quality.

3. Do not commence work prior to approval of report by the Contracting Officer.

B. Inspection Logs: Unless otherwise indicated, submit inspection logs that include the following as a minimum:

1. Project title 2. Name of JBSA- Fort Sam Houston 3. Time of day 4. System map number 5. Manhole to manhole pipe section 6. Pipe segment length 7. Pipe material 8. Line size 9. Compass direction of viewing 10. Direction of camera’s travel 11. Pipe depth 12. Operator name 13. Tape counter reading at beginning and end of each manhole to manhole

pipe segment.

C. Video DVD’s: Submit completed video DVD’s after sanitary sewer main installation, cleaning and/or rehabilitation.




D. Maintain copy of all inspection documentation (DVD’s, databases, and logs) for duration of Work and warranty period.

2. PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.01 DEFLECTION MANDREL

A. Mandrel Sizing. Rigid mandrel shall have OD equal to 95 percent of inside ID of pipe. ID of pipe, for purpose of determining OD of mandrel, shall be average OD minus two minimum wall thicknesses for OD controlled pipe and average ID for ID controlled pipe, dimensions shall be per appropriate standard. Statistical or other "tolerance packages" shall not be considered in mandrel sizing.

B. Mandrel Design. Rigid mandrel shall be constructed of metal or rigid plastic material that can withstand 200 psi without being deformed. Mandrel shall have nine or more "runners" or "legs" as long as total number of legs is odd number. Barrel section of mandrel shall have length of at least 75 percent of ID of pipe. Rigid mandrel shall not have adjustable or collapsible legs which would allow reduction in mandrel diameter during testing. Provide and use proving ring for modifying each size mandrel.

C. Proving Ring. Furnish "proving ring" with each mandrel. Fabricate ring of 1/2-inch-thick, 3-inch-wide bar steel to diameter 0.02 inches larger than approved mandrel diameter.

D. Mandrel Dimensions (5 percent allowance). Average ID and minimum mandrel diameter are specified in Table 5, Pipe vs. Mandrel Diameter, at end of this Section. Mandrels for higher strength, thicker wall pipe or other pipe not listed in table may be used when approved by the Contracting Officer.

2.02 EXFILTRATION TEST

A. Test Equipment:

1. Pipe plugs.

2. Pipe risers where manhole cone is less than 2 feet above highest point in pipe or service lead.

2.03 INFILTRATION TEST

A. Test Equipment:

1. Calibrated 90 degree V-notch weir.

2. Pipe plugs.

2.04 LOW PRESSURE AIR TEST

A. Minimum Requirement for Equipment:

1. Control panel

2. Low-pressure air supply connected to control panel.

3. Pneumatic plugs: Acceptable size for diameter of pipe to be tested; capable of withstanding internal test pressure without leaking or requiring external bracing.

4. Air hoses from control panel to:

1. Air supply.




2. Pneumatic plugs.

3. Sealed line for pressuring.

4. Sealed line for monitoring internal pressure.

B. Testing Pneumatic Plugs: Place pneumatic plug in each end of length of pipe on ground. Pressurize plugs to 25 psig; then pressurize sealed pipe to 5 psig. Plugs are acceptable when they remain in place against test pressure without external aids.

2.05 GROUND WATER DETERMINATION

A. Equipment: Pipe probe or small diameter casing for ground water elevation determination.

2.06 SMOKE TESTING

A. Equipment:

1. Pneumatic plugs.

2. Smoke generator.

3. Blowers producing 2500 scfm minimum.

2.07 TELEVISION INSPECTION MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. DVD: Standard size medium usable in laptop and television DVD players.

1. Audio portion of composite DVD shall be sufficiently free from electrical interference and background noise to provide complete intelligibility of oral report.

2. Identify each tape with tape labels showing Project Name, Contractor’s name, and each manhole-to-manhole pipe segment of sewer line represented on tape.

B. Television Inspection Camera(s): Equipped with rotating head, capable of 90-degree rotation from horizontal and 360-degree rotation about its centerline.

1. Minimum Camera Resolution: 400 vertical lines and 460 horizontal lines.

2. Camera Lens: Not less than 140 degree viewing angle, with automatic or remote focus and iris controls.

3. Focal Distance: Adjustable through range of 6 inches (152 mm) to infinity.

4. Camera(s) shall be intrinsically safe and operative in 100 percent humidity conditions.

5. Lighting Intensity: Remote-controlled and adjusted to minimize reflective glare.

6. Lighting and Camera Quality: Provide clear, in-focus picture of entire inside periphery of sewer.




C. Footage Counter: Measures distance traveled by camera in sewer, accurate to plus or minus 2 feet in 1,000 feet .

D. Video Titling: Video equipment shall include genlocking capabilities to extent that computer generated data (such as footage, date, and size as determined by SDR), can be overlaid onto video, and be indicated on television monitor and permanently recorded on inspection DVD.

3. PART 3: EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Provide labor, equipment, tools, test plugs, risers, air compressor, air hose, pressure meters, pipe probe, calibrated weirs, or any other device necessary for proper testing and inspection.

B. Determine selection of test methods and pressures for gravity sanitary sewers based on ground water elevation. Determine ground water elevation using equipment and procedures conforming to Control of Ground Water and Surface Water.

3.02 MANDREL TESTING FOR GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS

A. Perform deflection testing on flexible and semi-rigid pipe to confirm pipe has no more than 5 percent deflection. Mandrel testing shall conform to ASTM D3034. Perform testing no sooner than 30 days after backfilling of line segment, but prior to final acceptance testing of line segment.

B. Pull approved mandrel by hand through sewer sections. Replace any section of sewer not passing mandrel. Mandrel testing is not required for stubs.

C. Retest repaired or replaced sewer sections.

3.03 LEAKAGE TESTING FOR GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS

A. Test Options:

1. Test gravity sanitary sewer pipes for leakage by either exfiltration or infiltration methods, as appropriate, or with low pressure air testing.

2. Test new or rehabilitated sanitary sewer manholes with water or low pressure air. Manholes tested with low pressure air shall undergo physical inspection prior to testing.

3. Perform leakage testing after backfilling of line segment, and prior to tie-in of service connections.

4. If no installed piezometer is within 500 feet of sewer segment, provide temporary piezometer for this purpose.

B. Compensating for Ground Water Pressure:

1. Where ground water exists, install pipe nipple at same time sewer line is placed. Use 1/2-inch capped pipe nipple approximately 10-inches long. Make installation through manhole wall on top of sewer line where line enters manhole.

2. Immediately before performing line acceptance test, remove cap, clear pipe nipple with air pressure, and connect clear plastic tube to nipple. Support tube vertically and allow water to rise in tube. After water stops




rising, measure height in feet of water over invert of pipe. Divide this height by 2.3 ft/psi to determine ground water pressure to be used in line testing.

C. Exfiltration test:

1. Determine ground water elevation.

2. Plug sewer in downstream manhole.

3. Plug incoming pipes in upstream manhole.

4. Install riser pipe in outgoing pipe of upstream manhole when highest point in service lead (house service) is less than 2 feet below bottom of manhole cone.

5. Fill sewer pipe and manhole or pipe riser, when used, with water to point 2-1/2 feet above highest point in sewer pipe, house lead, or ground water table, whichever is highest.

6. Allow water to stabilize for one to two hours. Take water level reading to determine drop of water surface, in inches, over one-hour period, and calculate water loss (1 inch of water in 4 feet diameter manhole equals 8.22 gallons) or measure quantity of water required to keep water at same level. Loss shall not exceed that calculated from allowable leakage according to Table 1 at the end of this Section.

D. Infiltration test: Ground water elevation must be not less than 2 feet above highest point of sewer pipe or service lead (house service).

1. Determine ground water elevation.

2. Plug incoming pipes in upstream manhole.

3. Insert calibrated 90 degree V-notch weir in pipe on downstream manhole.

4. Allow water to rise and flow over weir until it stabilizes.

5. Take five readings of accumulated volume over period of 2 hours and use average for infiltration. Average must not exceed that calculated for 2 hours from allowable leakage according to Table 1 at the end of this Section.

E. Low Air Pressure Test: When using this test conform to ASTM C 828, ASTM C 924, or ASTM F1417, as applicable, with holding time not less than that listed in Table 2 below.

1. Air testing for sections of pipe shall be limited to lines less than 36-inch average inside diameter.

2. Lines 36-inch average inside diameter and larger shall be tested at each joint. Minimum time allowable for pressure to drop from 3.5 pounds per square inch gauge to 2.5 pounds per square inch during joint test shall be 10 seconds, regardless of pipe size.

3. For pipe sections less than 36-inch average inside diameter:

a. Determine ground water level.




b. Plug both ends of pipe. For concrete pipe, flood pipe and allow 2 hours to saturate concrete. Then drain and plug concrete pipe.

c. After manhole-to-manhole section of sanitary sewer main has been sliplined and prior to any service lines being connected to new liner, plug liner at each manhole with pneumatic plugs.

d. Pressurize pipe to 4.0 psig. Increase pressure 1.0 psi for each 2.3 feet of ground water over highest point in system. Allow pressure to stabilize for 2 to 4 minutes. Adjust pressure to start at 3.5 psig (plus adjustment for ground water table). See Table 2 at the end of this Section.

e. To determine air loss, measure time interval for pressure to drop to 2.5 psig. Time must exceed that listed in Table 2 at the end of this Section for pipe diameter and length. For sliplining, use diameter of carrier pipe.

F. Retest: Repair and retest any section of pipe which fails to meet requirements.

3.04 TEST CRITERIA TABLES

A. Exfiltration and Infiltration Water Tests: Refer to Table 1 at the end of this Section, for water test allowable leakage.

B. Low Pressure Air Test:

1. Time in Table 2 at the end of this Section, allowed for pressure loss from 3.5 psig to 2.5 psig, are based on equation from Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) Design Criteria 317.2(a)(4)(B). If the State where the project is being completed has more stringent times, the local state’s requirements will apply.

T = 0.0850(D)(K)/(Q)

where: T = Time for pressure to drop 1.0 pounds per square inch gauge in seconds

K = 0.000419 DL, but not less than 1.0 D = Average inside diameter in inches L = Length of line of same pipe size in feet Q = Rate of loss, 0.0015 ft³ /min./sq.ft. internal surface

2. Since K value of less than 1.0 shall not be used, there are minimum testing times for each pipe diameter as given in Table 3 at the end of this Section for minimum testing times for low pressure air test.

Notes: 1. When two sizes of pipe are involved, compute time by ratio of lengths

involved.

2. Lines with 27-inch average inside diameter and larger may be air tested at each joint.




3. Lines with average inside diameter greater than 36 inches must be air tested for leakage at each joint.

4. If joint test is used, perform visual inspection of joint immediately after testing.

5. For joint test, pipe is to be pressurized to 3.5 psi greater than pressure exerted by groundwater above pipe. Once pressure has stabilized, time allowable for pressure to drop from 3.5 pounds psi gauge to 2.5 psi gauge shall be a minimum of 10 seconds.

3.05 LEAKAGE TESTING FOR MANHOLES

A. After completion of manhole construction, wall sealing, or rehabilitation, but prior to backfilling, test manholes for water tightness using hydrostatic or vacuum testing procedures.

B. Plug influent and effluent lines, including service lines, with suitably-sized pneumatic or mechanical plugs. Ensure plugs are properly rated for pressures required for test; follow manufacturer's safety and installation recommendations. Place plugs minimum of 6 inches outside of manhole walls. Brace inverts to prevent lines from being dislodged when lines entering manhole have not been backfilled.

C. Vacuum testing:

1. Install vacuum tester head assembly at top access point of manhole and adjust for proper seal on straight top section of manhole structure. Following manufacturer's instructions and safety precautions, inflate sealing element to recommended maximum inflation pressure; do not over-inflate.

2. Evacuate manhole with vacuum pump to 10 inches mercury (Hg), disconnect pump, and monitor vacuum for time period specified in Table 33 01 30.13-4, Vacuum Test Time Table.

3. If drop in vacuum exceeds 1 inch Hg over specified time period tabulated in Table 33 01 30.13-4, locate leaks, complete repairs necessary to seal manhole and repeat test procedure until satisfactory results are obtained.

D. Perform hydrostatic exfiltration testing as follows:

1. Seal wastewater lines coming into manhole with internal pipe plug. Then fill manhole with water and maintain it full for at least one hour.

2. The maximum leakage for hydrostatic testing shall be 0.025 gallons per foot diameter per foot of manhole depth per hour.

3. If water loss exceeds amount tabulated above, locate leaks, complete repairs necessary to seal manhole and repeat test procedure until satisfactory results are obtained.

3.06 SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE FOR POINT REPAIRS

A. Application: Perform smoke test to:

1. Locate points of line failure for point repair.

2. Determine when point repairs are properly made.




3. Determine when service connections have been reconnected to rehabilitated sewer.

4. Check integrity of connections to newly replaced service taps to liners and to existing private service connections.

B. Limitations: Do not backfill service taps until completion of this test. Test only those taps in single manhole section at one time. Keep number of open excavations to minimum.

C. Preparation: Prior to smoke testing, give written notices to area residents no fewer than 2 days, nor more than 7 days, prior to proposed testing. Also give notice to local police and fire departments 24 hours prior to actual smoke testing.

D. Isolate Section: Isolate manhole section to be tested from adjacent manhole sections to keep smoke localized. Temporarily seal annular space at manhole for sliplined sections.

E. Smoke Introduction:

1. Operate equipment according to manufacturer's recommendation and as approved by Contracting Officer.

2. Conduct test by forcing smoke from smoke generators through sanitary sewer main and service connections. Operate smoke generators for minimum of 5 minutes.

3. Introduce smoke into upstream and downstream manhole as appropriate. Monitor tap/connection for smoke leaks. Note sources of leaks.

F. Repair and Retest: Repair and replace taps or connections noted as leaking and then retest. Taps and connections may be left exposed in only one manhole section at time. When repair or replacement, testing or retesting, and backfilling of excavation is not completed within one work day, properly barricade and cover each excavation as approved by the Contracting Officer.

G. Service Connections: On houses where smoke does not issue from plumbing vent stacks to confirm reconnection of sewer service to newly installed liner pipe, perform dye test to confirm reconnection. Introduce dye into service line through plumbing fixture inside structure or sewer cleanout immediately outside structure and flush with water. Observe flow at service reconnection or downstream manhole. Detection of dye confirms reconnection.

3.07 TELEVISION INSPECTION PROCEDURES

A. SEWER FLOW REQUIREMENTS

1. Do not exceed depth of flow shown in Table below for respective pipe sizes as measured in manhole when performing TV inspection.

2. When depth of flow at upstream manhole of sewer line section being worked is above maximum allowable for TV inspection, reduce flow to level shown in Table below, by plugging or blocking of flow, or by pumping and bypassing of flow as specified.




TABLE 1 Maximum Depth of Flow for TV Inspection

Nominal Pipe Diameter Maximum Depth of Flow

6” - 10” 20 percent of pipe diameter

12” - 24” 25 percent of pipe diameter

B. SEQUENCE OF WORK

Perform Work in the following sequence:

1. Clean sewer lines and manholes in accordance with requirements of Specifications”.

2. Perform TV inspection to comply with requirements of this specification.

C. INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS

1. Access: Contracting Officer shall have access to observe monitor and other operations at all times.

2. DVD Commentary: Record the following information on audio track of DVD inspection tape: narrative of location, direction of view, manhole numbers, pipe diameter and material, date, time of inspection, and location of laterals and other key features

a. DVD shall visually display this information at beginning and end of each manhole-to-manhole pipe segment.

b. DVD between manholes shall visually display length in feet from starting point of given segment.

3. Sewer Identification: DVD and inspection documentation shall include sewer line and manhole identifiers shown on Drawings. After installation of liner, use upstream manhole as identifier in conjunction with distance meter.

4. Image Perspective: Camera image shall be down center axis of pipe when camera is in motion.

a. Provide 360-degree sweep of pipe interior at points of interest, to more fully document existing condition of sewer.

b. Points of interest may include, but are not limited to the following: defects, encrustations, mineral deposits, debris, sediment, and any location determined not to be clean or part of proper liner installation, and defects in liner that include, but are not limited to bumps, folds, tears, and dimples.

c. Cabling system employed to transport camera and transmit its signal shall not obstruct camera’s view.




5. Sewer Reach Length: Physically measure and record length of each sewer reach from centerline of its terminal manholes.

6. Inspection Rate: Camera shall be pulled through sewer in either direction, but both inspections are to be in same direction. Maximum rate of travel shall be 30 feet (9 m) per minute when recording.

D. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

1. Contracting Officer will review DVD’s and logs to ensure lines are clean and free of visible defects.

2. If sewer line, in sole opinion of the Contracting Officer, is not adequately clean, and free of visual defects it shall be re-cleaned and CCTV-inspected by Contractor at no additional cost.

TABLE 1 WATER TEST ALLOWABLE LEAKAGE

DIAMETER OF RISER OR STACK IN INCHES

VOLUME PER INCH OF DEPTH

ALLOWANCE LEAKAGE*

INCH GALLONS PIPE SIZE IN

INCHES GALLONS/MINUTE

PER 100FT. 1 0.7854 .0034 6 0.0039 2 3.1416 .0136 8 0.0053

2.5 4.9087 .0212 13 0.0066 3 7.0686 .0306 12 0.0079 4 12.5664 .0306 15 0.0099 5 19.6350 .0544 18 0.0118 6 28.2743 .1224 21 0.0138 8 50.2655 .2176 24 0.0158 27 0.0177 30 0.0197 36 0.0237 42 0.0276

For other diameters, multiply square of diameters by value of 1” diameter

Equivalent to 50 gallons per inch of inside diameter per mile per 24 hours

* Allowable leakage rate shall be reduced to 10 gallons per inch of inside diameter per mile per 24 hours, when sewer is identified as located within 25-year flood plain




TABLE 2 ACCEPTANCE TESTING FOR SANITARY SEWERS

Pipe Diam. Min.

(in) Time

(min /sec) 100 ft 150 ft 200 ft 250 ft 300 ft 350 ft 400 ft 450 ft 500 ft 550 ft 600 ft

6 5:40 398 0.854 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:42 6:25 7:07 7:50 8:33

8 7:33 298 1.519 7:33 7:33 7:33 7:33 7:36 8:52 10:08 11:24 12:40 13:56 15:12

10 9:27 239 2.374 9:27 9:27 9:27 9:54 11:52 13:51 15:50 17:48 19:47 21:46 23:45

12 11:20 199 3.419 11:20 11:20 11:20 14:15 17:06 19:57 22:48 25:39:00 28:30:00 31:20:00 34:11:00

15 14:10 159 5.342 14:10 14:10 17:48 22:16 26:43:00 31:10:00 35:37:00 40:04:00 44:31:00 48:58:00 53:25:00

18 17:00 133 7.692 17:00 19:14 25:39:00 32:03:00 38:28:00 44:52:00 51:17:00 57:42:00 64:06:00 70:31:00 76:56:00

21 19:50 114 10.47 19:50 26:11:00 34:54:00 43:38:00 52:21:00 61:05:00 69:48:00 78:32:00 87:15:00 95:59:00 104:42:00

24 22:40 99 13.67 22:48 34:11:00 45:35:00 56:59:00 68:23:00 79:47:00 91:10:00 102:34:00 113:58:00 125:22:00 136:46:00

27 25:30:00 88 17.3 28:51:00 43:16:00 57:42:00 72:07:00 86:33:00 100:58:00 115.24 129.49 144.14 158.4 173.05

30 28:20:00 80 21.36 35:37:00 53:25:00 71:14:00 89:02:00 106:51:00 124:39:00 142:28:00 160:16:00 178:05:00 195:53:00 213:41:00

33 31:10:00 72 25.85 43:06:00 64:38:00 86:11:00 107:44:00 129:17:00 150:50:00 172:23:00 193:55:00 215:28:00 237:01:00 258:34:00

TIME ALLOWED FOR PRESSURE LOSS FROM 3.5 PSIG TO 2.5 PSIG

Length for min. time (ft)

Time for Longer Length (sec)

Specification Time for Length (L) shown (min:sec)

TABLE 3 MINIMUM TESTING TIMES FOR SANITARY SEWERS - LOW PRESSURE AIR TEST

PIPE DIAMETER (inches)

MINIMUM TIME

(seconds)

LENGTH FOR MINIMUM TIME

(feet)

TIME FOR LONGER LENGTH

(seconds) 0.855 (L) 6 340 398 1.520 (L) 8 454 298 2.374 (L)

10 567 239 3.419 (L) 12 680 199 5.342 (L) 15 850 159 7.693 (L) 18 1020 133 10.471 (L) 21 1190 114 13.676(L) 24 1360 100 17.309 (L) 27 1530 88 21.369 (L) 30 1700 80 25.856 (L) 33 1870 72




TABLE 4 MINIMUM TESTING TIMES FOR SANITARY MANHOLES - LOW PRESSURE AIR TEST

DEPTH IN FEET TIME IN SECONDS BY PIPE DIAMETER

48” 60” 72”

4 10 13 16

8 20 26 32

12 30 39 48

16 40 52 64

20 50 65 80

24 60 78 96

* 5.0 6.5 8.0 *Add T times for each additional 2-foot depth. (The values listed above have been extrapolated from ASTM C924-85)

TABLE 5 PIPE VS. MANDREL DIAMETER

Material and Wall

Construction

Normal size

(inches)

Average I.D.

(inches)

MinimumMandrel Diameter (inches)

PVC-Solid (sdr 26)6

6 5.764 5.476

8 7.715 7.329

10 9.646 9.162

PVC-Solid (SDR 35)12

12 11.737 11.15

15 14.374 13.655

18 17.629 16.748

21 20.783 19.744

24 23.381 22.12

27 26.351 25.033

PVC-Truss 8 7.75 7.363

10 9.75 9.263

12 11.79 11.201

15 14.77 14.032

PVC-Profile (ASTM F794)

12 11.74 11.153

15 14.37 13.652

18 17.65 16.768

21 20.75 19.713

24 23.5 22.325

27 26.5 25.175

30 29.5 28.025




36 35.5 33.725

42 41.5 39.425

48 47.5 45.125

HDPE-Profile 18 18 17.1

21 21 19.95

24 24 22.8

27 27 25.65

30 30 28.5

36 36 34.2

42 42 39.9

48 48 45.6

54 54 51.3

60 60 57

Fiberglass 12 12.85 11.822

(Class SN 46) 18 18.66 17.727

20 20.68 19.646

24 24.72 23.484

30 30.68 29.146

36 36.74 34.903

42 42.7 40.565

48 48.76 46.322

54 54.82 52.079

60 60.38 57.361



Section 33 05 27 – Tracer Wire

Tracer Wire 33 05 27 - 1

PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE

A. Install electrically continuous tracer wire with access points as described herein to be used for locating pipe with an electronic pipe locator after installation. Tracer wire shall be installed on all water mains and services, all wastewater lines and sewer mains and services and all wastewater force mains.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and manufacturer's literature to the Engineer for approval in accordance with Specification Section 01 33 00 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals.

PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 TRACER WIRE MATERIAL

A. Tracer wire to be twelve gauge minimum solid copper with thermoplastic insulation recommended for direct burial. Wire connectors to be 3M DBR, or approved equal, and shall be watertight to provide electrical continuity.

B. Tracer wire color shall be blue for all water construction and green for all

wastewater construction. 2.02 TRACER WIRE ACCESS BOXES

For locations where valve boxes are not present, the tracer wire access point shall be composed of one SnakePit Tracer Wire Access Box, or approved equal, installed at each proposed access point.

2.03 TESTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Contractor shall perform a continuity test on all tracer wire in the presence of

Contracting Officer or the Contracting Officer’s representative. If the tracer wire is found to be not continuous after testing, Contractor shall repair or replace the failed segment of the wire at their own expense.

PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Tracer wire shall be installed on all water and sewer mains and services. The wire shall be installed in such a manner as to be able to properly tracer all mains without loss or deterioration of signal or without the transmitted signal migrating off the tracer wire.




B. Tracer wire shall be installed in the same trench and inside bored holes and casing with pipe during pipe installation. It shall be laid in the trench below the pipe and pipe bedding being installed to ensure that the wire is not damaged during future repair operations. The tracer wire shall be securely bonded together at all wire joints with an approved watertight connector to provide electrical continuity, and it shall be accessible at all tracer wire access points.

C. Tracer wire access points shall in general be no more than five-hundred feet and

at every proposed concrete valve box collar (or manhole where required). Concentrations of multiple proposed valves near pipe intersections, i.e. tees or crosses, may require more than one access point assembly in each concrete valve box collar. Tracer wire access points shall be within public right-of-way or public utility easements.

D. At each valve location, (including fire hydrant isolation valves), a loop of wire is to

be brought up the outside of the valve box and looped inside the box through a hole drilled 2-inch below the bottom of the lid.

E. At the point of connection between cast or ductile iron mains, with any non-iron

main, the tracer wire shall be properly connected to the iron pipe with a cad weld or approved equivalent. Tracer wire welds shall be completely sealed with the use of an approved mastic type sealer specifically manufactured for underground use. Mastic shall be applied in a thick coat a minimum of 2 inches thick and shall be protected from contamination by the backfill material with the use of a plastic membrane.

F. Except for approved spliced-in connections, tracer wire shall be continuous and

without splices from each tracer wire access point. Where any approved spliced-in connections occur, 3M DBR water tight connectors, or approved equal, shall be used to provide electrical continuity.

G. At all main end caps, a minimum of 6 feet of tracer wire shall be extended

beyond the end of the pipe, coiled and secured for future connections. The end of the tracer wire shall be spliced to the wire of a six pound zinc anode and is to be buried at the same elevation as the water main.

H. For directional drilling, auguring or boring installations, four #12 tracer wires shall

be installed with the pipe and connected to the tracer wire at both ends, or cad welded to the existing iron pipe at both ends.

I. Spliced connections between the main line tracer wire and branch connection

tracer wire shall only be allowed at water main tees, crosses or at iron or copper water services where a portion of the branch connection water main or water service is replaced with non-iron or non-copper material. The branch connection tracer wire shall be a single tracer wire properly spliced to the main line tracer wire. Where the existing branch connection is neither iron nor copper, then the new branch connection tracer wire shall be properly spliced to the existing tracer wire on the branch connection.




J. At all repair locations where there is existing tracer wire, the tracer wire shall be properly reconnected and spliced as outlined above.



Section 33 11 00 – Piping – General Provisions

Piping – General Provisions 33 11 00 - 1

PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 DRAWINGS

Dimensions shown on Drawings are approximate only. Verify all piping geometry in the field and to ensure proper alignment and fit of all piping consistent with the intent of the Drawings. Submit field layout drawings as required for approval.

PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY FOR MATERIAL

A. Examine all material carefully for defects. Do not install material which is known, or thought to be, defective.

B. The Contracting Officer reserves the right to inspect all material and to reject all

defective material shipped to the job site or stored on the site. Failure of the Contracting Officer to detect damaged material shall not relieve the Contractor from his total responsibility for the completed work if it leaks or breaks after installation.

C. Lay all defective material aside for final inspection by the Contracting Officer.

The Contracting Officer will determine if corrective repairs may be made, or if the material is rejected. The Contracting Officer shall determine the extent of the repairs.

D. Classify defective pipe prior to the Contracting Officer’s inspection as follows:

1. Damage to interior and/or exterior paint seal coatings.

2. Damage to interior cement-mortar or epoxy lining.

3. Insufficient interior cement-mortar lining or epoxy thickness.

4. Excessive pitting of pipe.

5. Poor quality exterior paint seal coat.

6. Pipe out of round.

7. Pipe barrel area damaged to a point where pipe class thickness is reduced (all pipe).

8. Denting or gouges in plain end of pipe (all pipe).

9. Excessive slag on pipe affecting gasket seal (DIP).

10. Any visible cracks, holes.




11. Embedded foreign materials.

12. Non-uniform color, density and other physical properties along the length of the pipe.

E. The Contractor shall be responsible for all material, equipment, fixtures, and

devices furnished. These materials, equipment, fixtures and devices shall comply with the requirements and standards of all Federal, State, and local laws, ordinances, codes, rules, and regulations governing safety and health.

F. The Contractor shall take full responsibility for the storage and handling of all

material furnished until the material is incorporated in the completed project and accepted by the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the safe storage of all material furnished to or by him until incorporated in the completed project and accepted by the Contracting Officer.

G. Load and unload pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and accessories by lifting with

hoists or skidding to avoid shock or damage. Do not drop these materials. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded or rolled against other pipe. Handle this material in accordance with AWWA C600, C605 or C906 whichever is applicable.

H. Drain and store fittings and valves prior to installation in such a manner as to

protect them from damage due to freezing of trapped water. 2.02 PETROLATUM TAPE COATING

A. The tape coating shall be a cold applied, saturant tape made from either

petrolatum or petroleum wax with a noncellulosic synthetic fiber fabric. The fabric shall be encapsulated and coated on both sides with the petrolatum or petroleum wax. The thickness of the tape shall be no less than 40 mil. The petrolatum or petroleum wax shall be at least 50% of the product by weight.

B. The tape coating shall be supplied in sheets, pads or rolls. Pads and sheets

shall be sized to fit the area that is to be covered, allowing for an overlap per AWWA Standards.

2.03 RUBBERIZED-BITUMEN BASED SPRAY-ON UNDERCOATING

Subject to approval by the Contracting Officer, an alternative corrosion protection for exposed buried metal is an aerosol applied rubberized coating. The material shall be rapid dry and specifically designed for corrosion protection. 3M Rubberized Underseal Undercoating 08883 or any equivalent rubberized-bitumen based spray-on undercoating may be used. Follow manufacturer’s recommendations for storage and application.

PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS




A. Lay and maintain all pipe to the required lines and depths. Install fittings, valves

and hydrants in strict accordance with the Specifications at the required locations with joints centered, spigots home, and all valve and hydrant stems plumb. Do not deviate from the required alignment, depth or grade without the written consent of the Contracting Officer.

B. Buried steel lugs, rods, brackets, and flanged joint nuts and bolts are not

permitted unless specifically shown on the Drawings or approved in writing by the Contracting Officer. Cover any and all buried steel lugs, rods, brackets, and flanged joint nuts and bolts with approved coating in accordance with AWWA Standard C217 prior to backfilling. Encase the same in polyethylene encased if the Specifications require polyethylene encasement of the pipe, valves or fittings..

C. Lay all pipe to the depth specified. Measure the depth from the final surface

grade to the top of the pipe barrel. The minimum pipe cover shall be as shown on the Drawings or as specified in the Specifications.

D. Do not lay pipe in a wet trench, on subgrade containing frost, or when trench

conditions are unsuitable for such work. If all efforts fail to obtain a stable dry trench bottom and the Contracting Officer determines that the trench bottom is unsuitable for such work, the Contracting Officer will order the kind of stabilization to be constructed, in writing. In all cases, water levels must be at least 6” below the bottom of the pipe.

E. Thoroughly clean the pipes and fittings before they are installed. Keep these

materials clean until the acceptance of the completed Work. Lay pipe with the bell ends facing in the direction of laying, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, or directed by the Contracting Officer. Exercise care to ensure that each length abuts the next in such a manner that no shoulder or unevenness of any kind occurs in the pipe line.

F. Do not wedge or block the pipe during laying unless by written order of the

Contracting Officer. G. Before joints are made, bed each section of pipe the full length of the barrel, at

the required grade, and at the invert matching the previously laid pipe. Dig bell holes sufficiently large to permit proper joint making. Do not bring succeeding pipe into position until the preceding length is embedded and secure in place.

H. Take up and relay pipe that is out of alignment or grade, or pipe having disturbed

joints after laying. Take up such in-place pipe sections found to be defective and replace them with new pipe. Take up, relaying, and replacement will be at the Contractor's expense.

I. Place enough backfill over the center sections of the pipe to prevent floating.

Take all other necessary precautions to prevent the floating of the pipeline by the accumulation of water in the trench, or the collapse of the pipeline from any




cause. Should floating or collapse occur, restoration will be at the Contractor's expense.

J. Contractor shall install tracer wire along all pipelines. Tracer wire may be

installed in trench below both the pipe and pipe bedding to prevent the tracer wire from being disturbed during repairs.

K. Bedding materials and concrete work for the pipe bedding and thrust restraint

shall be as specified. L. Prevent foreign material from entering the pipe while it is being placed. Do not

place debris, tools, clothing, or other materials in the pipe during laying operations. Close all openings in the pipeline with watertight plugs when pipe laying is stopped at the close of the day's work, or for other reasons such as rest breaks or meal periods.

M. Only cut pipe with equipment specifically designed for cutting pipe such as an

abrasive wheel, a rotary wheel cutter, a guillotine pipe saw, or a milling wheel saw. Do not use chisels or hand saws. Grind cut ends and rough edges smooth. Bevel the cut end slightly for push-on connections as per manufacturer recommendations.

N. In distributing material at the site of the Work, unload each piece opposite or

near the place where it is to be laid in the trench. If the pipe is to be strung out, do so in a straight line or in a line conforming to the curvature of the street. Block each length of pipe adequately to prevent movement. Block stockpiled pipe adequately to prevent movement. Do not place pipe, material, or any other object on private property, obstructing walkways or driveways, or in any manner that interferes with the normal flow of traffic.

O. Exercise special care to avoid damage to the bells, spigots or flanged ends of

pipe during handling, temporary storage, and construction. Replace damaged pipe that cannot be repaired to the Contracting Officer’s satisfaction, at the Contractor's expense.

P. Remove all existing pipe, fittings, valves, pipe supports, blocking, and all other

items necessary to provide space for making connections to existing pipe and installing all piping required under this Contract.

Q. Maintain the minimum required distance between water and sewer lines and

other utility lines in strict accordance with all Federal, State, and local requirements and all right-of-way limitations.

R. Provide and install polyethylene encasement for ductile iron pipe, fittings and

valves as required. See Specification Section 33 11 17 - Polyethylene Wrap.

S. The maximum allowable deflection at the joints for push-on joint pipe shall be the lesser of manufacturer’s recommendations or as described in the DIPRA Guideline, Ductile Iron Pipe Joints and Their Uses, as follows:




Size of Deflection Maximum Deflection

Pipe Angle (18-ft. Length) (20-ft. Length) 3”-12" 5 degrees 19" 21"

14"-42" 3 degrees 11" 12" 48"-64" 3 degrees N/A 12"

T. The maximum allowable deflection at the joints for PVC pressure pipe shall be as follows:

Size of Deflection Maximum Deflection

Pipe Angle (20-ft. Length) 4”-12" 2 degrees 8"

14" + 1.5 degrees 6"

U. Use short lengths of pipe (minimum length 3 feet, no more than three short sections), when approved by the Contracting Officer, to make curves that cannot be made with full length sections of pipe without exceeding the allowable deflection. Making these curves will be at no additional cost to the Contracting Officer.

V. Furnish air relief valve assemblies in accordance with Drawings provided or as

specified in Specification Special Conditions section. The Contracting Officer will provide standard detail for additional air release valve assemblies. Any deviation from the standard detail, proposed by Contractor must be approved in advance.

W. Exercise particular care so that no high points are established where air can

accumulate. Install an air release valve and manhole, as extra Work to the Contract, when the Contracting Officer determines that unforeseen field conditions necessitate a change in the pipe profile that requires the installation of an air release valve and manhole. If the Contractor requests a change in the pipe profile solely for ease of construction, and the requested change requires the installation of an air release valve and manhole as determined by the Contracting Officer, the cost of furnishing and installing the air release valve and manhole will be at the expense of the Contractor.

X. All water mains 20” and greater in diameter shall be constructed using DIP only.

Other construction materials, such as PVC and HDPE, are limited to water mains 16” and under in diameter. Alternate materials for larger water mains may be approved by the Contracting Officer on a case-by-case basis.

Y. Marking tape to be provided along all mains and service lines installed. Marking

tape to be installed 12” below grade. Foil backing is not required on marking tape. Tape shall be colored blue for water mains and green for sewer. Marking tape along pressurized force mains shall be labeled “Pressurized Wastewater”.




3.02 CONSTRUCTION METHODS TO AVOID CONTAMINATION

A. Heavy particulates generally contain bacteria and prevent even very high chlorine concentrations from contacting and killing such organisms. It is essential that the procedures of this Section be observed to assure that a water main and its appurtenances are thoroughly clean for the final disinfection by chlorination.

B. Take precautions to protect the interior of pipes, fittings, and valves against

contamination. String pipe delivered for construction so as to keep foreign material out of the pipe. Close all openings in the pipeline with watertight plugs when pipe laying is stopped at the close of the day's work or for other reasons, such as rest breaks or meal periods. Use rodent-proof plugs approved by the Contracting Officer, where it is determined that watertight plugs are not practical and where thorough cleaning will be performed.

C. Delay in placement of delivered pipe invites contamination. The more closely the

rate of delivery is correlated to the rate of pipe laying, the lower the likelihood of contamination. Complete the joints of all pipe in the trench before stopping work. If water accumulates in the trench, keep the plugs in place until the trench is dry.

D. When encountering conditions on pre-existing pipe that requires packing, employ

yarning or packing material made of molded or tubular rubber rings, or rope of treated paper or other approved materials. Do not use materials such as jute, asbestos, or hemp. Handle packing material in a manner that avoids contamination.

E. Do not use contaminated material or any material capable of supporting prolific

growth of microorganisms for sealing joints. Handle sealing material or gaskets in a manner that avoids contamination. The lubricant used in the installation of sealing gaskets shall be suitable for use in potable water. Deliver the lubricant to the job in closed containers and keep it clean.

F. If dirt enters the pipe, and in the opinion of the Contracting Officer the dirt will not

be removed by the flushing operation, clean the interior of the pipe by mechanical means, then swab with a 1% hypochlorite disinfecting solution. Clean using a pig, swab, or "go-devil" only when the Contracting Officer has specified such and has determined that such operation will not force mud or debris into pipe joint spaces.

G. If the main is flooded during construction, the flooded section must be isolated

from the remainder of the installation as soon as practical. Submit a plan to the Contracting Officer on correcting the condition and do not proceed until authorized by the Contracting Officer. Replace or fully clean and disinfect the affected pipe at no additional cost to the Contracting Officer.





A. Prior to installation, inspect valves for direction of opening, freedom of operation, tightness of pressure containing bolting, cleanliness of valve ports and especially of seating surfaces, handling damage, and cracks. Correct defective valves or hold for inspection by the Contracting Officer.

B. Set and join to the pipe in the manner specified in Paragraph 3.01. Provide

valves with adequate support, such as crushed stone and concrete pads, so that the pipe will not be required to support the weight of the valve. Set truly vertical. If polyethylene is applied to the pipe, the entire valve shall be encased in polyethylene encasement prior to backfill. The polyethylene encasement shall be installed up to the operating nut leaving the operating nut, exposed and free to be operated.

C. Provide a valve box for each valve. Set the top of the valve box neatly to existing

grade, unless directed otherwise by the Contracting Officer. Do not install in a way that allows the transfer of shock or stress to the valve. Center and plumb the box over the wrench nut of the valve. Do not use valves to bring misaligned pipe into alignment during installation. Support pipe in such manner as to prevent stress on the valve.

D. Provide extension stem for each valve, topped with a standard 2-inch AWWA

nut. Pin the extension stem to the operating nut on the valves. Extension stem shall extend to with 12-inches of finished grade.

E. Provide valve marking posts, when authorized by the Contracting Officer, at

locations designated by Contracting Officer and in accordance with detail drawings.

3.04 THRUST RESTRAINT

A. Provide all plugs, caps, tees, and bends (both horizontal and vertical) with concrete thrust blocking and/or restrained joint pipe as represented on the Drawings, or specified in the Specification Special Conditions.

B. Place concrete thrust blocking between undisturbed solid ground and the fitting to be anchored. Install the concrete thrust blocking in accordance with Section Cast-In-Place Concrete and Standard Details provided. Locate the thrust blocking to contain the resultant thrust force while keeping the pipe and fitting joints accessible for repair, unless otherwise shown or directed.

C. Use restrained joints for all fittings and for a distance on either side of the fitting or valve. Determine minimum length of restrained joints using DIPRA- “Thrust Restrained Design for Ductile Iron Pipe”.

D. Provide temporary thrust restraint at temporary caps and plugs. Submit details of

temporary restraint to the Contracting Officer for approval. E. At connections with existing water mains where there is a limit on the time the

water main may be removed from service, use metal harnesses of anchor




clamps, tie rods and straps; mechanical joints utilizing set-screw retainer glands; or restrained push-on joints as permitted by the Contracting Officer. No restraining system can be installed without the approval of the Contracting Officer. Submit details of the proposed installation to the Contracting Officer for approval. For pipe up to 12-inches in size, use a minimum of two 3/4-inch tie rods. If approved for use, install retainer glands in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Material for metal harnessing and tie-rods shall be ASTM A36 or A307, as a minimum requirement.

F. Protection of Metal Harnessing: Protect ties rods, clamps and other metal

components against corrosion and by encasement of the entire assembly with 8-mil thick (12 mil thick in corrosive soils) loose polyethylene film in accordance with AWWA C105. Apply tape on all exposed tie rods prior to installing polyethylene.



Section 33 11 11 – Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe

Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe 33 11 11 - 1


PVC pressure pipe and fabricated fittings in nominal sizes 4-inches through 12-inches with cast iron pipe equivalent outside diameters.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

Submit manufacturer’s product data, installation instructions and certification for all materials to be furnished in accordance with Specification Section 01 33 00 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals. Submit classification and gradation test results for embedment and pipe backfill material.

PART 2: PRODUCTS Research has documented that certain pipe materials (such as polyvinyl chloride, polyethylene, and polybutylene) and certain elastomers (such as those used in gasket material) may be subject to permeation by lower-molecular weight organic solvents or petroleum products. Products supplied under this Section assume that petroleum products or organic solvents will not be encountered. If during the course of pipeline installation the Contractor identifies, or suspects the presence of petroleum products or any unknown chemical substance, notify the Contracting Officer immediately. Stop installing piping in the area of suspected contamination until direction is provided by the Contracting Officer. PVC Schedule 40 or 80 is not permitted for conveying wastewater or potable water within distribution or collection systems. However, it may be used in other applications, such as conveying chemicals or for drainage. 2.01 PIPE MATERIALS – WATER DISTRIBUTION

All PVC pipe shall be PVC 1120 pressure pipe made from class 12454 material as defined by ASTM D1784 with outside diameter dimensions of steel or cast iron pipe. The PVC compounds shall be treated or certified suitable for potable water products by the National Sanitation Foundation Testing Laboratory (NSF Standard No. 61). PVC pipe to be used for potable water shall be blue in color. PVC Pipe 4-inch through 12-inch: AWWA Standard C900, DR14 and where permitted DR18. DR25 pipe will not be allowed. DR14 shall not be subjected to pressures exceeding 250 psi. DR18 shall not be subjected to pressures exceeding 200 psi.

2.02 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE




A. PVC gravity sanitary sewer pipe shall be green in color and in accordance with provisions in following table except where specified differently on the Drawings:

B.

Type of service Acceptable Materials

Gravity Mains with depth of cover < 10 feet

PVC SDR 35

Gravity Mains with depth of cover 10-15 feet

PVC SDR 26

Gravity Mains with depth of cover > 15 feet

Ductile Iron Pipe

C. When solid wall PVC pipe 18-inches to 27-inches in diameter is required in SDR 26, provide pipe conforming to ASTM F679, except provide wall thickness as required for SDR 26 and pipe strength of 115 psi.

D. For sewers up to 12-inch diameter crossing over water lines, or crossing under water lines with less than 2-feet separation, provide minimum 150 psi pressure rated pipe conforming to ASTM D2241 with suitable PVC adapter couplings.

E. Joints: Spigot and integral wall section bell with solid cross section elastomeric or rubber ring gasket conforming to requirements of ASTM D3212 and ASTM F477, or ASTM D3139 and ASTM F477. Gaskets shall be factory-assembled and securely bonded in place to prevent displacement. Manufacturer shall test sample from each batch conforming to requirements ASTM D2444

F. Fittings: Provide PVC gravity sewer sanitary bends, tee, or wye fittings for new sanitary sewer construction. PVC pipe fittings shall be full-bodied, either injection molded or factory fabricated. Saddle-type tee or wye fittings are not acceptable.

G. Conditioning. Conditioning of samples prior to and during tests is subject to approval by the Contracting Officer. When referee tests are required, condition specimens in accordance with Procedure A in ASTM D618 at 73.4° F +/- 3.6° F and 50 percent relative humidity plus or minus 5 percent relative humidity for not less than 40 hours prior to test. Conduct tests under same conditions of temperature and humidity unless otherwise specified.

H. Pipe Stiffness. Determine pipe stiffness at 5 percent deflection in accordance with Test Method D 2412. Minimum pipe stiffness shall be 46 psi. For diameters 4-inches through 18-inches, test three specimens, each a minimum of 6-inches (150 mm) in length. For diameters 21-inch through 36-inch, test three specimens, each a minimum of 12-inch (300 mm) in length.




I. Flattening. Flatten three specimens of pipe, prepared in accordance with Paragraph 2.04F, in suitable press until internal diameter has been reduced to 60 percent of original inside diameter of pipe. Rate of loading shall be uniform. Test specimens, when examined under normal light and with unaided eye, shall show no evidence of splitting, cracking, breaking, or separation of pipe walls or bracing profiles. Perform the flattening test in conjunction with pipe stiffness test.

J. Joint Tightness. Test for joint tightness in accordance with ASTM D3212, except that joint shall remain watertight at minimum deflection of 5 percent. Manufacturer will be required to provide independent third party certification for joint testing each diameter of storm sewer pipe.

K. Purpose of Tests. Flattening and pipe stiffness tests are intended to be routine quality control tests. Joint tightness test is intended to qualify pipe to specified level of performance.

2.03 SANITARY SEWER FORCE MAIN PIPE

A. PVC sanitary sewer force main pipe shall be green in color. Provide approved PVC pressure pipe conforming to requirements for water service pipe, and conforming to minimum working pressure rating specified in Section 33 34 00 - Sanitary Sewer Force Mains.

B. Acceptable pipe joints are integral bell-and-spigot, containing a bonded-in elastomeric sealing ring meeting requirements of ASTM F477. In designated areas requiring restrained joint pipe and fittings, use approved joint restraint device conforming to UNI-B-13, for PVC pipe 12-inch diameter and less.

C. Fittings: Provide ductile iron fittings as per Section - Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings, except furnish fittings with one of following approved internal linings:

1. Nominal 40 Mils (35 Mils minimum) virgin polyethylene complying with ASTM D 1248, heat fused to interior surface of fitting

2. Nominal 40 Mils (35 Mils minimum) polyurethane

3. Nominal 40 Mils (35 Mils minimum) ceramic epoxy

4. Nominal 40 Mils (35 Mils minimum) fusion bonded epoxy

D. Exterior Protection: Provide polyethylene wrapping of ductile-iron fittings as required by Section 33 11 00.17 - Polyethylene Wrap.

E. Hydrostatic Tests: Hydrostatically test pressure rated pipe in accordance with Specifications.

2.04 RECEIVING, HANDLING AND STORAGE




A. Inspect pipe and appurtenances for defects prior to installation in the trench. Set aside and clearly mark defective, damaged or unsound material and hold material for inspection by the Contracting Officer.

B. Load and unload all materials in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations and in such a manner as to prevent damage. Do not drop pipe and accessories or handle them in a rough manner.

C. Provide safe storage for all materials. Cover stored pipe that will be exposed

to sunlight for periods longer than 6 months. Cover with canvas or other opaque material with provision for adequate air circulation. PVC pipe shall not be stored close to heat sources, such as heaters, boilers, steam lines, or engine exhaust.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

Follow the provisions of Section 33 11 00 - Piping - General Provisions, and Sanitary Sewer Force Mains in addition to the following requirements:

A. Remove all dirt and foreign matter from pipe before lowering it into the trench. Do

not place debris, hand tools, clothing or other materials in the pipe. Keep pipe clean during and after laying.

B. Lay pipe with the bell end pointing in the direction of work progress. Do not roll,

drop or dump pipe or appurtenances into the trench. C. Assemble push-on joints in accordance with the pipe manufacturer’s

recommendations. Assemble mechanical joints in accordance with the fitting manufacturer’s recommendations.

D. Cut pipe with pipe saws, circular saws, handsaws, or similar equipment. Provide

a smooth end at a right angle to the longitudinal axis of the pipe. Deburr, bevel, and re-mark insertion line on spigot ends. Match factory bevel length and angle for field bevels. When connecting to certain shallow depth bells, such as those on some cast iron fittings and valves, cut off the factory bevel and prepare a deburred, square cut end with a slight outer bevel.

E. Clean the sealing surface of the spigot end, the pipe bell, the coupler or fitting,

and the elastomeric gaskets immediately before assembly. Do not remove factory installed gaskets for cleaning. Keep the joint free of dirt, sand, grit, grease or any foreign material. Apply approved lubricant when assembling gasketed joints in accordance with the pipe manufacturer’s requirements. The use of improper lubricants can damage gaskets. Excessive lubricant use can make disinfection more difficult and cause taste and odor problems when the line is placed in service.




F. Good pipe alignment is essential for proper joint assembly. Align the spigot to the bell and insert the spigot into the bell until it contacts the gasket uniformly. Do not swing or “stab” the joint; that is, do not suspend the pipe and swing it into the bell. The spigot end of the pipe is marked by the manufacturer to indicate the proper depth of insertion. Avoid metal to plastic contact with the pushing the pipe home (use wood or other material to cushion moving the pipe.

G. Assemble pipe using the following types of joints:

1. Gasketed bell joint – Integral with the pipe or fitting

2. Gasketed coupling – A double gasketed coupling

3. Mechanical joint – Any of the several joint designs that have gaskets and bolts manufactured in accordance with AWWA standards.

H. Tracer Wire

1. Place tracer wire in accordance with Section 33 05 27 - Tracer Wire. 2. The wire shall be contiguous except at test stations, valve boxes, and

where splicing is required. All splices shall be encased with a 3M-Gel Pack Model No. 054007-09053, or approved equal.

I. All pressure and leakage testing shall be done in accordance with Specification


J. PVC pipe fittings shall employ ductile iron pipe fittings per Specifications 15105. See detail drawings for transitions between different pipe materials.

K. Gaskets - Gaskets shall be as provided or recommended by the manufacturer

and satisfy AWWA standard C111 in all respects. Where ductile iron pipe and PVC pipe are directly connected, the appropriate gasket material for this purpose shall be employed. As noted in the products section of this specification, some gasket materials are prone to permeation of certain hydrocarbons which may exist in the soil (see Part 2). Under these conditions and at the discretion of the Contracting Officer, Contractor shall require contractor to provide FKM (Viton, Flourel) gasket material in areas of concern.

3.02 SERVICE CONNECTIONS

A. Install service connections in accordance with AWWA Standard C605 and the

manufacturer’s recommendations using the following methods:

1. Tapping is only permitted through the use of service clamps or saddles.

2. Using injection molded couplings with threaded outlets.

3. Tapping with large service connections through appropriately sized tapping sleeves and valves.




4. Direct tapping of 1-inch and smaller service connections is not permitted. Use service saddles only for AWWA Standard C900 pipe, for nominal pipe sizes 6-inch through 12-inch. Corporation stops shall be threaded and conform to AWWA Standard C800.

5. The distance between the PVC pipe joint and a service tap (2-inchs and smaller) shall be a minimum of 3 feet. The distance between the PVC pipe joint and a service tap (4-inchs and larger) shall be a minimum of 4 feet. Where necessary, excavate along the pipe to confirm the acceptable distance before starting the tap.



Section 33 11 17 – Polyethlene Wrap

Polyethylene Wrap 33 11 17 - 1

PART 1: GENERAL


A. The minimum requirements for polyethylene wrap to be used for external corrosion protection of buried ductile iron pipe, fittings, and appurtenances and for cast iron and ductile iron fittings on PVC pipe, and for barrier valves.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit product data for proposed film and tape for approval.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Polyethylene Film: Tubular or sheet form without tears, breaks, holidays, or defects; conforming with requirements of AWWA C105, 2.5 to 3 percent carbon black content, either low or high density:

1. Low-density polyethylene film shall be manufactured from virgin polyethylene material conforming to the following requirements of ASTM D4976.

a. Raw material.

1) Group: 2 (linear)

2) Class: C (black).

3) Density: 0.910 to 0.935 g/cm3

4) Dielectric strength: Volume resistivity, 1015 ohm-cm, minimum

b. Physical properties.

1) Tensile strength: 3600 psi, minimum.

2) Elongation: 800 percent, minimum.

3) Dielectric strength: 800 V/mil thickness, minimum.

c. Thickness: Low-density polyethylene film shall have normal thickness of 0.008 inch. Minus tolerance on thickness is 10 percent of nominal thickness.

2. High-density, cross laminated polyethylene film shall be manufactured from virgin polyethylene material conforming to the following requirements of ASTM D4976.

a. Raw material.

1) Group: 2 (linear)

2) Density: 0.940 to 0.960 g/cm3

3) Class: C (black)




4) Dielectric strength: Volume resistivity, 1015 ohm-cm, minimum.

b. Physical properties.

1) Tensile strength: 6300 psi, minimum.

2) Elongation: 100 percent, minimum.

3) Dielectric strength: 800 V/mil thickness, minimum.

c. Thickness: Film shall have nominal thickness of 0.004 inch. Minus tolerance of thickness is 10 percent of nominal thickness.

B. Polyethylene Tape: Provide minimum 2-inch-wide (3-inch typical), plastic-backed, adhesive tape.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Remove lumps of clay, mud, and cinders from pipe surface prior to installation of polyethylene encasement. Prevent soil or embedment material from becoming trapped between pipe and polyethylene.

B. Fit polyethylene film to contour of pipe to affect snug, but not tight fit; encase with minimum space between polyethylene and pipe. Allow sufficient slack in contouring to prevent stretching polyethylene where it bridges irregular surfaces, such as bell-spigot interfaces, bolted joints, or fittings, and to prevent damage to polyethylene due to backfilling operations. Secure overlaps and ends with adhesive tape to hold polyethylene encasement in place until backfilling operations are complete.

C. For installations below water table or in areas subject to tidal actions, seal both ends of polyethylene tube with adhesive tape at joint overlap.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Tubular Type (Method A):

1. Cut polyethylene tube to length approximately 2 feet longer than pipe section. Slip tube around pipe, centering tube to provide 1-foot overlap on each adjacent pipe section, and bunching it accordion-fashion lengthwise until it clears pipe ends.

2. Lower pipe into trench and make up pipe joint with preceding section of pipe. Make shallow bell hole at joints to facilitate installation of polyethylene tube.

3. After assembling pipe joint, make overlap of polyethylene tube. Pull bunched polyethylene from preceding length of pipe, slip it over end of adjoining length of pipe, and secure in place. Then slip end of polyethylene from adjoining pipe section over end of first wrap until it overlaps joint at end of preceding length of pipe. Secure overlap in place. Take up slack width at top of pipe to make snug, but not tight, fit along barrel of pipe, securing fold at quarter points.




4. Repair cuts, tears, punctures, or other damage to polyethylene. Proceed with installation of next section of pipe in same manner.

B. Tubular Type (Method B):

1. Cut polyethylene tube to length approximately 1 foot shorter than pipe section. Slip tube around pipe, centering it to provide 6 inches of bare pipe at each end. Take up slack width at top of pipe to make snug, but not tight, fit along barrel of pipe, securing fold at quarter points; secure ends.

2. Before making up joint, slip 3 foot length of polyethylene tube over end of preceding pipe section, bunching in accordion-fashion lengthwise. After completing joint, pull 3 foot length of polyethylene over joint, overlapping polyethylene previously placed on each adjacent section of pipe by at least I foot; make each end snug and secure.


C. Sheet Type:

1. Cut polyethylene sheet to length approximately 2 feet longer than pipe section. Center length to provide 1-foot overlap on each adjacent pipe section, bunching sheet until it clears pipe ends. Wrap polyethylene around pipe so that sheet circumferentially overlaps top quadrant of pipe. Secure cut edge of polyethylene sheet at intervals of approximately 3 feet.

2. Lower wrapped pipe into trench and makeup pipe joint with preceding section of pipe. Make shallow bell hole at joints to facilitate installation of polyethylene. After completing joint, make overlap and secure ends.


D. Pipe-shaped Appurtenances: Cover bends, reducers, offsets, and other pipe-shaped appurtenances with polyethylene in same manner as pipe.

E. Odd-shaped Appurtenances: When it is not practical to wrap valves, tees, crosses, and other odd-shaped pieces in tube, wrap with flat sheet or split length of polyethylene tube by passing sheet around appurtenance and encasing it. Make seams by bringing edges together, folding over twice, and taping down. Tape polyethylene securely in place at valve stem and other penetrations.

F. Openings in Encasement: Create openings for branches, service taps, blow-offs, air valves, and similar appurtenances by making X-shaped cut in polyethylene and temporarily folding back film. After appurtenance is installed, tape slack securely to appurtenance and repair cut, as well as other damaged area in polyethylene, with tape. Service taps may also be made directly through polyethylene, with resulting damaged areas being repaired as specified.

G. Junctions between Wrapped and Unwrapped Pipe: Where polyethylene-wrapped pipe joins adjacent pipe that is not wrapped, extend polyethylene wrap to cover adjacent pipe for distance of at least 3 feet. Secure end with circumferential turns




of tape. Wrap service lines of dissimilar metals with polyethylene or suitable dielectric tape for minimum clear distance of 3 feet away from cast or ductile iron pipe.

3.03 REPAIRS

A. Repair cuts, tears, punctures, or damage to polyethylene with adhesive tape or with short length of polyethylene sheet or cut open tube, wrapped around pipe to cover damaged area, and secured in place.



SECTION 33 12 16 – GATE VALVES

Gate Valves 33 12 16 - 1


Furnish, install, and test all gate valves shown on the Drawings. 1.02 SUBMITTALS

Submit shop drawings and manufacturer's literature to the Contracting Officer for approval in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals.

1.03 APPLICATION

All valves 3 inches through 16 inches shall be resilient-seated type gate valves. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 SMALL GATE VALVES

A. All gate valves, 3 inches through 16 inches NPS, shall be iron body, resilient-seated, nut-operated, non-rising stem gate valves suitable for buried service. The valve interior and exterior shall be epoxy coated at the factory by the valve manufacturer in accordance with AWWA Standard C550 (6-8 mil average, 4 mil minimum). The valves shall be designed for a minimum differential pressure of 250 psi and a minimum internal test pressure of 500 psi unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. Valves shall be designed to operate in the vertical position. All valves shall open left (CCW).

B. Valves shall comply fully with AWWA Standard C509. Valve ends shall be

restrained mechanical joint or as shown on the plans or approved in writing in accordance with AWWA Standard C111. Stems shall be made of a low zinc alloy in accordance with AWWA C509. Stem seals shall be double O-ring stem seals. Square operating nuts conforming to AWWA Standard C509 shall be used. Valves shall open left in accordance with standard. All valve materials shall meet the requirements of NSF 61.

C. For exposed piping, valves shall be flanged joint.

D. Test valves (Operation Test and Hydrostatic Tests) at the manufacturer’s plant in

accordance with AWWA Standard C509. Provide Contracting Officer with certified copies of all tests prior to shipment. The Contracting Officer reserves the right to observe all tests.


SECTION 33 12 16 – GATE VALVES

Gate Valves 33 12 16 - 2

2.02 LARGE GATE VALVES

A. Gate valves larger than 16-inches NPS shall be iron body, double disc (metal to metal seat), parallel seats, bronze mounted, rubber O-ring packing seals, epoxy coated interior and exterior meeting the requirements of AWWA Standard C550, and conforming to AWWA Standard C500. Stems shall be made of a low zinc alloy in accordance with AWWA C500. All valves shall have openings through the body of the same circular area as that of the pipe to which they are attached. All valves furnished shall open left (CCW) in accordance with the standard. All valve materials shall meet the requirements of NSF 61.

B. Test valves (Operation Test and Hydrostatic Tests) at the manufacturer’s plant in

accordance with AWWA Standard C500. Provide the Contracting Officer with certified copies of all tests prior to shipment. The Contracting Officer reserves the right to observe all tests.

C. Valves shall have mechanical joint ends unless otherwise designated on the

Drawings or approved by the Contracting Officer.

D. The valves shall be designed for a minimum differential pressure of 150 psi and a minimum internal test pressure of 300 psi, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. Make all valves tight under their working pressures after they have been placed and before the main is placed in operation. Any defective parts shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense.

2.03 VALVE EXTENSIONS

A. Valve extensions will be required on any gate valve where the distance from the

finished grade to the top of the operating nut exceeds 4 foot. Extension shall be of a locking type to prevent it from coming off the valve. Top of extension will be no deeper than 1 foot from finished grade.

PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install the valves in strict accordance with the requirements contained in Section 33 11 00 and detail Drawings. All valves shall be restrained.

3.02 PROTECTION

A. After field installation of the valve all external bolts except the operating nut shall receive a layer of tape coating or approved rubberized-bitumen based spray-on undercoating applied before backfill. All buried valves shall be encased in polyethylene encasement prior to backfill. The polyethylene encasement shall be installed up to the operating nut leaving the operating nut exposed and free to be operated. Valve box shall be installed per Specification Section 33 11 00.



SECTION 33 12 17 – TAPPING SLEEVES AND VALVES

Tapping Sleeves and Valves 33 12 17 - 1


Furnish, install and test all tapping sleeves, tapping valves, and tapping saddles as shown on the Drawings.

1.02 RELATED WORK Specification Section 33 11 00 - Piping - General Provisions 1.03 SUBMITTALS

Submit shop drawings and manufacturer's literature to the Engineer for approval in accordance with Specification Section 01 33 00 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals.

PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL

All tapping sleeves, saddles and valves shall be designed for a working pressure of at least 250 psig for 12-inch and smaller. The valves shall be designed for a minimum differential pressure of 250 psi and a minimum internal test pressure of 500 psi unless otherwise noted on the plans.

2.02 DUCTILE IRON TAPPING SLEEVES

A. Verify the type of existing pipe and the outside diameter of the pipe on which the tapping sleeve is to be installed. B. Tapping sleeves shall be ductile iron dual compression type unless otherwise specified on the Drawings. The Drawings may require the use of corrosion resistant tapping sleeves in addition to polywrap in areas with corrosive soils. The sleeves shall be made in two halves which can be assembled and bolted around the main. Sleeves shall meet the requirements of NSF 61. Outlet flanges shall conform to the flange requirements of AWWA C110. All valves furnished shall open left in accordance with the Contracting Officer’s standard. C. For size on size taps up to 12” x 12”, Contractor shall use ductile iron tapping sleeves. For applications greater than 12” x 12” a tapping sleeve and valve is not permitted. The tee and valve(s) shall be cut in to the existing main on applications larger than 12” x 12”.

2.03 TAPPING VALVES




A. The horizontal tapping valve shall conform to the applicable requirements of AWWA Standard C509. All tapping valves, 3 inches through 12 inches NPS, shall be ductile iron body, resilient-seated, nut-operated, non-rising stem gate valves suitable for buried service. The valve interior and exterior shall be epoxy coated at the factory by the valve manufacturer in accordance with AWWA Standard C550 (6-8 mil average, 4 mil minimum). The tapping valves shall have flanged inlets with mechanical joint outlets, enclosed bevel gears, bypass valve, rollers, tracks and scrapers. All valves furnished shall open left in accordance with the Contracting Officer’s standard.

2.04 STAINLESS STEEL TAPPING SLEEVES

A. The stainless steel band flange shall be manufactured in compliance with AWWA C207, Class D ANSI B.16.1 drilling, recessed for tapping valve MSS-SP60. Mechanical Joint tapping sleeve outlet shall meet or exceed all material specifications as listed below and be suitable for use with standard mechanical joint by mechanical joint resilient wedge gate valves per ANSI/AWWA C509-94 and be NSF 61 approved.

B. Stainless steel tapping sleeves are not permitted for size on size tapping applications. Ductile iron tapping sleeves must be used.

C. Tapping sleeves to be attached to 4” through 12” nominal pipe diameter shall

meet the following minimum requirements.

1. The entire fitting shall be stainless steel type 304 (18-8). The body, lug, and gasket armor plate shall be in compliance with ASTM A240. The Flange shall be cast stainless steel in compliance with ASTM A743. The MJ outlet shall be one-piece casting made of stainless steel. The test plug shall be ¾” NPT in compliance with ANSI B2.1 and shall be lubricated or coated to prevent galling. All metal surfaces shall be passivated after fabrication in compliance with ASTM A-380.

2. The gasket shall provide a 360-sealing surface of such size and shape to

provide and adequate compressive force against the pipe after assembly, to affect a positive seal under the combinations of joint and gasket tolerances. The materials used shall be vulcanized natural or vulcanized synthetic rubber with antioxidant and antiozonant ingredients to resist set after installation. No reclaimed rubber shall be used. A heavy-gauge-type 304-stainless armor plate shall be vulcanized into the gasket to span the lug area.

3. The lugs shall be heliarc welded (GMAW) to the shell. The lug shall have

a pass-through-bolt design to avoid alignment problems and allow tightening from either side of the main. Bolts shall NOT BE integrally welded to the sleeve. Finger Lug designs are not approved; it is the intent of these specifications to allow a tapping sleeve that has a lug design similar to the approved models.




4. Bolts and nuts shall be type 304 (18-8) stainless steel and Teflon coated or as specified in the bolt section below at the discretion of the Engineer. Bent or damaged units will be rejected.

5. Quality control procedures shall be employed to insure that the shell, Lug,

(4” and Larger Nominal Pipe Diameter) armor plate, gasket and related hardware are manufactured to be free of any visible defects. Each unit, after proper installation, shall have a working-pressure rating up to 250 psi.

6. The sleeve construction shall provide a positive means of preventing

gasket cold flow and/or extrusion.

7. Each sleeve shall be stenciled, coded or marked in a satisfactory manner to identify the size range. The markings shall be permanent type, water resistant, that will not smear or become illegible.

D. Tapping sleeves attached to 16” and larger nominal pipe diameter shall meet the

following minimum requirements:

1. The body shall be in compliance with ASTM A285, Grade C or ASTM A36. The test plug shall be ¾” NPT conforming to ANSI B2.1.

2. The gasket shall provide a watertight sealing surface of such size and

shape to provide an adequate compressive force against the pipe. After assembly, the gasket will insure a positive seal under all combinations of joint and gasket tolerances. Gaskets shall be formed from vulcanized natural or vulcanized synthetic rubber with antioxidant ingredients to resist set after installation. No reclaimed rubber shall be used.

3. Bolts and nuts shall be high strength, corrosion resistant, low alloy, pre

AWWA C111, ANSI A21.11 and as specified in the subsection on bolts in this specification.

4. Quality control procedures shall be employed to insure that the shell,

gaskets, and related hardware area are manufactured to be free of visible defects. Each unit, after proper installation, shall have a working-pressure rating up to 200 psi.

5. Unless otherwise noted, unit shall be protected by electrostatically

applied baked epoxy or polyurethane.

6. Units for concrete, steel cylinder pipe shall be furnished with load bearing setscrews on the gland flange to transfer loads on the outlet away from the steel cylinder and onto the sleeve. Epoxy –coated tapping sleeves do not require grout seal cavity (AWWA M-9 Manual).




7. Each sleeve shall be stenciled, coded or marked in a satisfactory manner to identify the size range. The marking shall be permanent type, water resistant, that will not smear or become illegible.

2.05 FABRICATED STEEL TAPPING SLEEVE

The fabricated steel tapping sleeve shall be manufactured in compliance with AWWA C207. Sleeves shall be fabricated of minimum three-eights (3/8) inch carbon steel meeting ASTM A285 Grade C. Outlet flange shall meet AWWA C-207, Class "D" ANSI 150 lb. drilling and be properly recessed for the tapping valve. Bolts and nuts shall be high strength low alloy steel to AWWA C111 (ANSI A21.11). Gasket shall be vulcanized natural or synthetic rubber. Sleeve shall have manufacturer applied fusion bonded epoxy coating, minimum 12 mil thickness, Class D ANSI B.16.1 drilling, recessed for tapping valve MSS-SP60. Mechanical Joint tapping sleeve outlet shall meet or exceed all material specifications as listed below and be suitable for use with standard mechanical joint by mechanical joint resilient wedge gate valves per ANSI/AWWA C509-94 and be NSF 61 approved.

2.06 TAPPING SADDLES

Unless otherwise specified by the Drawings, tapping saddles conform to the requirements of AWWA Standard C800 for the High Pressure class tapping saddles. Tapping saddles shall consist of ductile iron outlet castings, attached to the pipeline with high strength stainless steel straps. Castings shall be sealed to pipeline with O-ring seals. Saddles shall have ANSI A21.10 flanged outlets counterbored for use with tapping valves and tapping equipment.

2.07 BOLTS

All bolts shall have American Standard heavy unfinished hexagonal head and nut dimensions all as specified in ANSI B18.2. Bolts shall be Xylan or FluoroKote #1 suitable for direct bury in corrosive soils.

PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

Install the tapping sleeves, saddles, and valves in strict accordance with the requirements of Specification Section 33 11 00. Install the tapping sleeves, tapping saddles, and tapping valves in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. The tapping procedure is to be in accordance with the tapping machine manufacturer's instructions.




3.02 PROTECTION After field installation of the valve all external bolts except the operating nut shall receive a layer of tape coating or approved rubberized-bitumen based spray-on undercoating applied before backfill. If polyethylene is applied to the pipe, the entire sleeve and valve assembly shall be encased in polyethylene encasement prior to backfill. The polyethylene encasement shall be installed up to the operating nut leaving the operating nut of the tapping valve exposed and free to be operated.

3.03 PRELIMINARY TESTING

A. Perform a hydrostatic test of the tapping sleeve and valve assembly in accordance with Specification Section 33 01 10 after installation of the tapping sleeve and valve, but prior to making the tap. The test shall be made with the valve open using a tapped mechanical joint cap. No leakage is acceptable. The test pressure shall be maintained for a minimum of 15 minutes.

B. Perform hydrostatic test of tapping saddles in accordance with AWWA Standard

C800.



SECTION 33 12 19– FIRE HYDRANTS

Fire Hydrants 33 12 19 - 1

PART 1: GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. Fire hydrants.

B. Adjustment of fire hydrants and gate valves.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit name of hydrant manufacturer, type of bonnet paint, and engineering control drawing number for hydrant proposed for use.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.01 HYDRANTS

A. Provide hydrants in conformance with AWWA Standard C502, Dry Barrel Fire Hydrants (Latest Edition). Hydrants are approved by Contracting Officer by issuance of a Certificate of Responsibility. Hydrants shall open left (counterclockwise). The following hydrant has been approved. Alternate hydrants will not be considered.

APPROVED HYDRANT TYPE • The approved hydrant at all locations is Mueller Model Super Centurion

250.

B. The Contracting Officer may, at any time prior to or during installation of

hydrants, randomly select furnished hydrant for disassembly and laboratory inspection, at the Contracting Officer’s expense, to verify compliance with Specifications. When hydrant is found to be non-compliant, replace, at Contractor's expense, hydrants, with hydrants that comply with Specifications.

C. Provide lower hydrant barrel fabricated from Ductile Iron Pipe as single piece, connected to upper hydrant barrel by means of joint coupling that will provide three hundred sixty (360) degree rotation of upper barrel.

2.02 HYDRANT TEE

A. Fire hydrant installations shall require the use of a hydrant tee on the main line. Hydrant valves shall be bolted to the hydrant tee for all installations. Mechanical joint hydrant tee shall be ductile iron class 350 and shall be produced in accordance with ANSI/AWWA A21.53/C153 and ANSI/AWWA A21.11/C111 for joints and ANSI/AWWA A21.4/C-104 for cement lining in sizes 3” through 24”. Hydrant tee mechanical joint nuts and bolts shall be ductile iron, high strength, low alloy steel per ANSI/AWWA A21.11/C-111.

2.03 LEADS

A. Branches (Leads): Conform to requirements of Section 33 11 11 - Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe.

2.04 HYDRANT PAINTING




A. New hydrants and refurbished hydrants shall be shop coated as specified herein.

B. Exterior Above Traffic Flange (Including Bolts & Nuts).

1. Surface preparation to be in accordance with SSPC-SP 10 (NACE 2) near white blast cleaned surface.

2. Coat with three coat alkyd/silicone alkyd system with total dry film thickness (DFT) of 6 - 9 mils as follows:

a. Prime Coat - Oil modified alkyd primer, to be in general conformance with SSPC Paint Specification No. 25. Total dry film thickness (DFT) 2 - 3 mils.

b. Intermediate Coat - Heavy Duty Industrial Alkyd Enamel to be in general conformance with SSPC Paint Specification No. 104, and Federal Standard A-A-2962A. Total dry film thickness (DFT) of 2 -3 mils.

c. Finish Coat - Silicone Alkyd Resin Enamel to be in general conformance with SSPC Paint Specification No. 21. Total dry film thickness (DFT) to be 2 - 3 mils. Exception - hydrant bonnet shall not be finished shop coated, only intermediate coated. Install color coded finish coating of bonnet in field.

d. Bonnet Paint - Field apply finish coat of Silicone Alkyd Resin Enamel to be in general conformance with SSPC Paint Specification No. 21. Dry film thickness of 2 - 3 mils. Bonnet colors are to be as specified in Paragraph 3.01 to designate the available fire flow at 20 psi residual.

3. Colors - Primer: Manufacturers standard color. Finish coat of hydrant body and connection caps, to be painted to match the color of existing in service hydrants on the base. Approval of the color paint to be used on the hydrants shall be approved by the Project Manager prior to the final application of paint to the newly installed hydrant.

C. Field Maintenance Painting (Exterior Above Traffic Flange)

1. Surface Preparation to be in accordance with SSPC - SP2, Hand Tool Cleaning, or SSPC - SP3, Power Tool Cleaning, depending on condition of existing paint and extent of corrosion. It is not necessary to remove tightly adhered mill scale, rust, and paint. Mill scale, rust and paint are considered tightly adherent when they cannot be removed with dull putty knife. In some severe cases where it is necessary to remove majority of existing paint, surface should be cleaned in accordance with SSPC -SP11, Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal.

2. When surface is cleaned to bare metal (SSPC - SP11), coat hydrant with three coat Alkyd/Silicone Alkyd system in accordance with Paragraph 2.03.B.2 as for new hydrants. When surface is cleaned to SSPC - SP2 or SSPC - SP3, coat hydrant with Silicone Alkyd Resin Enamel in




general conformance with SSPC Paint Specification No. 21. Total dry film thickness of 3 - 6 mils surface is cleaned to bare metal (SSPC - SP11), coat hydrant with three coat Alkyd/Silicone Alkyd system in accordance with Paragraph 2.04.B.2 as for new hydrants.

D. Exterior Below Traffic Flange

1. Surface preparation in accordance with SSPC-SP10 (NACE 2) Near White Blast Cleaned Surface.

2. Primer and intermediate coat: coal tar epoxy in general conformance with SSPC Paint Specification No. 16. Apply two (2) coats with dry film thickness (DFT) of 8 - 10 mils each for total DFT of 16 -20 mils.

3. Finish coat: Water based vinyl acrylic mastic. Apply one coat with dry film thickness of 6 - 8 mils. Color of finish coat to be same as finish coat for exterior above traffic flange.

E. Interior Surfaces Above and Below Water Line Valve

1. Material used for internal coating of hydrant interior ferrous surfaces below water line valve must meet the requirements of local or State standards.

2. Coating shall be liquid or powder epoxy system in accordance with AWWA Standard C-550. Coating may be applied in two or three coats, according to manufacturer's recommendations, for total dry film thickness of 12 -18 mils.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Set fire hydrant plumb and brace at locations and grades as shown on Drawings. When barrel of hydrant passes through concrete slab, place 1-inch-thick piece of standard sidewalk expansion joint material around section of barrel passing through concrete.

B. Place 12-inch by 12-inch yellow indicators (plastic, sheet metal, plywood, or other material approved by the Contracting Officer) on pumper nozzles of new or relocated fire hydrants installed on new water lines not in service. Remove indicators after new water line is tested and approved by Project Manager.

C. Thrust blocks are required on all hydrant tees. If hydrant lateral is not restrained, contractor shall provide a thrust block behind hydrant shoe. Do not cover drain ports, bolts, or fittings when placing concrete thrust block.

D. Obtain the Contracting Officer’s approval in writing prior to installation of hydrants which require changes in bury depth due to obstructions not shown on Drawings. Unit price adjustments will not be allowed for changes in water line flow line or fire hydrant barrel length caused by obstructions.




E. Plug branch lines to valves and fire hydrants shown on Drawings to be removed. Deliver fire hydrants designated for salvage to the Contracting Officer at their base depot location.

F. Coating Requirements:

1. Apply coatings in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. No requirements of this specification shall cancel or supersede written directions and recommendations of specific manufacturer so as to jeopardize integrity of applied system.

G. Furnish affidavit of compliance that coatings furnished complies with requirements of this Specification and referenced standards, as applicable. Hydrant bonnet or cap shall be per base standards based on tested water pressure. Bonnet color shall be verified with Contracting Officer. Contractor shall verify if NFPA standards apply. Per NFPA standards, provide a color code for the hydrant bonnet to indicate the hydrant’s available flow at 20 psi according to the following table:

Supply Water Line Flow Characteristics Bonnet Color

Less than 500 GPM Red

500-999 GPM Orange

1000-1499 GPM Green

1500 GPM & Above Light Blue

H. Remove and dispose of unsuitable materials and debris in accordance with local or State requirements.



SECTION 33 31 11 – GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS

Gravity Sanitary Sewers 33 31 11 - 1

PART 1: GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. Gravity sanitary sewers and appurtenances.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit proposed methods, equipment, materials and sequence of operations for sewer construction. Plan operations to minimize disruption of utilities to occupied facilities or adjacent property.

C. Test Reports: Submit test reports and inspection videos as specified in Part 3 of this Section. Videos become property of AAFES.


A. Qualifications. Install sanitary sewer that is watertight both in pipe-to-pipe joints and in pipe-to-manhole connections. Perform testing in accordance with Section 33 01 30 - Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers.

B. Regulatory Requirements.

1. Install sewer lines to meet minimum State mandated separation distance from potable water lines. Separation distance is defined as distance between outside of water pipe and outside of sewer pipe. Install new sanitary sewers no closer to water lines than 10 feet in all horizontal directions. Where water and sanitary sewer lines cross, a minimum vertical separation in accordance with State and/or local standards is required when the water line passes above the sanitary sewer main. Where separation distance cannot be achieved, sanitary sewers shall be constructed of ductile iron sanitary sewer piping or encased in reinforced concrete (as detailed on the Drawings) for a minimum distance of 10 feet either side of the crossing.

2. Notify the Contracting Officer immediately when water lines are uncovered during sanitary sewer installation where minimum separation distance cannot be maintained.

3. Lay gravity sewer lines in straight alignment and grade.

1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Inspect pipe and fittings upon arrival of materials at job site.

B. Handle and store pipe materials and fittings to protect them from damage due to impact, shock, shear or free fall. Do not drag pipe and fittings along ground. Do not roll pipe unrestrained from delivery trucks.

C. Use mechanical means to move or handle pipe. Employ acceptable clamps, rope or slings around outside barrel of pipe and fittings. Do not use hooks, bars, or other devices in contact with interior surface of pipe to lift or move lined pipe.




PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPE

A. Provide piping materials for gravity sanitary sewers of sizes and types indicated on Drawings or as specified.

B. Unlined reinforced concrete pipe is not acceptable.

2.02 PIPE MATERIAL SCHEDULE

A. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, use pipe materials that conform to requirements specified in one or more of following Sections:

1. Section 33 11 11 - Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe.

B. Where shown on Drawings, provide pipe meeting minimum class, dimension ratio, or other criteria indicated.

C. Pipe materials other than those listed above shall not be used for gravity sanitary sewers.

2.03 APPURTENANCES

A. Laterals. Conform to requirements of Section 33 31 15 - Sanitary Sewer Service Laterals.

B. Service Connections. Conform to requirements of Section 33 31 15 - Sanitary Sewer Service Laterals.

C. Roof, street or other type of surface water drains shall not be connected or reconnected into sanitary sewer lines.

2.04 BEDDING AND BACKFILL MATERIAL

A. Bedding and Backfill: Conform to requirements of Section 31 23 33 - Excavation and Backfill for Utilities and Section 31 23 23 - Utility Backfill Materials.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Prepare traffic control plans and set up street detours and barricades in preparation for excavation when construction will affect traffic. Conform to requirements of MUTCD, and/or local standards where applicable.

B. Provide barricades, flashing warning lights, and warning signs for excavations. Conform to requirements MUTCD and/or local standards where applicable. Maintain barricades and warning lights where work is in progress or where traffic is affected.

C. Perform work in accordance with OSHA standards. Employ trench safety system for excavations over 5 feet deep.

D. Immediately notify agency or company owning utility line which is damaged, broken or disturbed. Obtain approval from the Contracting Officer and agency or utility company for repairs or relocations, either temporary or permanent.




E. Remove old pavements and structures including sidewalks and driveways in accordance with installation and DPW requirements.

F. Install and operate dewatering and surface water control measures in accordance with Contract Document requirements.

G. Do not allow sand, debris or runoff to enter sewer system.

3.02 DIVERSION PUMPING

A. All diversion and bypass pumping shall be performed in accordance with State and Local ordinances.

3.03 EXCAVATION

A. Earthwork. Conform to requirements of Section 31 23 33 - Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. Use bedding as indicated on Drawings.

B. Line and Grade. Establish required uniform line and grade in trench from benchmarks identified by the Contracting Officer. Maintain this control for minimum of 100 feet behind and ahead of pipe-laying operation. Use laser beam equipment to establish and maintain proper line and grade of work. Use of appropriately sized grade boards which are substantially supported is also acceptable. Protect boards and location stakes from damage or dislocation.

C. Trench Excavation. Excavate pipe trenches to depths shown on Drawings and as specified in Section 31 23 33 - Excavation and Backfill for Utilities.

3.04 PIPE INSTALLATION BY OPEN CUT

A. Install pipe in accordance with pipe manufacturer's recommendations and as specified in following paragraphs.

B. Install pipe only after excavation is completed, bottom of trench fine graded, bedding material is installed, and trench has been approved by the Contracting Officer.

C. Install pipe to line and grade indicated. Place pipe so that it has continuous bearing of barrel on bedding material and is laid in trench so interior surfaces of pipe follow grades and alignment indicated. Provide bell holes where necessary.

D. Install pipe with spigot ends toward downstream end of flow such that water flows into bell and out the spigot.

E. Form concentric joint with each section of adjoining pipe so as to prevent offsets.

F. Keep interior of pipe clean as installation progresses. Remove foreign material and debris from pipe

G. Provide lubricant, place and drive home newly laid sections with come-a-long winches so as to eliminate damage to sections. Install pipe to "home" mark where provided. Use of back hoes or similar powered equipment will not be allowed unless protective measures are provided and approved in advance by the Contracting Officer.

H. Keep excavations free of water during construction and until final inspection.




I. When work is not in progress, cover exposed ends of pipes with approved plug to prevent foreign material from entering pipe.

J. Where gravity sanitary sewer is to be installed under existing water line with separation distance of less than 2 feet, construct new sewer pipe so that 20 feet of ductile iron pipe is centered on water line crossing or encase the sewer line with reinforced concrete encasement as detailed on the plans. If gravity sanitary sewer is to be installed above existing water line, construct new sewer pipe so that 20 feet of ductile iron pipe is centered on water line crossing or encase the sewer line with reinforced concrete encasement. .

K. Where gravity sanitary sewer is to be installed under existing water line, install new sewer using ductile iron or encased in reinforced concrete encasement as shown on Drawings. Maintain minimum 2-feet separation distance.

L. Where the length of the stub is not indicated, install the stub to the right-of-way line and seal the free end with an approved plug.

3.05 PIPE INSTALLATION OTHER THAN OPEN CUT

A. For installation of pipe by directional drilling, conform to requirements of specification sections on directional drilling as appropriate.

3.06 INSTALLATION OF APPURTENANCES

A. Service Connections. Install service connections to conform to requirements of Section 33 31 15- Sanitary Sewer Laterals.

B. Construct manholes to conform to requirements of Section 03 48 10 - Precast Concrete Manholes.

3.07 INSPECTION AND TESTING

A. Visual Inspection: Check pipe alignment in accordance with Section 33 01 30 - Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers.

B. Mandrel Testing. Use Mandrel Test to test flexible pipe for deflection. Refer to Section 33 01 30 - Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers.

C. Pipe Leakage Test. After backfilling line segment and prior to tie-in of service connections, visually inspect gravity sanitary sewers where feasible, and test for leakage in accordance with Section 33 01 30 - Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers.

3.08 BACKFILL AND SITE CLEANUP

A. Backfill and compact soil in accordance with Section 31 23 33 - Excavation and Backfill for Utilities.

B. Backfill trench in specified lifts only after pipe installation is approved by the Contracting Officer.

C. Repair and replace removed or damaged pavement, curbs, gutters, and sidewalks as specified by local base regulations.



SECTION 33 31 12 – PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES

Precast Concrete Manholes 33 31 12 - 1

1. GENERAL


A. Precast concrete manholes for sanitary sewers and water lines or as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Precast concrete sanitary sewer manholes with fiberglass liner or sewer gas resistance epoxy coating where corrosion resistant manholes are specifically required to prevent early deterioration of the manhole.

C. Pile-supported concrete foundation used for unstable subgrade treatment for manhole base.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit manufacturer's data and details of following items for approval:

1. Shop drawings of manhole sections, base units and construction details, including reinforcement, jointing methods, materials and dimensions.

2. Summary of criteria used in manhole design including, as minimum, material properties, loadings, load combinations, and dimensions assumed. Include certification from manufacturer that precast manhole design is in full accordance with ASTM C 478 and design criteria as established in Paragraph 2.01E of this Specification.

3. Frames, grates, rings, and covers

4. Materials to be used in fabricating drop connections

5. Materials to be used for pipe connections at manhole walls

6. Materials to be used for stubs and stub plugs, if required.

7. Materials and procedures for corrosion-resistant liner and coatings, if required.

8. Plugs to be used for sanitary sewer hydrostatic testing

9. Manufacturer's data for pre-mix (bag) concrete, if used for channel inverts and benches.

2. PRODUCTS

2.01 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES

A. Provide manhole sections, base sections, and related components conforming to ASTM C 478. Provide base riser section with integral floors, unless shown otherwise. Provide adjustment rings which are standard components of manufacturer of manhole sections. Mark date of manufacture and name or trademark of manufacturer on inside of barrel.

B. Construct barrels for precast manholes from standard reinforced concrete manhole sections of diameter indicated on Standard Drawings. Use various lengths of manhole sections in combination to provide correct height with fewest joints.




C. Provide tops to support AASHTO HS-20 vehicle loading, and receive cast iron frame covers, as indicated on Standard Drawings.

D. For manholes larger than 48-inch diameter, provide precast base sections with flat slab top precast sections used to transition to 48-inch diameter manhole access riser sections. Transition can be concentric or eccentric unless otherwise requested by the Contracting Officer. Locate transition to provide minimum of 7-foot head clearance from base to underside of transition unless otherwise approved by the Contracting Officer.

E. Design Loading Criteria: Manhole walls, transition slabs, cone tops, and manhole base slab shall be designed by manufacturer, to requirements of ASTM C 478 for depth as shown on Standard Drawings and to resist the following loads.

1. AASHTO HS-20 vehicle loading applied to manhole cover and transmitted down to transition and base slabs

2. Unit soil weight of 120 lbs/ft3 located above portions of manhole, including base slab projections

3. Lateral soil pressure based on saturated soil conditions producing an at-rest equivalent fluid pressure of 100 lbs/ft3

4. Internal liquid pressure based on unit weight of 63 lbs/ft3

5. Dead load of manhole sections fully supported by transition and base slabs

F. Provide joints between sections with o-ring gaskets conforming to ASTM C443.

G. When base is cast monolithic with portion of vertical section, extend reinforcing in vertical section into base.

H. Precast Concrete Base: Suitable cutouts or holes to receive pipe and connections. Lowest edge of holes or cutouts: For water line manhole, no less than 6-inches above inside surface of floor of base.

2.02 CONCRETE

A. Conform to requirements of Section – 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete.

B. Channel Inverts: Use concrete for inverts not integrally formed with manhole base, with minimum compressive strength of 4000 psi.

C. Concrete Foundation: Provide concrete with minimum compressive strength of 4000 psi for concrete foundation slab under manhole base section as indicated on Standard Drawing.

2.03 REINFORCING BARS

A. Conform to the requirements of Section – 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete.

2.04 FRAMES AND COVERS

A. Use castings for frames, grates, rings and covers conforming to ASTM A48, Class 35B.

B. Use clean castings capable of withstanding application of AASHTO M306- 40,000 pound proof loading without detrimental permanent deformation.

C. Fabricate castings to conform to shapes and dimensions as shown on Standard Drawing, and cast with the wording or logo “SEWER”for sanitary




sewer and “WATER” for water system frames and covers. Standard dimensions for manhole frames and covers shall be either 24 or 30-inches in diameter.

D. Castings shall be smoooth and clean, and free from blowholes and other surface imperfections. Use clean and symmetrical cast holes in covers, free of plugs.

E. Provide watertight manhole frames and covers when the top of the frame and cover is below the 100-year flood elevation or when subjected to ponding. Watertight manhole frames and covers shall be provided with minimum of four bolts and gasket designed to seal cover to frame. Supply approved watertight manhole covers and frames.

2.05 DROP CONNECTIONS AND STUBS

A. All manhole drop connections shall be outside drop. Outside drops shall be provided when the invert elevation into the manhole is 24-inches higher than the manhole invert.

1. Pipe material used for outside drops shall be same pipe material as sewer main, or;

2. Ductile iron pipe as indicated on Standard Detail.

2.06 PIPE CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLE

A. Sanitary Sewers.

1. Provide resilient connectors conforming to requirements of ASTM C923. Use the following materials for metallic mechanical devices as defined in ASTM C923:

a. External clamps: Type 304 stainless steel

1) Internal, expandable clamps on standard manholes: Type 304 stainless steel, 11 gauge minimum.

2) Internal, expandable clamps on corrosion-resistant manholes:

b. Type 316 stainless steel, 11 gauge minimum

c. Type 304 stainless steel, 11 gauge minimum, coated with minimum 16 mil fusion bonded epoxy conforming to AWWA C213

2. Where rigid joints between pipe and cast-in-place manhole base are

specified, provide polyethylene-isoprene water-stop meeting physical property requirements of ASTM C923.

B. Water Lines

1. Where smooth exterior pipes, i.e., steel, ductile iron, or PVC pipes are connected to manhole base or barrel, seal space between pipe and manhole wall with assembly consisting of rubber gasket or links mechanically compressed to form a watertight barrier.

2. When connecting concrete or cement mortar coated steel pipes, or as option for connecting smooth exterior pipes to manhole base or barrel, space between pipe and manhole wall may be sealed with an assembly consisting of a stainless steel power sleeve, stainless steel take-up clamp and a rubber gasket. Take-up clamp: Minimum of 9/16-inch wide.




2.07 SEALANT MATERIALS

A. Provide sealing materials between precast concrete adjustment ring and manhole cover frame in accordance with ASTM C443.

2.08 CORROSION RESISTANT MANHOLE MATERIALS

A. Where corrosion-resistant manholes are required, such as a manhole receiving a force main or manholes located within a 1,000 feet down-stream of a force discharge, provide a fiberglass liner or sewer gas resistant epoxy coating for precast cylindrical manhole section, base sections, and cone sections. Liners relying on mechanically fastened batten strips as primary means of anchorage are unacceptable. All manholes with a corrosion resistant interior coating shall be provided with an exterior bituminous coating in locations where ground water table can reach above the base of the manhole.

2.09 BACKFILL MATERIALS

A. Conform to requirements of Section -31 23 33 Excavation and Backfill for Utilities.

2.10 NON-SHRINK GROUT

A. Provide prepackaged, inorganic, flowable, non-gas-liberating, non-metallic, cement-based grout requiring only addition of water.

B. Meet requirements of ASTM C1107 and have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 7000 psi.

2.11 VENT PIPES

A. Provide an external vent pipe for manholes for every third manhole when three or more consecutive water tight frame and covers are installed.

B. Vent opening to be located a minimum of 1 foot above 100 year flood plain.

C. Buried Vent Pipes: Provide appropriate size PVC or DIP as indicated on the Drawings.

D. Vent Outlet Assembly: Provide vent outlet assembly as shown on standard details.

2.12 PROHIBITED MATERIALS

A. Do not use brick masonry for construction of sanitary sewer manholes, including adjustment of manholes to grade. Use only specified materials listed herein.

2.13 MANHOLE LADDER FOR WATERLINE MANHOLES

A. Manhole Ladder: Fiberglass with 300-lb rating at appropriate length; conform to requirements of OSHA.

1. Use components, including rungs, made of fiberglass, fabricated with nylon or aluminum rivets and/or epoxy. Apply non-skid coating to ladder rungs. Mount ladder using manufacturer's recommended hardware.

2. Fiberglass: Premium type polyester resin, reinforced with fiberglass; constructed to provide complete wetting of glass by resin; resistant to rot, fungi, bacterial growth and adverse effects of acids, alkalis and residential and industrial waste; yellow in color.




B. Provide approved petroleum-based tape encapsulating bolts in access manhole.

3. EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that lines and grades are correct.

B. Obtain an adequate foundation for all manhole structures by removing and replacing unsuitable material with well-graded granular material, by tightening with coarse rock, or by such other means as provided for foundation preparation of the connected sewers, or as directed by the Contracting Officer.

C. Dewater sufficiently to maintain the ground water level at or below the bottom of the manhole foundation prior to and during the placement of the foundation.

D. Do not build manholes in ditches, swales, or drainage paths unless approved by the Contracting Officer.

3.02 PLACEMENT

A. Install precast manholes to conform to locations and dimensions as shown on Drawings.

B. Place sanitary manholes at points of change in alignment, grade, size, pipe intersections, and end of sewer unless otherwise directed by the Contracting Officer.

3.03 MANHOLE BASE SECTIONS AND FOUNDATIONS

A. Place precast base on 6-inch thick (minimum) foundation of crushed stone, or concrete foundation slab.

B. Unstable Subgrade Treatment: Notify the Contracting Officer immediately when unsatisfactory material is encountered in the manhole subgrade. With the Contracting Officer approval, up to 12-inches of additional undercut may be permitted to achieve suitable foundation. If the additional undercut does not result in a satisfactory foundation, the Contractor shall obtain a bedding design prepared by a Geotechnical Engineer licensed in the State in which the project is being constructed.

3.04 PRECAST MANHOLE SECTIONS

A. Install sections, joints, and gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's printed recommendations.

B. Install precast adjustment rings above tops of cones or flat-top sections as required to adjust finished elevation and to support manhole frame.

C. Seal any lifting holes with non-shrink grout.

D. Where fiberglass liners are required, seal joints between sections in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

E. Precast concrete grade rings shall be permitted to achieve the required grade. Grade rings shall not be permitted to more than 12-inches.

F. External joint wrap all riser joints to ensure seal. No grout is permitted on the interior of manhole riser joints prior to testing.

G. Concrete base must be dry prior to setting any sections above it.




3.05 PIPE CONNECTIONS AT MANHOLES

A. Install approved resilient connectors at each pipe entering and exiting manholes in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1. Where smooth exterior pipes, i.e. steel, ductile iron or PVC pipes are connected to manhole base or barrel, space between pipe and manhole wall shall be sealed with an assembly consisting of rubber gaskets or links mechanically compressed to form watertight barrier.

2. When connecting concrete or cement mortar coated steel pipes, or as an option for connecting smooth exterior pipes to manhole base or barrel, space between pipe and manhole wall may be sealed with an assembly consisting of stainless steel power sleeve, stainless steel take-up clamp and rubber gasket. Take-up clamp: Minimum of 9/16-inch wide.

B. Ensure no concrete, fill, or other rigid material is allowed to enter space between pipe and edge of wall opening at and around resilient connector on either interior or exterior of manhole. If necessary, fill space with compressible material to ensure full flexibility provided by resilient connector.

C. Where new manhole is constructed on existing sewer, rigid joint pipe may be used. Install waterstop gasket around existing pipe at center of cast-in-place wall. Join ends of split waterstop material at pipe springline using an adhesive recommended and supplied by waterstop manufacturer.

D. Test connection for watertight seal before backfilling, or at direction of the Contracting Officer.

3.06 INVERTS FOR SANITARY SEWERS

A. Construct invert channels to provide smooth flow transition waterway with no disruption of flow at pipe-manhole connections. Conform to following criteria:

1. Slope of invert bench: 1-inch per foot minimum; 1-1/2-inches per foot maximum

2. Depth of bench to invert:

a. Pipes smaller than 15-inches: one-half of largest pipe diameter

b. Pipes 15 to 24-inches: three-fourths of largest pipe diameter

c. Pipes larger than 24-inches: equal to largest pipe diameter

3. Invert slope through manhole: 0.17 foot (2-inches) drop across manhole with smooth transition of invert through manhole, unless otherwise indicated on Drawing.

Form invert channels with concrete if not integral with manhole base section. For direction changes of mains, construct channels tangent to mains with maximum possible radius of curvature. Provide curves for side inlets and smooth invert fillets for flow transition between pipe inverts.

3.07 DROP CONNECTIONS FOR SANITARY SEWERS

A. Install drop connection when sewer line enters manhole higher than 24-inches above invert of manhole




B. Backfill drop assembly shall be 3000 psi concrete to form solid encasement for all drop connections. Extend concrete encasement minimum of 4-inches outside bells, all per Standard Detail.

3.08 STUBS FOR FUTURE CONNECTIONS

A. In manholes, where future connections are indicated on Drawings, install resilient connectors and pipe stubs with approved watertight plugs.

3.09 MANHOLE FRAME AND ADJUSTMENT RINGS

A. Combine precast concrete or HDPE adjustment rings so elevation of installed casting cover matches pavement surface. Seal between concrete adjustment ring and precast top section with non-shrink grout; do not use mortar between adjustment rings. Apply latex-based bonding agent to precast concrete surfaces joined with non-shrink grout. Set cast iron frame on adjustment ring in bed of approved sealant material. Install sealant bed consisting of two beads of sealant, each bead having minimum dimensions of 1/2-inch and 1/2-inch wide.

B. Wrap manhole frame and adjustment rings with external sealing material, minimum 3-inches beyond joint between ring and frame and adjustment rings and precast section.

C. For manholes in unpaved areas, set top of frame flush with existing grade upto a maximum of 12-inches above existing grade, unless otherwise noted. In unpaved areas, encase manhole frame in mortar or non-shrink grout placed flush with face of manhole ring and top edge of frame. Provide rounded corner around perimeter.

3.10 BACKFILL

A. Place and compact backfill materials in area of excavation surrounding manholes in accordance with requirements of Section 31 23 33 - Excavation and Backfill for Utilities.

B. Where rigid joints are used for connecting existing sewers to manhole, backfill existing sewer up to springline of pipe with flowable fill.

C. In unpaved areas, provide positive drainage away from all manhole frames to natural grade. Provide restoration of disturbed areas in accordance with Section 32 92 00 – Lawn Restoration.

3.11 DOGHOUSE MANHOLE

A. Existing sewer pipe to remain until satisfactory completion of manhole testing.

B. Crown of existing pipe shall be flush with concrete shelf that is formed within the manhole.

C. Doghouse manholes shall be constructed as per Standard Details.


A. Conduct testing of manholes in accordance with requirements of Section 33 01 30- Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers.

3.13 PROTECTION

A. Protect manholes from damage until Work has been accepted. Repair damage to manholes at no additional cost.






SECTION 33 41 00 – STORM SEWERAGE SYSTEM

Storm Sewage System 33 41 00 - 1

1. GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work of this Section includes the following:

1. Site storm sewerage drainage piping, fittings and accessories, and bedding. 2. Connection of drainage system to existing system. 3. Catch basins, paved area drainage, and site surface drainage.

B. Related Sections

1. Section 01 00 00 – Requirements of JBSA- Fort Sam Houston. 2. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete 3. Section 31 20 00 – Earth Moving 4. Section 31 23 23 – Utility Backfill Materials 5. Section 31 23 33 – Excavation Backfill and Compaction for Utilities 6. Section 33 11 00 – Piping-General Provisions 7. Section 33 31 11 – Gravity Sanitary Sewers

1.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS/REFERENCES

A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)

1. AASHTO M198 - (1990;R 1993) Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe Using Flexible Watertight Gaskets.

B. American Concrete Pipe Association

1. ACPA 01-102 - (1988) Concrete Pipe Handbook 2. ACPA 01-103 - (1990) Concrete Pipe Installation Manual

C. ASTM International

1. ASTM A 497 - (1990; Rev B) Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement

2. ASTM A 615/A 615/M - (1993) Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

3. ASTM C 76 - (1990) Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe 4. ASTM C 139 - (1973; Rev. 1989) Concrete Masonry Units for Construction of

Catch Basins and Manholes 5. ASTM C 270 - (1994) Mortar for Unit Masonry 6. ASTM C 443 - (1985; Rev. A, R 1990) joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and

Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets 7. ASTM C 476 - (1991) Grout for Masonry 8. ASTM D 3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)

Sewer Pipe and Fittings. 9. ASTM D 3139 - Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric

Seals. 10. ASTM D 3212 - (1992) Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible




Elastomeric Seals. 11. ASTM D 4101 - (1992; Rev. B) Propylene Plastic Injection and Extrusion Materials 12. ASTM F 477 - (1993) Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe 13. ASTM F 794 - (1993; Rev. A) Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Corrugated Sewer Pipe

with a Smooth Interior and Fittings

D. Federal Specification

E. FS RR-F-621 - (Rev. E) Frames, Covers, Gratings, Steps, Sump and Catch Basin, Manhole

F. State of Texas, Department of Transportation (TX DOT).

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 33 00 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals.

B. Test Reports: Certified copies of test reports demonstrating conformance to the applicable pipe specifications shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer for review before the pipe is installed.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures required to install Products specified.

D. Manufacture's product data on all pipe.

E. As-Built Survey indicating Catch Basin and Pipe locations and Inverts.

F. Certification: Certify that materials comply with specification requirements.

G. Accurately record actual locations of pipe runs, connections, catch basins, curb inlets, cleanouts, and invert elevations.

H. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities.

1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver material with manufacture's tags and labels intact.

B. Handle and store so as to avoid damage.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the Work with termination of storm sewer connection outside building, trenching, and connection to building drainage piping.

B. Accurately record actual locations of pipe runs, connections, catch basins, curb inlets,




cleanouts, and invert elevations.

C. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPELINE MATERIALS

A. Concrete Pipe and Fittings: Storm drainage pipe 18" and larger shall be reinforced concrete pipe conforming to ASTM C 76, Class III

1. Concrete Pipe Joints shall conform to ASTM C443, and gaskets shall be suitable for use with sewage.

B. PVC Pipe and Fittings: Storm drainage pipe 6" to 15" shall be ASTM D3034, SDR 35.

1. Joints shall conform to ASTM D3212, and gaskets shall conform to ASTM F477.

C. Corrugated Plastic Pipe (Smooth Interior) and Fittings: Use for pipes 4 inches in diameter or smaller. Corrugated Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe shall conform to ASTM F 794. PVC fittings shall conform to ASTM D 1784.

1. Joints shall conform to ASTM D3212, and gaskets shall conform to ASTM F477.

D. Drain Tile: Storm drain tile pipe 4” to 8” shall be ASTM D6707 and be fitted with a filter sock meeting Ontario Provincial Standard Specification 1860, Material Specifications for Geotextiles, dated March 1998. Connections from drain tile to PVC storm sewer shall be made with Ferco 1070-1071 corrugated pipe couplings.

E. Mortar: ASTM C 270, Type M.

F. Water: Water for masonry mortar shall be fresh, clean and potable.

G. Grout: ASTM C 476.

2.2 PIPE CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLE

A. Sanitary Sewers.

1. Provide resilient connectors conforming to requirements of ASTM C923. Use the following materials for metallic mechanical devices as defined in ASTM C923:

a. External clamps: Type 304 stainless steel

1) Internal, expandable clamps on standard manholes: Type 304 stainless steel, 11 gauge minimum.

2) Internal, expandable clamps on corrosion-resistant manholes:

b. Type 316 stainless steel, 11 gauge minimum

c. Type 304 stainless steel, 11 gauge minimum, coated with minimum 16 mil fusion bonded epoxy conforming to AWWA C213




2. Where rigid joints between pipe and cast-in-place manhole base are

specified, provide polyethylene-isoprene water-stop meeting physical property requirements of ASTM C923.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Pipe Joints: Mechanical clamp ring type, expanding and contracting sleeve, neoprene ribbed gasket for positive seal.

B. Fittings: Same material as pipe molded or formed to suit pipe size and end design, in required tee, bends, elbows, cleanouts, reducers, traps and other configurations required.

C. For requirements refer to specification Section 01 00 00 Requirements of F.H.

D. Grout: as required in specification Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete. Materials: ASTM D 3212 for PVC pipe joints with ASTM F 477

2.4 DRAINAGE STRUCTURES

A. Precast Concrete Structures: ASTM C 478, except as specified herein. Provide an air content of 6 percent, plus or minus 3 percent and a minimal wall thickness of 5 inches. ASTM A 615/A 615M reinforcing bars. ASTM A 497 welded wire fabric. ASTM C 443 or AASHTO M 198, Type B gaskets for joint connections. Provide a 4-inch layer of clean gravel bedding with a maximum size of 2 inches.

B. Concrete Headwalls: Provide cast in place concrete and steal reinforcement in accordance with specification Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete.

C. Masonry Materials: Shall conform to the following specifications and other requirements specified hereunder.

2.5 METAL ITEMS

A. Frames, Covers and Gratings shall be Traffic rated.

B. Frames, Covers and Gratings shall be Traffic rated.

C. All drainage castings shall be marked “DUMP NO WASTE. DRAINS TO WATERWAYS”.

D. Drainage Structure Steps: Zinc-coated steel conforming to ANSI A14.3. Plastic or rubber coating pressure-molded to the steel. Plastic coating shall conform to ASTM D 4101, copolymer polypropylene. Rubber shall conform to ASTM C 443, except shore A durometer hardness shall be 70, plus or minus 5. Steps are not required in manholes, curb inlets or catch basins less than 4 feet in depth.




2.6 MANHOLES

A. Provide as specified in 03 31 12 Precast Concrete Manholes.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that trench cut is ready to receive work and excavations, dimensions, and elevations are as indicated on drawings.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Hand trim excavations to required elevations. Correct over excavation with coarse aggregate.

B. Remove large stones or other hard matter which could damage piping or impede consistent backfilling or compaction.

C. Prior to the construction of any storm sewer, the Contractor's surveyor shall place adequate line and grade stakes and shall also set stakes and furnish grades so that all structure tops can be set to finish grade, in accordance with the approved plans.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF PIPELINES AND APPURTENANT CONSTRUCTION

A. Location: The work covered by this section shall terminate at a point approximately 5 feet from the building.

B. Earthwork: Perform earthwork operations in accordance with specification Section 02300 – Earthwork, Section 31 20 00 – Earth Moving, Section 31 23 23 – Utility Backfill Materials, and Section 31 23 33 – Excavation Backfill and Compaction for Utilities

C. Pipe Laying and Jointing: Replace, by one of the proper dimensions, any pipe or fitting that does not allow sufficient space for proper caulking or installation of joint material. At the end of each work day, close open ends of pipe temporarily with wood blocks or bulkheads.

D. Connections to Existing Lines: Notify the Installation Contracting Officer in writing at least 10 days prior to the date that connections are to be made. Obtain approval of the Contracting Officer before interrupting service. Conduct work so that there is a minimal interruption of service on existing lines.

E. Special Requirements of Installation of Concrete Piping: Install pipe and fittings in accordance with the general requirements and procedures for the installation of piping and with the provisions for rubber gasket jointing and jointing procedures of ACPA 01-103 or of ACPA 01-102, Chapter 9. Make joints with the gaskets previously specified for joints with this piping. Clean and dry surfaces receiving lubricants, cements or




adhesives. Affix gaskets to pipe not more than 24 hours prior to the installation of the pipe. Protect gaskets from the sun, blowing dust and other deleterious agents at all times. Before installation of the pipe, inspect gaskets and remove and replace loose or improperly affixed gaskets. Align each pipe section with the previously installed pipe section, and pull the joint together. If while pulling the joint, the gasket becomes loose and can be seen through the exterior joint recess when the pipe is pulled up to within one inch of closure, remove the pipe and remake the joint.

F. Special Requirements of Installation of Corrugated Plastic Piping: Install pipe and fittings in accordance with the general requirements and procedures for the installation of piping and with the recommendations of the PVC pipe manufacturer. Utility Line Marking: For requirements see specification Section 01 00 00 – Requirements of F.H.

3.4 PIPELINE TESTING

A. Check each straight run of pipeline for gross deficiencies by holding a light in a manhole; it shall show a practically full circle of light through the pipeline when viewed from the adjoining end of line.

B. PVC Pipe Deflection Test:

1. General: a. Test installed pipeline for deflection by pulling a mandrel through sewer

without aid of mechanical pulling device. b. Perform test at least 30 days after trench backfill and compaction have been

completed. c. No pipe shall exceed a deflection of 5 percent.

2. Mandrel: a. Full circle, solid or rigid odd number of legs (minimum 9 legs) steel cylinder

with pulling rings at each end. b. Diameter: Sized to allow only as much initial deflection for ultimate deflection

of 5 percent. c. Obtain Contracting Officer approval for use of mandrel smaller than 96-2/3

percent of inside diameter of pipe. 3. Correcting Deficiencies or Obstructions:

a. Excavate to spring line of pipeline and replace and re-compact pipe zone material.

b. Internal pipe re-rounding or vibration will not be allowed. c. If pipe does not pass mandrel test after replacement of pipe zone material and

trench backfill, re-excavate and replace pipeline.
